Table of Contents 
Course Guide ix-xvi 
Topic 1 Whole Numbers 1 
1.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 2 
1.1.1 Whole Numbers Computation 2 
1.1.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 3 
1.1.3 Computational Procedure 4 
1.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Whole Numbers 5 
1.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 6 
1.3.1 Basic Operations of Whole Number 6 
1.3.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 15 
Summary 18 
Key Terms 18 
References 18 
Topic 2 Fractions 20 
2.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 21 
2.1.1 Types of Fractions 22 
2.1.2 Equivalent Fractions 23 
2.1.3 Simplifying Fractions 25 
2.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Fractions 26 
2.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 27 
2.3.1 Improper Fractions 27 
2.3.2 Mixed Numbers 29 
2.3.3 Addition of Fractions 31 
2.3.4 Subtraction of Fractions 33 
2.3.5 Multiplication of Fractions 35 
2.3.6 Division of Fractions 37 
Summary 39 
Key Terms 40 
References 40 
Topic 3 Decimals 41 
3.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 42 
3.1.1 Meanings of Decimals 43 
3.1.2 Decimal Fractions 43 
3.1.3 Extension of Base-10 Place Value System 45 
3.1.4 Decimal Place 46
i v X TABLE OF CONTENTS 
3.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Decimals 47 
3.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 49 
3.3.1 Decimal Numbers 49 
3.3.2 Converting Fractions to Decimal Numbers 51 
and Vice Versa 
3.3.3 Addition of Decimal Numbers 53 
3.3.4 Subtraction of Decimal Numbers 55 
3.3.5 Multiplication of Decimal Numbers 57 
3.3.6 Division of Decimal Numbers 59 
Summary 61 
Key Terms 62 
References 62 
Topic 4 Money 63 
4.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 64 
4.1.1 Teaching Children About Money 64 
4.1.2 Teaching Money Concepts 65 
4.1.3 Using Coins to Model Decimals 67 
4.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Money 68 
4.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 68 
4.3.1 Basic Operations on Money 69 
4.3.2 Problem Solving on Money 73 
Summary 76 
Key Terms 76 
References 77 
Topic 5 Percentages 78 
5.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 79 
5.1.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent 79 
5.1.2 Teaching Aids in Learning Percent 81 
5.1.3 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 82 
5.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Percentage 83 
5.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 84 
5.3.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent 84 
5.3.2 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 87 
Summary 93 
Key Terms 94 
References 94
TABLE OF CONTENTS W v 
Topic 6 Time 95 
6.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 97 
6.1.1 History of Time 97 
6.1.2 Time Zones 98 
6.1.3 Telling the Time Correctly 99 
6.1.4 24-hour System 101 
6.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Time 103 
6.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 104 
6.3.1 Time in the 24-hour System 104 
6.3.2 Converting Time in Fractions and Decimals 107 
6.3.3 Year, Decade, Century and Millennium 109 
6.3.4 Basic Operations Involving Time 111 
6.3.5 Duration of an Event 113 
6.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Time 115 
Summary 117 
Key Terms 117 
References 118 
Topic 7 Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 119 
7.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 121 
7.1.1 Historical Note on Measurement 122 
7.1.2 The Basic Principles of Measurement 123 
7.1.3 The Meanings of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 124 
7.1.4 Units of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 126 
7.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Measurement in 
Year 5 and Year 6 127 
7.3 Teaching And Learning Activities 129 
7.3.1 Length 129 
7.3.2 Basic Operations on Length 131 
7.3.3 Mass 133 
7.3.4 Problem Solving Involving Mass 135 
7.3.5 Volume of Liquids 137 
7.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Volume of Liquids 139 
Summary 141 
Key Terms 142 
References 142 
Topic 8 Shape and Space 143 
8.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 144 
8.1.1 Geometric Formulas 144 
8.1.2 Perimeter and Area 145 
8.1.3 Volume 147
v i X TABLE OF CONTENTS 
8.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Shapes 148 
8.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 150 
8.3.1 Finding Perimeter 150 
8.3.2 Finding Area 154 
8.3.3 Finding Volume 157 
Summary 159 
Key Terms 160 
References 160 
Topic 9 Averages 161 
9.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 162 
9.1.1 Teaching Averages 162 
9.1.2 Measures of Central Tendency 163 
9.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Averages 166 
9.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 167 
9.3.1 Meaning of Average 167 
9.3.2 Calculating Average 171 
Summary 175 
Key Terms 175 
References 176 
Topic 10 Data Handling 177 
10.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 178 
10.1.1 Statistical Measures 179 
10.1.2 Collecting, Recording, Organising and Interpreting 181 
Data 
10.1.3 Methods of Organising Data 183 
10.1.4 Types of Graphs 186 
10.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Data Handling in Year 5 190 
and Year 6 
10.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 192 
10.3.1 Average 192 
10.3.2 Organising and Interpreting Data 194 
10.3.3 Pie Chart 196 
10.3.4 Problem Solving 198 
Summary 200 
Key Terms 201 
References 201
Topic 
1 
 Whole 
Numbers 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the importance of developing number sense for whole 
numbers to 1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics; 
2. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to whole numbers to 1,000,000; 
3. Show how to use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division of whole numbers correctly; 
4. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division 
of whole numbers in the range of 1,000,000; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for whole numbers, 
addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in 
the range of 1,000,000. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Welcome to the first topic of Teaching of Elementary Mathematics Part IV. What 
is your expectation of this topic? Well, this topic has been designed to assist you 
in teaching whole numbers to primary school pupils in Years Five and Six. 
For hundreds of years, computational skills with paper-and-pencil algorithms have 
been viewed as an essential component of children’s mathematical achievement. 
However, calculators are now readily available to relieve the burden of 
computation, but the ability to use algorithms is still considered essential. In An 
Agenda for Action (NCTM, 2000, p. 6), the NCTM standards support the 
decreased emphasis on performing paper-and-pencil calculations with numbers 
more than two digits. Most of the operations in this topic will cover the content 
area of whole numbers to 1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics.
2  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
Computation with whole numbers continues to be the focus of KBSR Mathematics. 
Thus, when you observe a classroom mathematics lesson, there is a high probability 
you will find a lesson related to computation being taught. 
The National Council of Teachers of Mathematics (NCTM) emphasises the 
importance of computational fluency, that is, “having efficient and accurate 
methods for computing” (NCTM, 2000, pg. 152). Computational fluency includes 
children being able to flexibly choose computational methods, understand these 
methods, explain these methods, and produce answers accurately and efficiently. 
1.1.1 Whole Numbers Computation 
A common but rather narrow view of whole numbers computation is that it is a 
sequence of steps to arrive at an answer. These sequence or step-by-step 
procedures are commonly referred to as algorithms. Tell your pupils, that there are 
three important points that need to be emphasised when teachers talk about whole 
numbers computation. 
(a) Computation is much broader than using just standard paper-and-pencil 
algorithms. It should also include estimation, mental computation, and the 
use of a calculator. Estimation and mental computation often make better 
use of good number sense and place-value concepts. 
(b) Children should be allowed ample time and opportunity to create and use 
their own algorithms. The following shows a child’s procedure for 
subtracting (Cochran, Barson, & Davis, 1970): 
64 
- 28 
- 4 
+40 
36 
1.1 
ACTIVITY 1.1 
Talk to children in your classroom about the algorithms they use to 
solve problems. Describe these algorithms.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  3 
What is the child doing? His thinking could be as follows: “4 minus 8 is -4, 
60 minus 20 is 40. -4 plus 40 is 36”! 
This child’s method might not make sense to all or most children, however, 
it did make sense to that child, which makes it a powerful and effective 
method for him at that moment. 
(c) There is no one correct algorithm. Computational procedures may be altered 
depending on the situation. There are many algorithms that are efficient and 
meaningful. For this reason, teachers should be familiar with some of the 
more common alternative algorithms. 
Alternative algorithms may help children develop flexible mathematical 
thinking and may also serve as reinforcement, enrichment, and remedial 
objectives. 
1.1.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 
Estimation and mental computation skills should be developed along with paper-and- 
pencil computation because these help children to spot unreasonable answers. 
Teachers should also provide various sources for computational creativity for 
children. 
(a) Mental Computation 
Sometimes, we need to do mental computation to estimate the quantity or 
volume. Mental computation involves finding an exact answer without the 
aid of paper and pencil, calculators, or any other device. Mental computation 
can enhance understanding of numeration, number properties, and 
operations and promote problem solving and flexible thinking (Reys, 1985; 
Reys and Reys, 1990). 
When children compute mentally, they will develop their own strategies 
and, in the process, develop good number sense. Good number sense helps 
pupils use strategies effectively. Teachers should explain to the children how 
to do mental computation. You should also encourage children to share and 
explain how they did a problem in their heads. Children often can learn new 
strategies by hearing their classmates’ explanations. 
Mental computation is often employed even when a calculator is used. For 
example, when adding 1,350, 785, 448, and 1,150, a child with good number 
sense will mentally compute “1,350 plus 1,150” and key in 2,500 into the 
calculator before entering the other numbers (Sowder, 1990).
4  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
(b) Estimation 
You should know that estimation involves finding an approximate answer. 
Estimation may also employ mental computation, but the end result is only 
an approximate answer. Teachers should ensure that children are aware of 
the difference between Mental Computation and Estimation. 
Reys (1986) describes four strategies for whole number computational 
estimation. They are the front-end strategy, rounding strategy, clustering 
strategy, and compatible number strategy. The definition of each strategy is 
as follows: 
(i) Front-end strategy 
The front-end strategy focuses on the left-most or highest place-value 
digits. For example, for children using this strategy they would 
estimate the difference between 542 and 238 by subtracting the front-end 
digits, 5 and 2, and estimate the answer as 300. 
(ii) Rounding strategy 
Children using this rounding strategy would round 542 to 500 and 238 
to 200 and estimate the difference between the numbers as 300. 
(iii) Clustering strategy 
The clustering strategy is used when a set of numbers is close to each 
other in value. For example, to find the sum of 170 + 290 + 230, 
children would first add 170 and 230 to get 400, and then they can 
estimate the sum of 400 + 290, so it’s about 700. 
(iv) Compatible number strategy 
When using the compatible number strategy, children adjust the 
numbers so that they are easier to work with. For example, to estimate 
the answer for 332 , they would note that 333 is close to 332 and is 
divisible by 3, and that would give an estimated answer of 111. 
1.1.3 Computational Procedure 
When teachers engage their children in the four number operations of addition, 
subtraction, multiplication and division, it is important that they pay special 
attention to the following points: 
(a) Use models for computation 
Concrete models, such as bundled sticks and base-ten blocks help children 
to visualise the problem. 
(b) Use estimation and mental computation 
These strategies help children to determine if their answers are reasonable.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  5 
(c) Develop bridging algorithms to connect problems, models, estimation 
and symbols 
Bridging algorithms help children connect manipulative materials with 
symbols in order to make sense of the symbolic representation. 
(d) Develop time-tested algorithms 
These algorithms can be developed meaningfully through the use of 
mathematical language and models. 
(e) The teacher poses story problems set in real-world contexts. 
Children are able to determine the reasonableness of their answers when 
story problems are based in familiar and real-world contexts. 
SELF-CHECK 1.1 
1. Explain the three important points that need to be emphasised 
when teaching whole number computations. 
2. Explain Reys’ four strategies for whole number computational 
estimation. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
WHOLE NUMBERS 
1.2 
The introduction of the basics of whole number skills will help children to learn 
higher mathematical skills more effectively. Teachers should note that before 
children learn to name and write numbers they will already have developed 
considerable number sense. 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by your pupil when studying the 
topic of whole numbers are as follows: 
(a) Name and write numbers up to 1,000,000. 
(b) Determine the place value of the digits in any whole number up to 
1,000,000. 
(c) Compare value of numbers up to 1,000,000. 
(d) Round off numbers to the nearest tens, hundreds, thousands, ten thousands 
and hundred thousands. 
(e) Add any two to four numbers to 1,000,000. 
(f) Subtract one number from a bigger number less than 1,000,000. 
(g) Subtract successively from a bigger number less than 1,000,000.
6  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
(h) Solve addition and subtraction problems. 
(i) Multiply up to five digit numbers with a one-digit number, a two-digit 
number, 10, 100 and 1,000. 
(j) Divide numbers up to six digits by a one-digit number, a two-digit number, 
10, 100 and 1,000. 
(k) Solve problems involving multiplication and division. 
(l) Calculate mixed operations of whole numbers involving multiplication and 
division. 
(m) Solve problems involving mixed operations of division and multiplication. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
1.3 
There are a few activities that can be carried out with pupils for better 
understanding about this topic. 
1.3.1 Basic Operations of Whole Number 
Now, let us look at a few activities to learn the basic operations of whole numbers 
in class. 
ACTIVITY 1.2 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise the algorithms of addition. 
Materials: 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Task Sheet as below 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each pair some clean writing paper and a Task Sheet.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  7 
3. Each pupil in the group takes turn to fill in numerals from 0 to 9 
randomly on the Task Sheet. 
4. The teacher gives the instruction for addition by saying, 
Find the sum of any three three-digit numbers. 
5. Each pupil identifies three three-digit numbers by reading the 
numerals from the square from left to right, right to left, top to 
bottom, bottom to top or even diagonally. 
Each pupil in the group checks the calculation of their peers using 
the calculator. 
Example: 841 + 859 + 768 = 2,469 
8 6 7 
4 5 3 
1 0 9 
6. The winner for this round is the pupil with the highest sum and is 
awarded 5 points. 
7. Pupils in the group repeat steps (5) and (6) when the teacher gives 
the instruction for the next addition. 
8. The teacher summarises the lesson on addition.
8  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
In subsequent sections, some examples are provided for pupils to practise the 
algorithms of addition, subtraction multiplication and division. The next section 
discusses subtraction using the calculator and estimation of the product of two 
numbers. Let us look at Activity 1.3 first. 
ACTIVITY 1.3 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise the algorithms of addition. 
 To increase the understanding of place value. 
Materials: 
 10 cards numbered 0 through 9 
 Task Sheet as below 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each pair some clean writing paper and a Task Sheet. 
3. Each pupil in the group takes turns to draw a card and announces 
the number on it. All players in the group write this number in one 
of the addend boxes on the Task Sheet. Once a number has been 
written on the Task Sheet, it cannot be moved or changed. 
4. Replace the card and shuffle the cards. 
5. Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all addend boxes are filled. 
6. Pupils will compute their respective sum. 
7. The winner is the pupil with the greatest sum and is awarded 5 
points. 
8. Repeat steps (3) through (7) until the teacher stops the game.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  9 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To practise subtraction using the calculator. 
 To practise the algorithms of subtraction. 
 To increase the understanding of place value. 
Materials: 
 Calculator 
 Clean writing papers 
Procedures: 
1. Pupils play this game in pairs. 
2. Give each pair a calculator and some clean writing paper. 
3. Throw a dice to decide who should start first. 
4. Pupil A chooses three different single-digit numbers. For example: 
1, 2, and 4. 
5. Enter the selected digits into the calculator in order to create the 
largest number possible. 
6. Enter “-“ 
7. Next, enter the same three selected digits to create the smallest 
number possible followed by the “=” sign. 
Example: The largest number created from the three single-digit 
numbers is 421. 
The smallest number created from the three single-digit 
numbers is 124. 
421 
- 124 
297 
ACTIVITY 1.4
10  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
8. Repeat steps (5) through (7) with the digits 2, 7 and 9 (derived from 
the first subtraction) as shown below. 
ACTIVITY 1 
421 972 963 
- 124 - 279 - 369 
297 693 594 
954 
- 459 
495 
9. Pupil B will have to write out all the algorithms of the subtractions 
and Pupil A will check it. 
10. If Pupil B had carried out all the subtractions correctly, the answer 
will eventually yield the magic number 495! 
11. Pupil B repeats steps (4) through (8). 
12. The game continues until the teacher instructs the the pupils to stop. 
13. The teacher summarises the lesson on subtraction.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  11 
ACTIVITY 1.5 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To estimate the product of two numbers. 
 To practise the algorithms of multiplication. 
Materials: 
 Calculator 
 Task Sheet as given 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some clean writing paper, a calculator and a Task 
Sheet. 
3. Working in their group pupils will discuss the best strategy to fill 
in the missing numbers in the boxes. 
4. Pupils will compute the algorithm of multiplication and fill in the 
blank boxes. 
5. The winner is the group who obtained the correct answer in the 
shortest time. 
6. Members of the winning group will explain to the class their 
strategy and also the algorithm of multiplication. 
7. Teacher summarises the lesson on multiplication.
12  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
TASK SHEET 
ACTIVITY 1 
1. Use only the numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 to make 
 The largest possible product 
X 
 The smallest possible product 
X 
2. Use your calculator to help you find the missing number. 
X 
8 6 
2 
1 9 2 
+ 5 9
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  13 
ACTIVITY 1.6 
Learning Outcome: 
 Using calculators to develop number sense involving division. 
Materials: 
 Task Sheet 
 Four calculators 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Provide each group some clean writing papers, a Task Sheet and 
four calculators. 
3. Teacher explains the rules and starts the game. 
4. Pupils will compete against members of their own group. 
5. Pupils will use the calculator to determine a reasonable dividend 
and divisor. 
6. The winner is the one in the group with the dividend and divisor 
that results in a quotient closest to the target number. 
Example: Target Number = 6,438 
Entered into the calculator: 32,195 5 
Followed by = (within 5 sec.) : 
Display shows “6,439” 
7. The winner will explain to the group members his strategy in 
determining a reasonable answer. 
8. The teacher summarises the lesson on division.
14  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
TASK SHEET 
Target Numbers 
446 815 845 490 
6,438 654 8,523 6,658 
29,881 31,455 44,467 51,118 
 Pick a target number and circle it. 
 Enter any number into your calculator. 
 Press the key. 
 Enter another number that you think will give you a product close to 
the target number. 
 Press the “=” key to determine your answer. 
 How close are you to the target number?
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  15 
1.3.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 
Below are the activities you can use to teach your pupils about estimation and 
mental computation. 
ACTIVITY 1.7 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To recognise patterns in whole number operations. 
 To practise estimation and computation of whole numbers. 
Materials: 
 Calculator 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Ask each member of the group to choose a two-digit number. 
3. Using the calculator ask them to multiply their numbers by 99. 
4. Pupils in their group record and compare their results. 
5. Ask them if they can see a pattern or relationship in their answers. 
6. In their groups pupils will write a statement describing their 
pattern. 
7. Ask pupils to predict the results of multiplying 5 other numbers by 
99. 
8. Repeat steps (2) through (7) but this time multiply the numbers by 
999. 
9. Ask pupils to compare results obtained from multiplication by 99 
and 999 and write statements describing the pattern 
- The same as the one for two-digit numbers x 99. 
- Different from the two-digit numbers x 999.
16  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
ACTIVITY 1.8 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise estimation and computation of whole numbers. 
Materials: 
 Calculator 
 Task Sheet 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some clean writing paper, a calculator and a Task 
Sheet. 
3. In their groups, ask pupils to discuss the best strategy to fill in the 
missing numbers. 
4. Pupils will compute the algorithm of division and fill in the blank 
boxes. 
5. The winner is the group that arrives at the correct answer in the 
shortest time. 
6. Members of the winning group will explain to the class their 
strategy and also the algorithm of division. 
7. Teacher summarises the lesson on division.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  17 
TASK SHEET 
1. Use only the numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 to make 
 The largest possible answer 
) 
 The smallest possible answer 
) 
2. Use your calculator to help you find the missing number. 
5 R 2 
8 ) 6 
0 7 
8 ) 2 8
18  TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS 
In this topic, we have learned : 
 To explain the importance of developing number sense for whole numbers to 
1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics. 
 The major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge 
related to whole numbers to 1,000,000. 
 How to use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division of whole numbers correctly. 
 The major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge 
related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers 
in the range of 1,000,000. 
 To plan basic teaching and learning activities for whole numbers, as well as 
the addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in the 
range of 1,000,000. 
Addition 
Division 
Multiplication 
Place value 
Subtraction 
Whole numbers 
Hatfield, M. M., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for 
the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. 
Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. 
US: Allyn &Wadsworth. 
Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C.A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: 
Heath and Company.
TOPIC 1 WHOLE NUMBERS  19 
Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. 
Ohio: Merill Prentice Hall. 
Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and 
middle schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Topic 
2 
 Fractions 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Use vocabulary related to fractions correctly as required by the Year 5 
and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 
2. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to fractions; 
3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division of fractions correctly; 
4. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division 
of fractions; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division of fractions. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Hello, and welcome to the topic on fractions. The basis of mathematics is the study of 
fractions, yet it is among the most difficult topics for school-going children. They often 
get confused when learning the concept of fractions as many of them have difficulty 
recognising when two fractions are equal, putting fractions in order by size, and 
understanding that the symbol for a fraction represents a single number. Pupils also 
rarely have the opportunity to understand fractions before they are asked to perform 
operations on them such as addition or subtraction (Cramer, Behr, Post, & Lesh, 1997). 
For that reason, we should provide opportunities for children to learn and understand 
fractions meaningfully. We could use physical materials and other representations to 
help children develop their understanding of the concept of fractions. The three 
commonly used representations are area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, 
geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  21 
discrete models (e.g., counters, sets). We introduced these representations to our pupils 
in Year 3 and Year 4. It would be useful to show them again these representations to 
reaffirm their understanding about fractions. 
In order to start teaching fractions in Year 5 and Year 6, it is important for us to have an 
overview of the mathematical skills pupils need in order to understand the concept of 
improper fractions and mixed numbers. It is also important to acquire the mathematical 
skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. 
At the beginning of this topic, we will learn about the pedagogical content 
knowledge of fractions such as the meanings of proper fractions, improper 
fractions and mixed numbers. In the second part of this topic, we will look at the 
major mathematical skills for fractions in Year 5 and Year 6. Before we finish this 
topic we will learn how to plan and implement basic teaching and learning 
activities for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fractions. 
ACTIVITY 2.1 
Can you think of five reasons why fractions exist in our life? List down 
the reasons before comparing them with the person next to you. 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
2.1 
Do you know how fractions came to be used? When human beings started to 
count things, they used whole numbers. However, as they realised that things do 
not always exist as complete wholes, they invented numbers that represented “a 
whole divided into equal parts”. In fact, fractions were invented to supplement the 
gap found in between whole numbers. 
We have discussed the meanings of fractions comprehensively in the Year 3. We 
have seen that there are three interpretations of fractions: 
(a) Fractions as parts of a whole unit; 
(b) Fractions as parts of a collection of objects; and 
(c) Fractions as division of whole numbers. 
In fact, it is important for us to provide opportunities for our children to 
differentiate these three interpretations in order to understand fractions better. In 
the following section, we will look at the pedagogical content knowledge of 
fractions such as the types of fractions; namely, proper fractions, improper 
fractions and mixed numbers.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
22 
2.1.1 Types of Fractions 
You can introduce the meaning of fraction to teach them the types of fractions. A 
fraction is a rational number which can be expressed as a division of numbers in 
the form of 
p , where p and q are integers and q ≠ 0. The number p is called the 
q 
4   and 7 8 
numerator and q is called the denominator. For example, 4 5 
5 
7   . 
8 
Let us look at the different types of fractions in the next section. 
(a) Proper Fractions 
A proper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is less than the 
denominator. 
, 123 
24 
, 7 
7 
, 3 
2 
1 
For example : ,.... 
245 
, 13 
15 
, 5 
4 
, 1 
4 
1 
4 
1 
2 
3 
4 
(b) Improper Fractions 
An improper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is equal to or 
greater than the denominator. 
, 523 
24 
For example : ,.... 
245 
, 33 
15 
, 15 
7 
, 9 
4 
4 
, 5 
4
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  23 
4 
4 
5 
4 
(c) Mixed Numbers 
A mixed number consists of an integer (except 0) and a proper fraction. 
, 122 133 
24 
For example: ,.... 
245 
, 22 13 
15 
, 5 2 
7 
, 3 2 
4 
1 3  
11 
2 
1 3 
4 
Pupils should have ample opportunity to identify and represent the different types 
of fractions as well as to name and write them down in symbols and words. 
2.1.2 Equivalent Fractions 
Similar to whole numbers, fractions too have various terms and names. For 
example, 
, 4 
6 
8 
, 3 
4 
, 2 
2 
1 and 
5 all represent the same amount. They are called 
10 
equivalent fractions. In other words, fractions with identical values are called 
equivalent fractions.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
24 
5 
1  2 
 3 
 4 
 
1 and 
, 4 
6 
, 2 
2 
5 are equivalent fractions. 
Note that to find an equivalent fraction, we multiply or divide both the numerator 
and the denominator by the same number. For example: 
(i) Multiplying both numerator and denominator by the same number. 
3 
6 
1 1  
3 
 
2 3 
2 
 
 
Therefore, 
1 and 
2 
3 are equivalent fractions. 
6 
(ii) Dividing both numerator and denominator by the same number. 
1 
3 
5 5  
5 
 
15 5 
15 
 
 
Therefore, 
5 
and 
15 
1 
are equivalent fractions. 
3 
Use models to verify the generalisation: 
1 
2 
2 
4 
3 
6 
6 
12 
Equivalent Fractions 
Since, 
10 
8 
6 
4 
2 
Therefore, 
8 
, 3 
4 
10
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  25 
2.1.3 Simplifying Fractions 
Now we move on to simplifying fractions. Remind your pupils that the ability to 
change a fraction to its equivalent fraction is an important skill that is required to 
understand the characteristics of fractions and to master other skills concerning 
basic operations of fractions. We should provide various activities for our pupils 
to master this skill. These activities should involve all the three stages of learning: 
concrete, spatial concrete and abstract. 
A fraction with its numerator and denominator without any common factors 
(except 1) is said to be in its simplest form. For example: 
, 7 
7 
15 
, 3 
3 
, 5 
4 
1 
, 2 
4 
and 
2 and 
, 5 
10 
, 2 
4 
9 . Conversely, , 
25 
15 
, 4 
6 
7 are not in their simplest form 
28 
because their numerators and denominators have common factors. The process of 
changing a fraction to its simplest form is called simplifying a fraction. 
Simplifying should be thought of as a process of renaming and not cancellation. 
In the example below, 
4 and 
8 
2 are renamed or simplified to 
4 
1 . 
2 
1 
2 
4 2  
2 
 
4 2 
2 
4 
4  
2 
8 2 
8 
 
  
 
 
1 is the simplified form of 
2 
2 and 
4 
4 . 
8 
As a teacher you need to tell your pupils that before they can master the skill of 
simplifying fractions, they must first understand the concept of proper fractions, 
improper fractions, mixed numbers and equivalent fractions. 
SELF-CHECK 2.1 
1. Describe briefly with examples the three types of fractions. 
2. Explain the two ways of finding equivalent fractions for a given 
fraction. 
3. What is meant by simplifying a fraction?
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
26 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
FRACTIONS 
2.2 
A systematic conceptual development of fractions will be very helpful for our 
pupils to learn this topic effectively. It would be advisable for teachers to 
introduce the topic in a less stressful manner. It is important for us to provide 
opportunities for our pupils to understand improper fractions and mixed numbers 
meaningfully. We should use physical materials and other representations to help 
our children develop their understanding of these concepts. We should also 
provide opportunities for our children to acquire mathematical skills involved in 
adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of 
fractions in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: 
(a) Name and write improper fractions with denominators up to 10. 
(b) Compare the value of the two improper fractions. 
(c) Name and write mixed numbers with denominators up to 10. 
(d) Convert improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa. 
(e) Add two mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. 
(f) Add two mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. 
(g) Solve problems involving addition of mixed numbers. 
(h) Subtract two mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. 
(i) Subtract two mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. 
(j) Solve problems involving subtraction of mixed numbers. 
(k) Multiply any proper fraction with a whole number up to 1,000. 
(l) Add three mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. 
(m) Add three mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. 
(n) Subtract three mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. 
(o) Subtract three mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. 
(p) Solve problems involving addition and subtraction of fractions. 
(q) Multiply any mixed numbers with a whole number up to 1,000. 
(r) Divide fractions with a whole number and a fraction. 
(s) Solve problems involving multiplication and division of fractions.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  27 
ACTIVITY 2.3 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
2.3 
Now let us look at several activities that could help pupils not only to understand 
improper fractions and mixed numbers, but also to acquire the mathematical skills 
involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. 
2.3.1 Improper Fractions 
ACTIVITY 2.2 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To write the improper fractions shown by the shaded parts. 
 To write the improper fractions in words. 
 To compare the value of the two improper fractions. 
Materials: 
 Task Cards 
 Answer Sheets 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils and give each pupil an 
Answer Sheet. 
2. Ask pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 
3. Six Task Cards are shuffled and put face down in a stack at the centre. 
4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 
5. The player writes all the answers to the questions in the card drawn on 
the Answer Sheet. 
6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), each pupil in 
the group exchanges the card with the pupil on their left in clockwise 
direction. 
7. Pupils are asked to repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the pupils in the 
group have answered questions in all the cards. 
8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct answers. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson by recalling the basic facts of improper 
fractions.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
28 
Example of an Answer Sheet: 
Name :________________________ Class :______________________ 
Card A Card B Card C 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
Card D Card E Card F 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
Example of a Task Card: 
Card A 
1. Write the improper fractions of the shaded parts. 
= 
2. Write in words. 
5 = 
4 
3. Circle the larger improper fraction. 
7 
4 
9 
4 
ACTIVITY 2.3 
1. Work with a friend in class to prepare five more Task Cards. 
2. There should be three questions in each card. 
3. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
2.2.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  29 
2.3.2 Mixed Numbers 
ACTIVITY 2.4 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To write the mixed numbers shown by the shaded parts 
 To convert improper fractions to mixed numbers 
 To convert mixed numbers to improper fractions 
Materials: 
 30 different Flash Cards 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a 
clean writing sheet. 
2. Instruct the pupils to write their names on the clean paper. 
3. Flash Cards are shuffled and put face down in a stack at the centre. 
4. Player A begins by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the 
card to Player B. 
5. Player B then reads out the answers within the stipulated time 
(decided by the teacher). 
6. Player C writes the points obtained by Player B below his name. 
Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 3 points 
for each Flash Card). 
7. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards have been drawn by 
Player A. 
8. Players now change roles. Player B draws the cards, Player C reads 
out answers and Player A keeps the score. 
9. Repeat steps (3 through 6) until all the players have had the 
opportunity to read the 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 
10. The winner in the group is the student that has the most number of 
points. 
11. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of mixed 
numbers.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
30 
Example of a Flash Card: 
Flash Card 1 
1. Write the mixed number shown by the shaded parts. 
2. Convert this improper fraction to a mixed number. 
15 = 
4 
3. Convert this mixed number to an improper fraction. 
3 3 = 
7 
ACTIVITY 2.5 
1. Work with three friends in class to prepare another 29 Flash 
Cards. 
2. There should be three questions in each Flash Card. 
3. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 2.4.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  31 
2.3.3 Addition of Fractions 
ACTIVITY 2.6 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To add two mixed numbers 
 To add three mixed numbers 
 To solve problems involving addition of mixed numbers. 
Materials: 
 Task Sheets 
 Clean writing papers 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Provide each 
group with a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 
2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is 
placed at each station. 
3. Instruct the pupils to work together to solve the questions in the 
Task Sheet at each station. 
4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the 
next station in the clockwise direction. 
6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct 
answers) is the winner. 
8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to add mixed numbers 
with the same denominators and different denominators.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
32 
Example of a Task Sheet: 
STATION 1 
1. Add the following two mixed numbers. Express your answers in the 
simplest form. 
(a)   
3 3 
4 
2 3 
4 
4 2 
13 
(b)   
3 
5 
2. Add the following three mixed numbers. Express your answers in the 
simplest form. 
(a)    
2 1 
5 
2 2 
5 
13 
5 
3 3 
1 2 
2 1 
(b)    
4 
3 
2 
3. Encik Ahmad sold 
3 3 kg of prawns to Mr. Chong and 
7 
2 2 kg of 
5 
prawns to Mr. Samuel. Find the total mass of prawns sold by Encik 
Ahmad. 
The total mass of prawns sold is kg. 
ACTIVITY 2.7 
Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets for 
the other stations. There should be three questions in each sheet. Make 
sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.6.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  33 
2.3.4 Subtraction of Fractions 
ACTIVITY 2.8 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To subtract two mixed numbers 
 To subtract three mixed numbers 
 To solve problems involving subtraction of mixed numbers 
Materials: 
 Activity Cards 
 Clean writing papers 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils. Provide each group 
with a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet 
2. A set of 12 Activity Cards are shuffled and put face down in a 
stack at the centre. 
3. When the teacher signals, pupils will begin solving the questions in 
the first Activity Card drawn. 
4. Once they are done with the first Card, they may continue with the 
next Activity Card. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their 
answer paper to the teacher. 
6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
7. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to subtract mixed 
numbers with the same denominators and different denominators.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
34 
Example of an Activity Card: 
1. Subtract the following two mixed numbers. Express your answers in 
the simplest form. 
(a)   
2 3 
4 
4 1 
4 
2 2 
4 3 
(b)   
3 
5 
2. Find the difference of the following mixed numbers. Express your 
answers in the simplest form. 
(a)    
11 
7 
2 2 
7 
4 4 
7 
2 3 
1 2 
5 1 
(b)    
4 
3 
2 
3. A container holds 
6 3 litres of water. Abu Bakar pours 
8 
2 2 litres of 
5 
water from the container into a jug while his brother Arshad pours 
3 
1 2 litres of water from the container into a bottle. How much water, 
in fractions, is left in the container? 
The amount of water left is litres. 
ACTIVITY 2.9 
Prepare another 11 Activity Cards for the group. There should be three 
questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
2.8.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  35 
2.3.5 Multiplication of Fractions 
ACTIVITY 2.10 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To multiply proper fractions with whole numbers 
 To multiply mixed numbers with whole numbers 
 To solve problems involving multiplication of mixed numbers 
Materials: 
 Exercise Sheets 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of two pupils. Give each group a 
different colour pencil. 
2. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with five questions. 
3. The group that finishes fastest with all correct answers is the 
winner. 
4. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to multiply fractions 
with whole numbers.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
36 
Example of an Exercise Sheet: 
1. Solve the following multiplication 
1 
(a)  32  
4 
3 
(b)  200  
5 
2. Solve the following multiplication 
4 4 
(a)  28  
7 
5 1 
(b)  400  
4 
3. There are 440 apples in a box. 
3 of the apples are green apples. 
4 
The remaining apples are red. How many red apples are there in 
the box? 
There are red apples in the box. 
4. Muthu drinks 
1 3 litres of water a day. How much water in litres, 
4 
will he drink in two weeks? 
Muthu drinks litres of water in two weeks. 
5. Shalwani spends 
1 3 hours watching television in a day. How much time 
4 
does she spend watching television in three weeks? 
Shalwani spends hours watching television in three weeks.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  37 
2.3.6 Division of Fractions 
ACTIVITY 2.11 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To divide fractions with whole numbers 
 To divide fractions with fractions 
 To solve problems involving division of fractions 
Materials: 
 Division Worksheets 
 Clean writing paper 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into 10 groups. Give each group a Division 
Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 
2. Instruct the groups to answer all the questions in the Divison 
Worksheet. 
3. The groups write their answers on the clean writing paper. 
4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Division Worksheets. 
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. 
6. Once all the 10 Division Worksheets have been answered, teacher 
collects the papers and corrects the answers. 
7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to divide fractions with 
fractions and with whole numbers.
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
38 
Example of a Division Worksheet: 
WORKSHEET 1 
1. Solve the following division of fractions. 
1 
1 
(a)   
28 
4 
9 
3 
(b)   
25 
5 
2. Solve the following division of fractions. 
2 3 
(a)  33  
4 
3 
13 
(b)   
10 
5 
3. A company wants to donate RM 
2 3 million equally to eight charities. 
4 
How much money will each charity receive? 
Each charity receives RM 
million. 
4. The total length of 7 similar ropes is 
10 1 m. Find the length of one 
2 
rope. 
The length of one rope is 
m. 
ACTIVITY 2.12 
Prepare another nine Division Worksheets for the group. There should 
be four questions in each worksheet. 
Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 2.11.
TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS  39 
 The three commonly used representations for fractions are area models (e.g., 
fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, 
Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and discrete models (e.g., counters, sets). 
 The three interpretations for fractions are (i) fractions as parts of a unit whole, 
(ii) fractions as parts of a collection of objects, and (iii) fractions as division of 
whole numbers. 
 It is important to provide opportunities for our children to differentiate these 
three interpretations so that they can understand fractions better. 
 A fraction is a rational number which can be expressed as a division of 
numbers in the form of , where p and q are integers and q ≠ 0. The number 
p is called the numerator and q is called the denominator. 
 Pupils in Year 5 and Year 6 should be able to identify proper fractions, 
improper fractions and mixed numbers. They should be able to simplify the 
given fractions into its simplest form. 
 A proper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is less than the 
denominator. 
 An improper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is equal to or greater 
than the denominator. 
 A mixed number consists of an integer (except 0) and a proper fraction. 
 Fractions with identical values are called equivalent fractions. 
 The process of changing a fraction to its simplest form is called simplifying a 
fraction. 
 Pupils should be able to acquire the mathematical skills involved in adding, 
subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. 
 Pupils should also be able to solve daily life problems involving basic 
operations on fractions. 
p 
q
 TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 
40 
 Story problems are set in real-life situations. Children are able to determine 
the reasonableness of their answers when story problems are based on familiar 
contexts. 
Addition 
Denominator 
Division 
Fraction 
Half 
Multiplication 
Numerator 
Quarter 
Share 
Subtraction 
Whole 
Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling 
Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. 
Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan 
pembelajaran matematik: Pecahan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan 
Pustaka. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman, Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR 
year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR 
year 6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Ng S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson 
Education Asia. 
Peter C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheet 1. Oxford: Heinemann 
Educational Publishers. 
Sunny Yee & Lau P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach : Mathematics year 
3. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
Topic 
3 
 Decimals 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Use the vocabulary related to decimals correctly as required by the 
Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 
2. Relate major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to decimals; 
3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division of decimals correctly; 
4. Use major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division 
of decimals; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for the addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division of decimals. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Do you know the meaning of the word “decimal”? It means "based on 10" (from 
Latin decima: a tenth part). We sometimes say "decimal" when we mean anything 
to do with our numbering system, but a "decimal number" usually means there is a 
decimal point. The word “decimal” is used so loosely that most uses of it are really 
wrong. Properly speaking, since the "deci-" in the word means "ten", any number 
written in a base-ten system (that is, with each digit worth ten times as much as the 
one next to it) can be called a "decimal number". When we write "123", the 3 is 
worth 3 ones, the 2 is worth 2 tens, and the 1 is worth a ten of tens, or a hundred. 
That is decimal. 
A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in the base-ten, 
or a power of ten. A decimal fraction, also called a decimal, is a number with a 
decimal point in it, like 1.23. The decimal point separates the whole number from the
42  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
fractional part of a number. Generally speaking, any number with a decimal point in it 
would be commonly called a decimal, not just a number less than 1. 
Hopefully the explanation did not confuse you. What about young children? If 
children are taught the wrong concepts of decimals then working with decimals is 
going to be a dreadful experience for them. For that reason, we must provide 
opportunities for our children to learn and understand decimals meaningfully. 
We can use physical materials and other representations to help our children 
develop their understanding of the concept of decimals. Since decimal numbers 
are closely related to fractions, the three commonly used representations for 
fractions, namely the area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), 
linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and 
discrete models (e.g., counters, sets) can be used again to teach the concept of 
decimals. It would be useful to show pupils these representations to reaffirm their 
understanding about decimals. 
In order to teach decimals in Years 5 and 6, it is important for us to have an 
overview of the mathematical skills involved in changing fractions and mixed 
numbers to decimals and vice versa. It is also important to acquire the 
mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing 
decimals. 
At the beginning of this topic, we will explore the pedagogical content knowledge 
of decimals such as the basic interpretation of decimals, and then ways to 
represent and read decimals. In the second part of this topic, we will look at the 
major mathematical skills for decimals in Years 5 and 6. Before we end this topic, 
we will learn how to plan and implement basic teaching and learning activities for 
addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of decimals. 
ACTIVITY 3.1 
Write your answers for these two questions and compare them with 
the person sitting next to you. 
1. What are decimals? 
2. Why is it necessary for us to learn about decimals? 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
3.1 
Before you teach your pupils decimals, you should talk to them about the number 
system. The modern number system originated in India. Other cultures discovered
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  43 
a few features of this number system but the system, in its entirety, was compiled 
in India, where it attained coherence and completion. By the 9th century, this 
complete number system had existed in India but several of its ideas were 
transmitted to China and the Islamic world before that time. 
A straightforward decimal system, where 11 is expressed as ten-one and 23 as 
two-ten-three, is found in the Chinese and Vietnamese languages. The Japanese, 
Korean, and Thai languages imported the Chinese decimal system while many 
other languages with a decimal system have special words for the numbers 
between 10 and 20, and decades. Incan languages such as Quechua and Aymara 
have an almost straightforward decimal system, in which 11 is expressed as ten 
with one and 23 as two-ten with three. 
3.1.1 Meanings of Decimals 
The decimal (base-ten or sometimes denary) numeral system has ten as its base. 
It is the most widely used numeral system, perhaps because humans have ten 
digits over both hands. Ten is the number which is the count of fingers on both 
hands. In many languages the word digit or its translation is also the anatomical 
term referring to fingers and toes. 
In English, decimal means tenth, decimate means reduce by a tenth, and denary 
means the unit of ten. The symbols for the digits in common use around the globe 
today are called Arabic numerals by Europeans and Indian numerals by Arabs, 
the two groups' terms both referring to the culture from which they learned the 
system. 
Decimal notation is the writing of numbers in the base 10 numeral system, which 
uses various symbols (called digits) for no more than ten distinct values (0, 1, 2, 3, 
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9) to represent any numbers, no matter how large. These digits are 
often used with a decimal separator (decimal point) which indicates the start of a 
fractional part. 
The decimal system is a positional numeral system; it has positions for units, tens, 
hundreds, etc. The position of each digit conveys the multiplier (a power of ten) to 
be used with that digit - each position has a value ten times that of the position to 
its right. 
3.1.2 Decimal Fractions 
A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in the 
base ten, or a power of ten. Decimal fractions are commonly expressed without a 
denominator, the decimal separator being inserted into the numerator (with
44  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
leading zeros added if needed), at the position from the right corresponding to the 
power of ten of the denominator. Examples: 
0.0008 
8     
0.083 8 
10000 
0.83 83 
1000 
0.8 83 
100 
10 
In English-speaking and many Asian countries, a period (.) is used as the decimal 
separator; in many other languages, a comma (,) is used (e.g. in France and 
Germany) 
The part from the decimal separator (decimal point) to the right is the fractional 
part; if considered as a separate number, a zero is often written in front (example: 
0.23). Trailing zeros after the decimal point are not necessary, although in 
science, engineering and statistics they can be retained to indicate a required 
precision or to show a level of confidence in the accuracy of the number. Whereas 
0.080 and 0.08 are numerically equal, in engineering 0.080 suggests a 
measurement with an error of up to 1 part in one thousand (±0.001), while 0.08 
suggests a measurement with an error of up to 1 part in one hundred. 
The integer part or integral part of a decimal fraction is the part to the left of the 
decimal separator (decimal point). Decimal fractions can be expressed as fractions 
by converting the digits after the decimal separator to fractions in the base ten or 
power of ten. Example: 
2 34 
100 
2.34  2  3      2  34 
 
100 
4 
100 
2 30 
100 
4 
100 
10 
Fractions with denominators of base-ten, or power of ten, can be directly 
expressed as decimal fractions. Decimal fractions are confined to tenths, 
hundredths, thousandths and other powers of ten. Examples: 
3.008 
2.23 3 8 
1 5    
1000 
1.5 2 23 
100 
10
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  45 
3.1.3 Extension of Base-10 Place Value System 
To help pupils understand the meaning of decimal fractions and its relationship to 
place value, you should first give opportunities to them to see and investigate the 
pattern that exists between place values in whole numbers. This is because the 
concept of place value in whole numbers is the basis of decimal fractions. In fact, 
decimal fractions should be introduced as an extension of base-10 place value. 
In the base-10 place value, it is clear that the digit in every place value is 10 times 
more than the digit which is to the right of it. In other words, the digit in every 
place value is 1 
of the digit which is to the left of it. 
10 
Thousands Hundreds Tens Units 
1000 100 10 1 
1 1 1 1 
The digit in the hundreds 
place value is 
1 of the digit 
10 
in the thousands place value. 
The digit in the units place 
value is 
1 of the digit in the 
10 
tens place value. 
By exploring the pattern that exists in the place value system, you should extend 
the procedure to identify the place value to the right of units. All the place values 
to the right of units represent decimal parts (parts of the number which is less than 
one). To show the separation between the decimal part and the whole number 
part, a decimal point (decimal separator) is placed after the place value of units. 
Thousands Hundreds Tens Units Tenths Hundredths Thousandths 
1000 100 10 1 
1 
10 
1 
100 
1 
1000 
1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 
From the extended place value system above, you can see that there is a symmetry 
between the place values. The centre of symmetry is the place value of units. With
46  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
the help of this extended place value system, pupils would be able to explain 
every place value and appreciate the meaning of decimal fractions. 
Apart from that, it would be easier to read decimal fractions if pupils could write 
the decimal fractions according to the extended place value system. The digits 
before the decimal point will be read according to the place value, whereas the 
digits after the decimal point will be read as the digits themselves. 
For example: 
6.5 is read as “six point five” 
12.34 is read as “twelve point three, four” 
45.005 is read as “forty five point zero, zero, five” 
235.237 is read as “ two hundred and thirty five point two, three, 
seven” 
One or more than one Less than One 
Thousands Hundreds Tens Units Tenths Hundredths Thousandths 
1000 100 10 1 
1 
10 
1 
100 
1 
1000 
1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 
6 • 5 
1 2 • 3 4 
4 5 • 0 0 5 
2 3 5 • 2 3 7 
For the decimal fraction, 235.237, the first digit after the decimal point, 2, is the 
tenths digit, the second digit, 3 is the hundredths digit, and the third digit, 7 is the 
thousandths digit. 
3.1.4 Decimal Place 
Now, how are you going to teach pupils to count the number of decimal places. 
The decimal place (d.p.) for decimal fractions is counted by adding the number of 
digits after the decimal point. For example: 
2 3 5 . 2 3 7 has 3 decimal places 
1 digit + 1 digit + 1 digit = 3 (3 digits after the decimal point)
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  47 
SELF-CHECK 3.1 
1. Though the meaning of decimal number is accepted by all, the 
symbol (the way the decimal separator is used) still varies. List 
down the various symbols used for decimal numbers. 
2. How can you show the place value of hundredths with the help of 
a diagram of a concrete model ? 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
DECIMALS 
3.2 
A systematic conceptual development of decimals will be helpful for your pupils 
to learn this topic efficiently and effectively. It would be beneficial to introduce 
this topic in a meaningful way. In order to provide opportunities for your pupils to 
develop their understanding of decimal numbers in a less stressful manner, you 
should use models such as decimal squares, square grids, number lines, base-ten 
blocks. You should also provide opportunities for your pupils to acquire 
mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing 
decimal numbers. Pupils should be exposed to real life contexts that apply 
practical usage of decimals. 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying decimals in Year 
5 and Year 6 are as follows: 
(a) Name and write decimal numbers to three decimal places. 
(b) Recognise the place value of thousandths. 
(c) Convert fractions of thousandths to decimal numbers and vice versa. 
(d) Round off decimal numbers to the nearest: 
(i) tenth, 
(ii) hundredth. 
(e) Add any two to four decimal numbers up to three decimal places involving: 
(i) decimal numbers and decimal number 
(ii) whole numbers and decimal numbers 
(f) Solve problems involving the addition of decimal numbers.
48  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
(g) Subtract a decimal number from another decimal number up to three 
decimal places. 
(h) Subtract successively any two decimal numbers up to three decimal places. 
(i) Solve problems involving subtraction of decimal places. 
(j) Multiply any decimal number up to three decimal places with: 
(i) a one-digit number, 
(ii) a two-digit number, 
(iii) 10, 100 and 1000. 
(k) Solve problems involving multiplication of decimal numbers. 
(l) Divide a whole number by: 
(i) 10 
(ii) 100 
(iii) 1000 
(m) Divide a whole number by: 
(i) a one-digit number 
(ii) a two-digit number 
(n) Divide a decimal number of three decimal places by: 
(i) a one-digit number 
(ii) a two-digit whole number 
(iii) 10 
(iv) 100 
(o) Solve problems involving division of decimal numbers. 
(p) Add and subtract three to four decimal numbers of up to 3 decimal places 
involving: 
(i) decimal numbers only 
(ii) whole numbers and decimal numbers 
(q) Solve problems involving addition and subtraction of decimal numbers.
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  49 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
3.3 
Let us look at a few activities for pupils to develop their understanding of decimal 
numbers and major mathematical skills for decimals. 
3.3.1 Decimal Numbers 
ACTIVITY 3.2 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To write the decimal that represents the shaded parts 
 To write the decimal numbers in words 
 To write the place value of the underlined digits 
 To compare the value of the two decimal numbers 
Materials: 
 Task Cards 
 Answer Sheets 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils. Each student is given an 
Answer Sheet. 
2. Ask pupils to write their names on the Answer Sheet. 
3. Shuffle Six Task Cards and place them face down in the centre. 
4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 
5. The player writes all the answers to the questions in the Task Card 
drawn on the Answer Sheet. 
6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils 
(in their groups) exchange the cards with the pupil on their left in 
clockwise direction. 
7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the members of the group 
have answered the questions in all the cards. 
8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct 
answers. 
9. The teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of decimal 
numbers.
50  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Example of an Answer Sheet: 
Name :________________________ Class :______________________ 
Card A Card B Card C 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
4.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ 
Card D Card E Card F 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
4.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ 
Example of a Task Card: 
Card A 
1. Write the shaded part in decimals. 
2. Write in words. 
1.408 = 
3. Write the place value of the underlined digit. 
8.354 = 
4. Circle the decimal with the largest value. 
27.357 27.537 27.753 27. 375
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  51 
ACTIVITY 3.3 
Work with your colleagues or cousemates to prepare another five 
Task Cards. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure 
your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.2. 
3.3.2 Converting Fractions to Decimal Numbers and 
Vice Versa 
ACTIVITY 3.4 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert fractions to decimal numbers 
 To convert decimal numbers to fractions 
 To round off decimal numbers to the nearest tenth 
 To round off decimal numbers to the nearest hundredth 
Materials: 
 30 different Flash Cards 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a 
clean writing sheet. 
2. Ask pupils to shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in 
a stack at the centre. 
3. Player A begins by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the 
card to Player B. 
4. Player B then reads out the answers within the stipulated time 
(decided by the teacher). 
5. Player C writes the points obtained by Player B below his name. 
Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points 
for each Flash Card).
52  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
7. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until 10 cards have been drawn by Player A. 
8. Players now change roles. Player B draws the cards, Player C reads out 
answers and Player A keeps the score. 
9. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the 
opportunity to read 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 
10. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the highest score. 
11. The teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of decimal 
numbers. 
Example of a Flash Card: 
Flash Card 1 
1. Convert this decimal number to a fraction. 
0.083 = 
2. Convert this fraction to a decimal number. 
154 
1000 
= 
3. Round off the decimal number to the nearest tenth. 
3.628 = 
4. Round off the decimal number to the nearest hundredth. 
15.589 = 
ACTIVITY 3.5 
Work with a few colleagues or cousemates to prepare another 29 Flash 
Cards. There should be four questions in each Flash Card. Make sure 
your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.4.
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  53 
3.3.3 Addition of Decimal Numbers 
ACTIVITY 3.6 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To add two to four decimal numbers up to three decimal places 
 To add two to four decimal numbers involving whole numbers and 
decimal numbers 
 To solve problems involving the addition of decimal numbers 
Materials: 
 Task Sheets 
 Clean writing paper 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Give each group 
a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 
2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is 
placed at each station. 
3. The teacher instructs pupils to solve the questions in the Task 
Sheet at each station. 
4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the 
next station in a clockwise direction. 
6. At the end of 50 minutes, teacher will collect the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct 
answers) is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to add decimal numbers up 
to three decimal places.
54  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Example of a Task Sheet: 
STATION 1 
1. Add the following decimal numbers. Express your answers in three 
decimal places. 
(a) 1.724 + 3.055 = 
(b) 9.2 + 2.32 + 0.535 = 
(c) 6.07 + 5.234 + 2.5 + 0.56 = 
2. Add the following whole numbers and decimal numbers. Express 
your answers in three decimal places. 
(a) 6 + 3.652 = 
(b) 2.345 + 7 + 4.78 = 
(c) 4.534 + 2.43 + 6.8 + 8 = 
3. The length of ribbon A is 21.43m. Ribbon B is 3.26m longer than 
ribbon A. What is the total length of the two ribbons? 
The total length of the two ribbons is 
ACTIVITY 3.7 
Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets for 
the other stations. There should be three questions in each sheet. 
Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
3.6.
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  55 
3.3.4 Subtraction of Decimal Numbers 
ACTIVITY 3.8 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To subtract two decimal numbers up to three decimal places 
 To subtract successively any two decimal numbers up to three 
decimal places 
 To solve problems involving subtraction of decimal numbers 
Materials: 
 Activity Cards 
 Clean writing paper 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils. Give each group a 
different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 
2. Ask pupils to shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them 
face down in a stack at the centre. 
3. Teacher instructs pupils to draw an Activity Card and begin 
solving the questions on the first Card drawn. 
4. Once they have answered the questions on the first Card, they may 
continue with the next Activity Card. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their 
answer papers to the teacher. 
6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
7. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to subtract decimal 
numbers up to three decimal places.
56  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Example of an Activity Card: 
1. Subtract the following two decimal numbers. Express your answers in 
three decimal places. 
(a) 7.34 – 3.567 = 
(b) 23. 6 – 11. 782 = 
2. Carry out the subtraction of the following decimal numbers. Express 
your answers in three decimal places. 
(a) 6.7 – 1.24 – 3.007 = 
(b) 50.23 – 15.14 – 12.224 = 
3. A fence measuring 12.47m needs to be painted. If 7.029m of the fence 
has been painted, how many metres more need to be painted? 
more need to be painted. 
ACTIVITY 3.9 
Work in pairs to prepare another 11 Activity Cards for the group. 
There should be three questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
3.8. 
ACTIVITY 2.4
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  57 
3.3.5 Multiplication of Decimal Numbers 
ACTIVITY 3.10 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To multiply decimal numbers with one-digit whole numbers 
 To multiply decimal numbers with two-digit whole numbers 
 To solve problems involving multiplication of decimal numbers 
Materials: 
 Exercise Sheets 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into pairs (two pupils in each group). 
2. Give each group a different colour pencil. 
3. Provide each group with an Exercise Sheet containing five 
questions each. 
4. The group that finishes fastest with all correct answers will be the 
winner. 
5. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to multiply whole 
numbers with decimal numbers. 
ACTIVITY 3.10
58  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Example of an Exercise Sheet: 
1. Solve the following multiplication problems. 
(a) 6.42  7 = 
(b) 3.456  15 = 
2. Solve the following multiplication problems. 
(a) 2.34  10 = 
(b) 0.346  100 = 
3. Mr. Lee bought 6 pieces of iron rods. The length of each iron rod is 
4.56m. Find the total length of the iron rods. 
Total length of the iron rods is 
4. A box of grapes weighs 7.2 kg. A box of oranges weighs 3 times the 
mass of the box of grapes. What is the mass of the box of oranges? 
The mass of the box of oranges is 
5. A packet of green apples weighs 3.402 kg. What is the total weight of 
100 packets of green apples? 
The total mass of 100 packets of green apples is
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  59 
3.3.6 Division of Decimal Numbers 
ACTIVITY 3.11 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To divide decimal numbers with 10, 100, 1000 
 To divide decimal numbers with one-digit numbers 
 To divide decimal numbers with two-digit whole numbers 
 To solve problems involving the division of decimal numbers 
Materials: 
 Division Worksheets 
 Clean writing paper 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into 10 groups. Give each group a Division 
Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 
2. Teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the 
Divison Worksheet. 
3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 
4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Division Worksheets. 
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4. 
6. Once all the 10 Division Worksheets have been answered, the 
teacher collects the answer papers and corrects the answers. 
7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to divide decimal 
numbers with whole numbers.
60  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Example of a Division Worksheet: 
WORKSHEET 1 
1. Solve the following division problems. 
(a) 921  100 = 
(b) 8652  1000 = 
2. Solve the following division problems. 
(a) 44.272  8 = 
(b) 18.324  12 = 
3. Puan Rohana pours 3.26 litres of syrup equally into 5 bottles. What 
is the volume of syrup in each bottle? 
The volume of syrup in each bottle is 
4. Mrs. Rama put 31.85 kg of prawns equally into 7 boxes. What is the 
mass of prawns in each box? 
The mass of prawns in each box is 
ACTIVITY 3.12 
Prepare another nine Division Worksheets for the groups. There should 
be four questions in each worksheet. 
Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 3.11. 
ACTIVITY 3.12
TOPIC 3 DECIMALS  61 
 The three commonly used representations for fractions namely the area 
models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., 
fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and discrete models (e.g., 
counters, sets) can be also used to explain the concept of decimals. 
 The decimal (base-ten or sometimes denary) numeral system has ten as its 
base. 
 Decimal notation is the writing of numbers in the base-10 numeral system, 
which uses various symbols (called digits) for no more than ten distinct values 
(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9) to represent any numbers, no matter how large. 
 A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in 
the base-ten, or a power of ten. 
 The integer part or integral part of a decimal fraction is the part to the left of 
the decimal separator (decimal point). 
 Decimal fractions can be expressed as fractions by converting the digits after 
the decimal separator to fractions in the base ten or power of ten. 
 All the place values to the of right of units represent decimal parts (parts of 
the number which are less than one). 
 The separation between the decimal part and the whole number part is shown 
by a decimal point placed after the place value of units. 
 The digits before the decimal point will be read according to the place value, 
whereas the digits after the decimal point will be read as the digits themselves. 
 The decimal place (d.p.) for decimal fractions is counted by adding the 
number of digits after the decimal point.
62  TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 
Addition 
Decimal 
Decimal fractions 
Decimal point 
Decimal place 
Decimal separator 
Integral part 
Subtraction 
Multiplication 
Division 
Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling 
Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. 
Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan 
pembelajaran matematik: Perpuluhan dan peratus. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan 
Bahasa dan Pustaka. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR 
year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR 
year 6. Kuala Lumpur. Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Ng S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson 
Education Asia. 
Peter Clarke et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann 
Educational Publishers. 
Sunny Yee & Lau P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics year 3. 
Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
Topic 
4 
 Money 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Demonstrate to your pupils how to use the vocabulary related to 
money correctly for the topic of Money in the KBSR Mathematics 
Syllabus; 
2. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to the addition and subtraction of money up to the 
value of RM 10,000,000; 
3. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to the multiplication and division of money up to 
the value of RM 10,000,000; 
4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for the topic of Money up to 
a value of RM 10,000,000; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities to help pupils solve daily 
problems related to money. 
 INTRODUCTION 
The lifelong benefits of teaching children good money habits make it well worth 
the effort. Children who are not taught these lessons face the consequences for a 
lifetime. Some parents do not teach children about money because they think they 
should not talk about money with children, do not have the time, or think they do 
not have enough money. 
ACTIVITY 4.1 
Most people have strong feelings and opinions about money, based 
on childhood experiences and the values and beliefs of their families. 
Do you agree with the above statement? Discuss the truth of this 
statement with your coursemates.
64  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
4.1 
Teaching children about money is more than preparing them for employment or 
teaching them to save some of the money they earn. It includes helping them 
understand the positive and negative meanings of money. For example, children 
need to learn that while it is nice to show someone love by buying a gift, it is just 
as important to show love through actions and words. Teachers and children 
should talk about their feelings, values, attitudes, and beliefs about money. This 
helps children understand the issues that may occur due to money and that 
compromises are often necessary to deal with them. 
ACTIVITY 4.2 
1. How do you create an open environment to discuss money 
issues? 
2. How do you respond to the effects of advertising and peer 
pressure on our children's requests for things? 
4.1.1 Teaching Children About Money 
How do you teach your children the topic on money? When teaching children 
about money, teachers need to make an effort to think from the children's point of 
view, not from adults’ point of view. For instance, a young child may ask his or 
her parents how much money they make, but what they really want to know is not 
how much their parents earn, but why they cannot have certain toys or why their 
family cannot go for holidays overseas. It is important for teachers to use 
examples or activities that match the child's stage of development, not necessarily 
the child's actual age in years. 
It is also important for teachers to communicate with children about money 
matters in very concrete terms. Children want to know how to operate in the adult 
world. Any time money is earned, moved, spent, donated, shared, borrowed or 
saved provides an opportunity for teachers to teach children how the money world 
works and what thoughts and feelings go into making money decisions. 
Children should be introduced to the origin of money; the barter system, the use 
of objects to represent money and the use of coins and notes in various 
denominations. Children learn mainly through observation and example; 
participation in discussions and group decision making; direct teaching through 
planned experiences; and by making their own decisions. Through observation, 
children learn a great deal more than teachers realise. Teachers can add to this
TOPIC 4 MONEY  65 
experiential learning through intentionally planned learning activities. As you 
teach children about money they can learn about: 
1. Responsibility; 
2. Family values and attitudes; 
3. Decision-making; 
4. Comparison-shopping; 
5. Setting goals and priorities; and 
6. Managing money outside the home. 
Let us learn about teaching money concepts in the next section. Enjoy! 
4.1.2 Teaching Money Concepts 
The right focus 
I was browsing through the chapter on 
Money in the Mathematics Year One 
textbook that my children are using in 
school when it suddenly struck me that we 
may not be teaching our children the right 
values about money. 
Almost all the problem-solving questions 
in the textbook focus on buying things and 
totalling up the amount spent. 
Why can’t the writers ask better 
questions, for instance, those which revolve 
around saving money and using it wisely? 
Questions pitched from this angle would 
help to inculcate good values and teach our 
children to be money-savvy at the same 
time. 
I think the present focus imparts 
unhealthy values about money to our 
children from Year One. 
Something is not quite right here. 
H.C. FOO 
(Source: Sunday STAR, 30 March 2008) 
What do you think about the truth as expressed by H.C. FOO? Do you think there 
is a need to educate children on the concepts of earning, saving, borrowing and 
sharing, besides spending? 
These financial concepts of earning, spending, saving, borrowing, and sharing are 
generic money concepts. Earning refers to how children receive money. Spending 
refers to the way children decide to use their money. Saving refers to money that 
the children set aside for some future use. Borrowing means that money can be 
obtained for use in the present but must be paid back in the future with an 
additional cost. Sharing means both the idea of sharing what we have with those 
who are less fortunate and obligations such as paying taxes which are required of
66  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
everybody. By providing children with intentional learning experiences related to 
these financial concepts we can provide children practical skills and knowledge 
and a perspective on money based upon values and beliefs. Among the benefits of 
teaching these concepts are: 
Earning teaches: 
(a) Financial independence 
(b) Work standards and habits 
(c) How to evaluate job alternatives 
(d) Relationship of money, time, skills and energy 
Spending teaches: 
(a) Difference and balance between wants and needs 
(b) Opportunities for comparing alternatives 
(c) Making decisions and taking responsibility for them 
(d) Keeping records 
Borrowing teaches: 
(a) Cost of borrowing 
(b) Borrowed money needs to be paid back 
(c) When it is appropriate to borrow 
(d) Consequences of buying now and paying later 
(e) Structure of borrowing 
(f) The idea of credit limits 
Sharing teaches: 
(a) Good feelings for giver and receiver 
(b) Helps other people 
(c) Doesn't always require public recognition 
(d) Obligations to give money to certain organisations, i.e. taxes to the 
government 
(e) Giving of yourself rather than giving money or gifts
TOPIC 4 MONEY  67 
Saving teaches: 
(a) How to get what you want or need by saving for it 
(b) Planning and delayed gratification 
(c) Interrelationship of spending and earning 
(d) Different purposes of planned and regular saving 
(Source: Sharon M. Danes and Tammy Dunrud, 2002. University of Minnesota) 
Now, let us look at some mathematical skills, beginning with how to model 
decimals using coins. 
4.1.3 Using Coins to Model Decimals 
Do you know how to model decimals? Some teachers use coins to model 
decimals. Recording amounts in Ringgit and sen does involve decimal fractions, 
but care must be taken on how the children see the connection between the sen 
and the fractional part of a decimal number. 
For example, children do not readily relate RM75.25 to RM75 and 25 hundredths 
of a Ringgit or 10sen to one-tenth of a Ringgit. If money is used as a model for 
decimals, children need to think of 10 sen and 1 sen as fractional parts of a 
Ringgit. 
It is common to find in supermarket advertisements the use of incorrect decimal 
notations. For example, the price of an item may be indicated as .75 sen. The 
assumption is that .75sen means the same as RM0.75. In fact .75 sen means 75 
hundredths of a sen! It is important to provide children with opportunities to 
practise recording money correctly. 
SELF-CHECK 4.1 
1. Explain with examples, the meaning of the following 
statement: 
“When teaching children about money, teachers need to make 
an effort to think from children's point of view, not from 
adults’ point of view ”. 
2. State the benefits of teaching the concept of saving and earning 
money.
68  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
MONEY 
4.2 
The introduction of money usually follows instruction on the basics of fraction 
and decimal skills. Teachers should note that various basics of fraction and 
decimal skills are prerequisite skills for the topic of money. 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of 
money are as follows: 
(a) Read and write the value of money in ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. 
(b) Add money in ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. 
(c) Subtract money in ringgit and sen within the range of RM10 million. 
(d) Multiply money in ringgit and sen with a whole number, fraction or decimal 
with products within RM 10 million. 
(e) Divide money in ringgit and sen with the dividend up to RM10 million. 
(f) Perform mixed operations of multiplication and division involving money in 
ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. 
(g) Solve problems in real context involving money in ringgit and sen up to RM 
10 million. 
(h) Perform mixed operations with money up to a value of RM10 million. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
4.3 
Below are several activities for pupils to understand basic operations on money. 
They also can acquire the major mathematical skills involved in adding, 
subtracting, multiplying and dividing money.
TOPIC 4 MONEY  69 
4.3.1 Basic Operations on Money 
ACTIVITY 4.3 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise the basic operations on money. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. 
Example: 
RM 1 642 000 
- RM 871 420 
RM 167 234 X 23 = 
RM 770 580 RM 3 846 382 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. 
2. Place the answer cards (grey cards) in a circle on the floor. 
3. Instruct the children to march around the circle of answer cards on 
the floor, chanting this rhyme: 
Basic operations, ‘round we go, 
Not too fast and not too slow. 
We won’t run and we won’t hop, 
We are almost there, it’s time to stop. 
4. When the rhyme finishes, the teacher will hold up a question card 
(white card) and ask them to work out the answer to the question. 
5. The child who is standing by the card with the answer to the 
question, picks up the answer card and shows it to the rest of the 
children. 
6. Instruct the children to check his or her answer. Is she or he 
correct? 
7. Repeat the procedure several times or until all the answer cards 
have been picked up. 
8. The child with the most answer cards wins and is awarded a prize.
70  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
ACTIVITY 4.4 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise the basic operations on money 
Materials: 
 Four lists of questions on mixed operations with money. Some of the 
questions may be repeated on each list. 
 Answers to the questions. 
Example: 
List 1 
1. RM 328 200 + RM 6 720 X 15 = 
2. RM 564 000 ÷ 40 + RM 484 120 = 
3. RM 1 875 223 – RM 956 600 ÷ 20 = 
4. RM 12 875 X 12 + RM 840 280 = 
5. RM 840 280 ÷ 20 – RM 9 027 = 
6. RM 2 411 610 – RM 21 140 X 22 =
TOPIC 4 MONEY  71 
List 2 
1. RM345,225 + RM2,550 X 24 = 
2. RM564,000 ÷ 40 + RM484,120 = 
3. RM528,500 – RM225,000 ÷ 20 = 
4. RM56,780 X 12 + RM450,228 = 
5. RM840,280 ÷ 20 – RM9,027 = 
6. RM2,667,345 – RM18,246 X 32 = 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare four lists of questions on mixed operations with money. 
Some of the questions may repeated on each list. 
2. Prepare 24 cards, each containing an answer for each of the 24 
questions. Tape these cards to the walls around the classroom. 
3. Divide the children into four teams. 
4. Give one list to each team. (You might want to provide a copy of 
the list for every member of the team). 
5. Ask the children to calculate the answers to the questions on their 
list. 
6. Ask the team members to search for the answer cards taped on the 
walls of the classroom. 
7. The first team to correctly calculate the answers to all the questions 
in their list and collect all the answer cards wins and will be 
awarded a prize.
72  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
ACTIVITY 4.5 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practice the basic operations on money. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. 
Example: 
RM328,100 ÷ 25 
+ RM532,590 = 
RM545,714 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare cards comprising sets of question cards and answer cards. 
The questions on mixed operations should involve money in 
ringgit and sen up to ten million Ringgit. 
2. Hand a card to each child. Some of the children will get question 
cards and some will get answer cards. 
3. Get the children holding the card with the question to calculate its 
answer. 
4. Ask the children to find their partner holding the card showing the 
answer to the question. 
5. If there is an odd number of children in the class, you should take a 
card and participate so that everyone has a partner. 
6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see the 
other’s card. Ask the children to check everyone’s calculation. 
Are the partners matched correctly? 
7. Hand out a Task Sheet containing ten questions on mixed 
operations with money up to ten million Ringgit and have the 
children work out the answers to reinforce their understanding of 
mixed operations with money.
TOPIC 4 MONEY  73 
4.3.2 Problem Solving on Money 
ACTIVITY 4.6 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To practise the basic operations on money. 
 To solve daily problems involving money. 
Materials: 
 Sets of cards 
Procedures: 
1. Instruct the children to form groups of three. 
2. Make three sets of the Game Cards and cut out the cards. 
3. Give each group a set of the cards. 
4. Shuffle the cards and spread them out face down on the table. 
5. Ask the children to take turns to choose two cards and place them 
face up on the table. 
6. If the cards show a word problem and its matching calculation, 
give the child time to solve the problem. If the pupil can give the 
correct answer, the child keeps both the cards. 
7. If the cards that the child chose do not show a word problem and 
its matching calculation or the child offers an incorrect answer to 
the problem, the cards are replaced in their original position on the 
table. 
8. When all the cards have been chosen, the children will count how 
many cards they have. The winner is the child with the most 
number of cards. 
ACTIVITY 1
74  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
A Proton Iswara costs 
RM26,754. A Waja 
costs RM65,467. How 
much cheaper is the 
Proton Iswara than the 
Waja? 
RM65,467 
- RM26,754 
12 girls bought a gold 
chain as a wedding 
present for a friend. 
Each paid RM725. 
What was the cost of 
the gold chain? 
RM725 
x 12 
The usual price of a 
luxurious car is 
RM236,789. Its sale 
price is RM199,888. 
How much is the 
difference between the 
sale price and the 
usual price? 
RM236,789 
- RM199,888 
8 brothers and sisters 
shared an inheritance 
of RM3,465,000 
equally. How much 
money does each of 
the siblings receive? 
RM3,465,000 ÷ 8 
= 
Pn Salmah bought a 
refrigerator and a 
stove. The refrigerator 
cost RM2,225. The 
stove cost RM4,355 
more than the 
refrigerator. How much 
did she spend 
altogether? 
RM2,225 
RM2,225 
+ RM4,355 
A single-storey house 
costs RM93,888. A 
double-storey 
bungalow costs 6 
times as much as the 
single-storey house. 
Find the cost of the 
double-storey 
bungalow. 
RM93,888 
x 6 
Dr Chen donated 
RM121,000 to Rumah 
Charis and 
RM324,500 to Rumah 
Chaya. He had 
RM3,500,000 left. How 
much money did he 
have at the beginning? 
RM121,000 
RM324,500 
+ RM3,500,000 
Mustafa has 
RM345,000 as 
savings. He has 5 
times as much money 
as his brother. How 
much money does his 
brother have? 
RM345,000 
÷ 5 
Suhaimee has 
RM55,345 in his 
savings. His mother 
gave him some more 
money. He now has 
RM115,300. How 
much money did his 
mother give him? 
RM115,300 
- RM55,345 
Syarikat Jefa donated 
RM125,700 and 
RM67,000 to two relief 
funds. What is Syarikat 
Jefa’s total donation ? 
RM125,700 
+ RM67,000
TOPIC 4 MONEY  75 
GAME CARDS 
ACTIVITY 4.7 
Learning Outcome: 
 To solve daily problems involving money. 
Materials: 
 Sets of catalogues 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedures: 
1. Instruct pupils to form groups of four. 
2. Give each pupil in the group a different catalogue. 
3. Tell each group that its the newspaper’s 10th Anniversary. In 
conjuction with their anniversary celebration, they are carrying out 
some charity work. 
4. The publisher of the newspaper has generously donated 
RM250,000 to the school. The money will be used to further equip 
the school resoure centre. 
5. Each person in the group is to study the catalogue provided to him 
or her. 
6. The person is to write the name and cost of one or two items that 
he or she feels would be of use to the school resource centre. 
7. Using the round robin format of the cooperative learning 
technique, members of the group will discuss each item chosen 
and why it was chosen. One member of the group serves as a 
recorder. 
8. The group will have to come out with a final list of items to be 
purchased. The group may need to make adjustments to keep the 
total cost below RM250,000. 
9. Prepare a bulletin-board to display the list of items presented by 
the groups. Displays help pupils to recap what they have learned 
and it is also a means of seeing the practical applications of 
mathematics.
76  TOPIC 4 MONEY 
 Teaching children about money is more than preparing them for employment 
or teaching them to save some of the money they earn. It includes helping 
them understand the positive and negative aspects of money. 
 Teachers and children should talk about their feelings, values, attitudes and 
beliefs about money. 
 When teaching children about money, teachers need to make an effort to think 
from the children's point of view, not the adults’ point of view. 
 As you teach children about money they can learn about responsibility; family 
values and attitudes; decision-making; comparison-shopping; setting goals and 
priorities; and managing money outside the home. 
 The financial concepts of earning, spending, saving, borrowing, and sharing 
are generic money concepts. 
 Some benefits of providing intentional learning experiences related to these 
financial concepts are children’s mastery of practical skills and knowledge, as 
well as a perspective about money based upon values and beliefs. 
 Recording amounts in Ringgit and sen does involve decimal fractions, but care 
must be taken on how children see the connection between the sen and the 
fractional part of a decimal number. 
 It is important to give children contextual examples on the use of money. 
Coin 
Money 
Note 
Value
TOPIC 4 MONEY  77 
Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for 
the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. 
Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. 
US: Allyn &Wadsworth. 
Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: 
Heath and Company. 
Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. 
Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. 
Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and 
middle schools. , Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Topic 
5 
 Percentages 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Demonstrate the importance of developing the basics of fraction and 
decimal skills as prerequisites to the learning of percentages; 
2. Use the vocabulary related to percentages correctly; 
3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to percentages; and 
4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for percentages. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Basically, percentages are used in many everyday situations. Children probably 
already know a bit about percentages. They are exposed to percentages when they 
go shopping with their parents. Shops use percentages in sales. Banks use them 
for loan rates. Schools use percentages in their forecast of examination results. 
Unfortunately, they are also often incorrectly used. For example, a store advertises 
prices reduced by 100%, rather than 50%; an interest rate of .03%, rather than 3%; 
and a school reports the number of straight A’s pupils increased by 200%, which 
is correct, but a little misleading, since the number of pupils that scored straight 
A’s went up from 1 to 3! 
ACTIVITY 5.1 
Visit the Math Forum website: 
http://mathforum.org/dr.math/tocs/fractions.middle.html 
Find out the frequently asked questions about percentages in the 
website.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  79 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
The introduction of percentages usually follows instruction after the mastery of 
basic fraction and decimal mathematical skills. 
Teachers should note that various fraction and decimal skills are prerequisite 
skills for learning percentages. For example, to solve a percentage problem, the 
pupil must be able to convert a percentage into a fraction or a decimal as shown 
below: 
For example, 
26 
100 
= 26%, and 45% = 45 
100 
= 0.45 
5.1.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent 
Figure 5.1: The various sales discount signs that we often see in shopping centres. 
[Source: http://www.bbc.co.uk] 
5.1 
ACTIVITY 5.2 
1. Change the following percents to decimals: ½ %, ⅘ %, ⅝ %. 
2. Develop an instructional sequence to teach pupils how to 
change percents like ½ %, ⅘ %, or ⅝ % to decimals.
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
80 
First of all, let us look at the meaning of the term “percent”. The term percent 
means “parts per hundred.” It expresses a relationship between some number and 
100. The symbol % indicates a denominator of 100. For example, 25% is an 
expression of the ratio between the number 25 and 100 and means 25 parts of 100, 
or 25 out of 100. 
When an item is sold for RM 100, the cost is the base to which the discount is 
applied. A 20% off the cost price is the rate of discount, and RM 20 is the amount 
of discount, or percentage. The table below illustrates some ways percent is used 
and it helps to clarify the confusion about the term per cent and percentage. 
Table 5.1: Common Uses of Percent 
Rate Base Percentage 
Sales 25% off 
retail price 
of plasma 
TV 
RM3,200 
retail price 
RM800 
reduction in 
price 
Service 
tax 
10% 
service tax 
RM250 
purchased 
RM25 in 
service tax 
charged 
Increase 
in tax 
4% raise in 
property 
tax 
Property tax 
of a 
RM360,000 
house 
Increased 
RM14,400 
in property 
taxes 
As a teacher, you must make it clear that per cent indicates the rate (of discount, 
and taxes), whereas percentage indicates the amount, or quantity (of discount 
and taxes). Note that the base and percentage always represent numbers that refer 
to the same units, and per cent is the rate by which percentage compares with the 
base. However in the Year 5 and Year 6 textbooks, percentage is represented with 
the symbol ‘%’ and is called ‘percent’. 
Another point of confusion arises when a given rate is applied to different bases. 
Consider the result when a RM 50 book is increased by 20%. An increase of 20% 
raises the price of the book to RM 60. After a year, the price of the book is 
reduced by 20%. Will the price of the book be the same as it was a year ago? In 
both cases, the percent is the same; an increase of 20% and a year later a reduction 
of 20%. Try calculating it and check if the price of the book a year later is the 
same as the price before the 20% increment?.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  81 
5.1.2 Teaching Aids in Learning Per Cent 
A key idea in mathematics is that numbers can be represented in many ways. A 
rational number can be expressed as a fraction, a decimal, or a percent. 
The content readiness children need before they are introduced to per cent is an 
understanding of both common and decimal fractions. The pedagogical readiness 
required is an understanding of the teaching aids they will use. 
During introductory and developmental activities each whole unit or set should be 
one that is easily subdivided into 100 parts. It is easier for children to understand 
the meaning of per cent when they deal with portions of the 100 parts of a unit. As 
an example, teachers are encouraged to use the 10-by-10 grid to represent per 
cent as shown in Figure 5.2: 
Figure 5.2: Using a 10-by-10 Grid to Represent Percents 
Source: http://www.bbc.co.uk 
This large square is made up of 100 small parts. 
10 parts are yellow. 
So 10% of the large square is yellow. 
40 parts are red. 
So 40% of the large square is red. 
50 parts are brown. 
So 50% of the large square is brown. 
Other than the 10-by-10 grid, teachers can also use the Cuisenaire materials.
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
82 
5.1.3 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 
As children show percent on a 10-by-10 grid and reflect on the language they use 
to describe their representations, the fraction and decimal names of the numbers 
will become apparent. 
Example 
7% = 7 
100 
= 0.07 
Because 7% (seven per cent) means 7 out of 100, it is seven-hundredths, which is 
written as 
in fraction notation and 0.07 in decimal notation. 
(a) Decimals as percent 
Writing a decimal as a per cent involves finding an equivalent decimal in 
hundredths. For example, 
For example, eight-tenths = eighty percent or 
0.8 = 0.8 x 100% = 80% 
Children find that to change a decimal to percent, one needs only to multiply 
by 100, which means “moving” the decimal point two places to the right. 
For example, 0.33 = 33% and 1.2 = 120%. 
To express a percent as a decimal, the opposite rule applies. For example, 
62.5% = 0.625 and 225% = 2.25. 
(b) Fractions as percent 
Children who have mastered the meaning of percent as “parts per hundred” 
should not have much problem expressing fractions as percent. 
For example, 29 
100 
= 29%. 
Children can be challenged to apply this understanding to find ways of 
writing a fraction whose denominator is other than 100 as a percent. 
For example, 4 
5 
= 80 
100 
= 80%.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  83 
As a teacher you can tell the pupils that a basic method is to find an 
equivalent fraction having a denominator of 100. Another method is to write 
the fraction in decimal and then multiply this number by 100. 
For example, 4 
5 
= 0.8 = 80%. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
PERCENTAGE 
Now, we move on to the major mathematical skill for percentage. Remember that 
various basic fraction and decimal skills are prerequisites for learning percentage. 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils when studying the topic 
of percentage are as follows: 
 Name and write the symbol for percentage. 
 State and convert fraction of hundredths to percentage and vice versa. 
Example 
26 
100 
= 26% and 45% = 45 
100 
 Convert proper fractions with the denominations of 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25 and 50 
to percentage. 
Example 
4 
5 
= 80 
100 
= 80%. 
 Convert percentage to decimal number and fraction in its simplest form. 
= 0.05 = ½ 
5.2 
SELF-CHECK 5.1 
1. Explain the meaning of percent and percentage. 
2. Using a suitable teaching aid, explain how you can introduce the 
topic on Percentages. 
5 
100
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
84 
 Convert mixed numbers to percentage. 
Example 
1 
1 
2 
= 3 
2 
= 150 
100 
= 150%. 
 Convert decimal numbers of value more than 1 to percentage. 
 Find the value for a given percentage of a quality 
 Finding values of percentage of a quantity. 
 Solve problems in real context involving relationships between percentage, 
fractions and decimals. 
We move on to the teaching and learning activities in the following section. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
5.3 
Let us look at a few activities to develop pupils’ understanding of percentage and 
master the major mathematical skills for percentage. 
5.3.1 Meaning and Notation of Per Cent 
ACTIVITY 5.3 
Learning Outcome: 
 To name and write the notion of per cent. 
 To state fraction of hundredths in percentage 
Materials: 
 Clean writing papers 
 10 x 10 Grid.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  85 
Procedures: 
1. Display a 10 x 10 grid. Ask the children to verify that there are 100 
equal squares on the grid. 
2. Shade one square and ask a pupil to name the shaded square. . 
[one hundredth]. 
3. Ask for a volunteer to come to the board to write a numeral to name 
the shaded square. [ Accept either 1 
ACTIVITY 1 
100 
or 0.01 ]. 
4. Tell the children that 1 
100 
can also be named 1 per cent. 
5. Explain to the children that percent means per hundred, or out of 
hundred. 
6. Explain to the children that the symbol % expresses a denominator 
of 100. As such, the name of 1 of the small square can be written as 
1% and read as one per cent. 
7. Ask fo a volunteer to count the number of shaded squares in the 
diagram above. 
8. Ask the volunteer to come to the board to write a numeral to name 
shaded squares. [ 40 
100 
]. 
9. Ask the volunteer to express the shaded squares in per cent. [ 40%]. 
10. Give out the Task Sheet and instruct the children to complete it.
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
86 
TASK SHEET 
1. Study the 10-by-10 grid below and fill in the blanks. 
ACTIVITY 1 
Now 20 parts have been coloured green. 20 out of the 100 is _____, 
so ____ % of the square is green. 
There are ____ parts not shaded. ____ out of 100 is ____%, so 
_____ of the square is not shaded. 
What happens if you add up the percentages for the blue, green and 
unshaded parts? 
____ + ____ + ____ = _____ 
So, the whole square is equal ______ . 
2. Study the picture below and fill in the blanks.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  87 
5.3.2 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert proper fractions with denominators of 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25 
and 50 to percent. 
 To convert mixed numbers to percentage 
Materials: 
 Clean writing papers 
 Task Sheet as below 
Procedures: 
1. Display 10 magnetic chips, 4 green and 6 blue on a magnetic 
board. 
2. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of 
coloured magnetic chips. [10] 
3. Ask the children, 
“What part of the set of magnetic chips is green?” [ 4/10] 
“Can anyone tell what percent of the chips is green?” [ 40% ] 
If a child gives the answer as 40%, ask for an explaination of how 
it was determined. 
If no answer is given, ask, “What must we do to change 4 
10 
to a 
fraction with a denominator of 100?” [Multiply both numerator 
and denominator by 10]. 
Ask, “Why do we do this ?” [ 40 
100 
is equivalent to 40% ] 
ACTIVITY 5.4
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
88 
4. Next, add another 10 green magnetic chips to the magnetic board. 
ACTIVITY 1 
5. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of 
coloured magnetic chips. [20] 
6. Ask the children, “Are the green chips in this set still 40% of the 
set?” 
7. Ask the children, 
“What part of the set of magnetic chips is green?” [ 14 
20 
] 
“Can anyone tell what percent of the chips is green?” [ 70% ] 
If a child gives the answer as 70%, ask for an explaination of how it 
was determined. 
If no answer is given, ask, “What must we do to change 14 
20 
to a 
fraction with a denominator of 100?” [Multiply both numerator and 
denominator by 5]. 
Ask, “Why do we do this ?” [ 14 5 
x 
20 5 
= 70 
100 
is equivalent to 70% ] 
8. Repeat steps (4) through (7) with more examples. 
9. Handout Task Sheet and ask pupils to complete it.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  89 
TASK SHEET 
State the percentage of the shaded region in the diagram below: 
ACTIVITY 1 
________ % of the figure is shaded. 
________ % of the figure is shaded. 
________ % of the figure is shaded. 
Convert the following fractions to percentages. 
(a) 
3 
5 
 
(b) 
1 
2 
 
(c) 
3 
4 
 
(d) 
3 
25 
 
(e) 
7 
1 
10 
 
(f) 
2 
3 
5 
 
(g) 
1 
5 
4 
 
(h) 
7 
6 
20 

 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
90 
ACTIVITY 5.5 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert percentage to decimal number and vice versa 
 To convert decimal numbers of values more than 1 to percentages 
Materials: 
 Clean writing paper 
 Task Sheet as below 
Procedures: 
1. Display a 10 x 1 grid on the board. 
2. Have a volunteer come forward to count the number of boxes on 
the grid. [10] 
3. Ask the children, 
“What decimal represents the shaded part of the grid ?” [ 0.3 ] 
“Can anyone tell what per cent of the grid is shaded?” [ 30% ] 
If a child gives the answer as 30%, ask for an explanation on how 
it was determined. 
If no answer is given, ask, “What decimal fraction represents the 
shaded part of the grid?” [ ] 
“Can anyone change the fraction to a decimal?” [ 0.3 ] 
“What must we do to change a decimal to per cent?” [Multiply by 
100]. 
Ask, “What per cent is 0.3 ?” [ 0.3 x 100 is equivalent to 30% ] 
4. Next, show another strip of 10 x 2 grid on the board. 
5. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of boxes 
on the grid. [20] 
6. Ask the children, “What decimal represents the shaded part of the 
grid ?” [ 0.4] 
7. Ask the children, 
“Can anyone tell what percent of the grid is shaded?” [ 40% ]
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  91 
8. Ask for an explanation on how it was determined. [Multiply 0.4 by 
100 ] 
9. Repeat steps (4) through (7) with other examples. 
10. Hand out the Task Sheet and ask pupils to complete it. 
TASK SHEET 
ACTIVITY 1 
1. Convert the following decimal to percentage. 
(a) 0.4 = 
(b) 0.7 = (c) 0.6 = (d) 0.9 = 
(e) 0.53 = 
(f) 0.78 = (g) 0.13 = (h) 0.66 = 
2. Convert the following decimal to percentage. 
(a) 1.5 = 
(b) 3.1 = (c) 2.7 = (d) 9.1 = 
(e) 5.01 = 
(f) 1.99 = (g) 3.14 = (h) 8.08 =
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
92 
ACTIVITY 5.6 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise the fraction and decimal equivalent of per cent. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards comprising 13 numbers in 4 equivalent forms. 
Example: 
50% ½ 0.5 
Procedures: 
1. Two, three or four players can play this game. The objective of the 
game is to lay all your cards down. 
2. Begin by dealing seven cards to each player. The remainder of the 
pack is placed face down on the table. 
3. Next, the top card from the deck is placed face up near the pack to 
begin the discard pile. 
4. The first player may either draw the top card from the face down 
pile or pick up the top card on the discard pile. The player must 
then discard a card, and the turn goes to the next player. 
5. When one player has accumulated three cards of equivalent value, 
these are laid face up on the table. 
6. The player who has the fourth equivalent value for the set may lay 
that card face up on the table in front of himself or herself. The 
player next to the one who laid down the three equivalent cards 
continues the play. 
7. When the pack is gone, the discard pile is turned over and becomes 
the pack.
TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES  93 
8. The first player to lay all his or her cards down wins that hand. Each 
player receives 5 points for every card laid down and loses 5 points 
for every card still held. 
9. The game is over when one player has 100 points or the teacher 
gives the instruction to stop playing the game. 
Percentage Fraction 
10% 
20% 
25% 
50% 
75% 
 The term per cent means “parts per hundred.” It expresses a relationship 
between some number and 100. 
 The symbol % indicates a denominator of 100. 
 Percent indicates the rate (of discount and taxes), whereas percentage 
indicates the amount or quantity (of discount and taxes).
 TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 
94 
 During introductory and developmental activities on per cent, materials used 
should be one that is easily subdivided into 100 parts. 
 To change a decimal to percent, one needs only to multiply by 100, which means 
“moving” the decimal point two places to the right. To express a percent as a 
decimal, the opposite rule applies. 
 To change a fraction to percent, a basic method is to find an equivalent 
fraction having a denominator of 100. 
 Another method is to write the fraction in decimal and then multiply this 
number by 100. 
Percent Percentage 
Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for 
the elementary and middle School. Needham Heights, MA.: Allyn & Bacon. 
Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. 
US: Allyn & Wadsworth. 
Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington DC: 
Heath and Company. 
Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. 
Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. 
Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and 
middle Schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Topic 
6 
 Time 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Use vocabulary related to time correctly as required by the Year 5 
and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus ; 
2. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to time; 
3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication 
and division of time correctly; 
4. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division of time; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities of time for Years 5 and 6. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Throughout history, people have sought out various ways to measure time. 
Timekeeping has been an important part of all cultures throughout the centuries. 
How did people first tell time? People first told time by looking at the sun as 
it crossed the sky. When the sun was directly overhead in the sky, it was the 
middle of the day, or noon. When the sun was close to the horizon, it was either 
early morning (sunrise) or late evening (sunset). 
The history of clocks is very interesting, and there have been many elaborate 
types of clocks developed over the centuries. The word clock was first used in the 
14th century (about 700 years ago). It comes from the Latin word for bell 
"clocca".
96  TOPIC 6 TIME 
The oldest type of clock was a sundial, also called a sun clock. Sundials used the 
sun to tell the time. The shadow of the sun pointed to a number on a circular disk 
that showed you the time. In the picture below, the shadow created by the sun 
points to 9, so it is nine o'clock. Since sundials depend on the sun, they can only 
be used to tell the time during the day. 
SUNDIAL WATER CLOCK PENDULUM CLOCK 
Figure 6.1: Types of clocks 
A water clock was made of two containers of water, one higher than the other. 
Water travelled from the higher container to the lower container through a tube 
connecting the containers. The containers had marks showing the water level, and 
the marks told the time. Water clocks worked better than sundials because they 
told the time at night as well as during the day. They were also more accurate than 
sundials. 
The first practical clock was driven by a pendulum. The pendulum swings left and 
right, and as it swings, it turns a wheel with teeth. The turning wheel turns the 
hour and minute hands on the clock. One problem with pendulum clocks is that 
they stopped running after a while and had to be restarted. 
Quartz crystal clocks were then invented. Quartz is a type of crystal that looks like 
glass. When you apply voltage, or electricity, and pressure, the quartz crystal 
vibrates or oscillates at a very constant frequency or rate. The vibration moves the 
clock's hands very precisely.
TOPIC 6 TIME  97 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
6.1 
In this subtopic, we will be looking at how to teach pupils how to tell time. 
ACTIVITY 6.1 
Search the Internet for information about how man started to tell time. 
State two reasons for time to be taught as one of the important topics 
in the Years 5 and 6 KBSR Mathematics syllabus. 
6.1.1 History of Time 
The Greeks divided the year into 12 parts that are called months. They divided 
each month into 30 parts that are called days. Their year had a total of 360 days or 
12 times 30 days (12 x 30 = 360). 
The Egyptians and Babylonians decided to divide the day from sunrise to sunset 
into 12 parts that are called hours. They also divided the night, the time from 
sunset to sunrise, into 12 hours. This system of measuring time was not very 
accurate because the length of an hour changed depending on the time of year. 
Somebody finally figured out that by dividing the whole day into 24 hours of 
equal length (12 hours of the day plus 12 hours of the night), the time could be 
measured more accurately. 
The hour is divided into 60 minutes, and each minute is divided into 60 seconds. 
The idea of dividing the hour and minutes into 60 parts comes from the Sumerian 
sexagesimal system, which is based on the number 60. This system was developed 
about 4,000 years ago. 
As we know, a clock only shows 12 hours at a time, and the hour hand must go 
around the clock twice to measure 24 hours, or a complete day. To tell the first 12 
hours of the day (from midnight to noon) apart from the second 12 hours of the 
day (from noon to midnight), we use these terms: 
AM – Ante meridiem, from the Latin term for "before noon" 
PM – Post meridiem, from the Latin term for "after noon"
98  TOPIC 6 TIME 
ACTIVITY 6.2 
Visit the Math Forum website: 
http://mathforum.org/dr.math/tocs/time.middle.html 
Find out why day and night are divided into 12 parts. 
6.1.2 Time Zones 
Because the Earth turns, it is daytime on one side of the world and night time on 
the other side. In 1884, delegates from 25 countries met and agreed to divide the 
world into time zones. If you draw a line around the middle of the Earth, it is a 
circle (equator). The delegates divided the 360 degrees of the circle into 24 zones, 
each 15 degrees apart (24 x 15 = 360). They decided to start counting from 
Greenwich (pronounced GREN-ich), England, which is 0 degrees longitude. To 
see the standard time zones of the world, refer to the Figure 6.2 below. 
Figure 6.2: Time zones 
Source: http://www.arcytech.org/jaya/clock/images/time_zones.jpg
TOPIC 6 TIME  99 
6.1.3 Telling the Time Correctly 
Clocks and watches have both a big hand to tell the minutes and a small hand to 
tell the hour. Look at the picture below. The hour hand is pointing to the 1, and 
the minute hand is pointing to the 12 (or 0 minutes). It is exactly one o'clock. 
One way to write one o'clock is 1.00. Another way to write it is 1:00. The symbol 
: is called a colon. It separates the hours from the minutes. The number on the left 
side of the colon tells the hour and the number on the right side tells the minutes. 
To tell the time, we look at the hour hand first and then the minute hand. 
In the picture above, the hour hand is pointing to the number 1, and the minute 
hand is pointing to the number 15 (look at the outside of the clock), so it is one-fifteen, 
or 1:15. Notice that the hour hand is not pointing exactly at the 1, but has 
moved a little closer to the 2. As the minute hand moves all the way around the 
clock, the hour hand moves from one hour to the next. 
You can divide an hour, which is 60 minutes long, into four parts. The parts are 
divided by the 0, 15, 30, and 45 minute marks as shown in the picture below. Each 
of the four parts is called a quarter. In the table below, you will learn ways to say 
the time using the word "quarter".
100  TOPIC 6 TIME 
O'clock 
quarter to quarter past 
half past 
When the number of minutes is greater than 30, instead of saying the number of 
minutes after the hour, you can say the number of minutes before the next hour, or 
the number of minutes to the next hour. The following table shows different ways 
to say the time, including using the word "quarter" and the word "to". 
Table 6.1: Different Ways to Say the Time 
Time Ways to Tell the Time 
6:00 Six o'clock 
2:15 Two-fifteen 
Quarter past two 
5:30 Five-thirty 
Half past five 
8:45 Eight-forty-five 
Quarter to nine 
3:50 Three-fifty 
Ten to four 
7:11 Seven-eleven 
Eleven minutes past seven 
11:48 Eleven-forty-eight 
Twelve minutes to twelve 
12:00 Twelve o'clock 
Noon (middle of the day) 
Midnight (middle of the night)
TOPIC 6 TIME  101 
ACTIVITY 6.3 
Look through the last few years of the Arithmetic Teacher or other 
journals of teaching Mathematics in Primary Schools. Read an article 
on the teaching and learning of time that is relevant to the Year 5 and 
Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus. Discuss your article with your 
coursemates and tutor. 
6.1.4 24-Hour System 
A 24-hour system is used for international time readings. The times of arrivals and 
departures of airplanes, international trains and ships are read in the form of the 
24-hour clock instead of the 12-hour clock. The international time system uses 4 
digits to indicate time, the first 2 digits indicate hours while the last two digits 
indicate minutes. 
For example: 
12-Hour Clock 24-Hour Clock 
5.30 am 0530 
8.15 pm 2015 
The time-line below can be used to show the relationship between the 12-hour 
system and the 24-hour system. It is similar to the number line used in the number 
system except that in the time-line we have 60 divisions to represent the minutes 
in an hour. 
12-hour System 
mid-night morning (a.m.) noon 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 1000 1100 1200 
24-hour System
102  TOPIC 6 TIME 
12-hour System 
noon afternoon (p.m.) mid-night 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 
24-hour System 
To convert the 12-hour system to the 24-hour system, we do the following: 
(i) 1.45 a.m. = 0145 we add 0 to make 4 digits and we read as 01, 45. 
(ii) 5.48 p.m. = 1748 we add 12 to the hours if it is after noon and we read 
it as 17, 48. 
To convert the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system, we do the following: 
(i) 0045 = 0.45 am The first two digits (less than 12) indicates morning 
(a.m.). We put a dot (.) after the first two digits to indicate hours and 
minutes. 
(ii) 1535 = 3.15 pm The first two digits (more than 12) indicates afternoon 
(p.m.). For hours more than 12, we subtract 12 from the given hour (15 – 12 
= 3 hours) 
(iii) 2345 = 11.45 pm Here again, the first two digits are more than 12, so 
we subtract 12 from 23 (23 – 12 = 11hours). It indicates (p.m.) in this case it 
is night. 
SELF-CHECK 6.1 
1. Explain the difference between the 12-hour system and the 24- 
hour system. 
2. Using a suitable teaching aid, explain how you would convert 
2145 into the 12-hour system.
TOPIC 6 TIME  103 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
TIME 
Our pupils will learn the topic of time effectively if we plan the lesson 
systematically. A well organised conceptual development of time will help our 
pupils to understand the concept of time better. Though pupils have been exposed 
to time before, it is still our responsibility as teachers of Year 5 and Year 6 to 
provide adequate opportunities for our pupils to explore and have practical 
experience of time. We should use physical materials and other representations to 
help our children develop their understanding of time. 
The major mathematical skills related to time to be mastered by Year 5 and Year 
6 pupils are as follows: 
(a) Time in the 24-hour system 
(i) Read and write time in hours and minutes in the 24-hour system; 
(ii) Convert time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system and vice 
versa; and 
(iii) Solve real life problems involving time in the 24-hour system. 
(b) Convert time in fractions and decimals; 
(i) Convert time in fractions and decimals of a minute to seconds; and 
(ii) Convert time in fractions and decimals of an hour to minutes and to 
seconds. 
(c). Year, Decade, Century and Millennium 
(i) Convert time involving year and decade; 
(ii) Convert time involving year and century; 
(iii) Convert time involving year, decade, century and millennium; and 
(iv) Solve real problems involving year, decade, century and millennium. 
(d) Operations 
(i) Add and subtract time involving hours, minutes and seconds; 
(ii) Multiply and divide time involving hours, minutes and seconds; and 
(iii) Solve real problems involving addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division of time. 
6.2
104  TOPIC 6 TIME 
(e) Calculate the duration of an event 
(i) Calculate the duration of an event involving hours, minutes and 
seconds; 
(ii) Calculate the duration of an event involving days and hours; 
(iii) Calculate the duration of an event involving months, years and dates; 
(iv) Determine the start or end time of an event from a given duration of 
time; and 
(v) Solve problems involving time duration in fractions and/or decimals of 
hours, minutes and seconds. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
6.3 
In this subtopic, we demonstrate to you the teaching and learning activities for the 
topic of time that can be used in the classroom. Pupils can master major 
mathematical skills involving time by carrying out these activities. 
6.3.1 Time in the 24-hour System 
ACTIVITY 6.4 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To write the time in words 
 To write the time in numerals 
 To convert the time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system 
and vice versa 
Materials: 
 Task Cards 
 Answer Sheets
TOPIC 6 TIME  105 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of five pupils and give each 
pupil an Answer Sheet. 
2. Instruct pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 
3. Shuffle five Task Cards and place them face down in a stack 
at the centre. 
4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 
5. Ask the player to write all the answers to the questions in the 
card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 
6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
pupils in the group exchange the card with the pupil on their 
left in clockwise direction. 
7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until all of them in the group 
have answered the questions in all the cards. 
8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct 
answers. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the vocabulary related to 
time. 
Example of an Answer Sheet : 
Name :________________________ Class :______________________ 
Card A Card B Card C 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
Card D Card E 
1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________
106  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of a Task Card: 
Card A 
1. Write the time in words. 
0932 hrs = 
2. Write the time in numerals. 
Seventeen twenty-four hours = 
3. Convert the time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system. 
1352 hrs = 
4. Convert the time from the 12-hour system to the 24-hour system 
7. 30 a.m. = 
ACTIVITY 6.5 
Work with your friend in class to prepare four more Task Cards. 
There should be four questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
6.4.
TOPIC 6 TIME  107 
6.3.2 Converting Time in Fractions and Decimals 
ACTIVITY 6.6 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert time in fractions and decimals of a minute to seconds 
 To convert time in fractions and decimals of an hour to minutes and 
to seconds 
 To convert time in fractions and decimals of a day to hours, minutes 
and seconds 
Materials: 
 30 different Flash Cards 
 Clean writing paper 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a 
clean writing sheet. 
2. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the 
centre. 
3. Instruct Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack and 
showing the card to Player B. 
4. Instruct Player B to read the answers to the questions in the card 
within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 
5. Instruct Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each 
correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points for 
each Flash Card). 
6. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards are drawn by Player 
A. 
7. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the 
opportunity to read the 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 
8. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the most number of 
points. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts about units of 
time.
108  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of a Flash Card: 
Flash Card 1 
1. Convert the following time to seconds. 
0.2 minute = seconds 
2. Convert the following time to minutes. 
3 hour = minutes 
5 
3. Convert the following time to hours. 
0.5 day = hours 
4. Convert the following time to hours, minutes and seconds. 
0.48 day = hours minutes seconds 
ACTIVITY 6.7 
Work with a few friends of yours in class to prepare 29 more Flash 
Cards. 
There should be four questions in each Flash Card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
6.6.
TOPIC 6 TIME  109 
6.3.3 Year, Decade, Century and Millennium 
ACTIVITY 6.8 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert units of time from century to years and vice versa 
 To convert units of time from century to decades and vice versa 
 To convert units of time from millennium to years and vice versa 
 To convert units of time from millennium to decades and vice versa 
Materials: 
 Task Sheets 
 Clean writing papers 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Give each group 
a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is 
placed at each station. 
3. The teacher instructs pupils to answer the questions in the Task 
Sheet at each station. 
4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will move on to the next 
station in the clockwise direction. 
6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct 
answers) is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to convert units of time 
from century and millennium to years and decades and vice versa.
110  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of a Task Sheet: 
STATION 1 
1. Convert the following centuries to years. 
(a) 6 centuries = years 
(b) 
2 centuries = years 
5 
2. Convert the following years to centuries 
(a) 175 years = centuries 
(b) 800 years = centuries 
3. Convert the following decades to centuries and vice versa. 
(a) 5 centuries = decades 
(b) 150 decades = centuries 
4. Convert the following millennium to centuries. 
(a) 7 millennium = centuries 
(b) 50 centuries = millennium 
ACTIVITY 6.9 
Work with two of your friends to prepare four more Task Sheets for 
the other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. Make 
sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.8.
TOPIC 6 TIME  111 
6.3.4 Basic Operations Involving Time 
ACTIVITY 6.10 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To add time in hours, minutes and seconds 
 To subtract time in hours, minutes and seconds 
 To multiply time in hours, minutes and seconds 
 To divide time in hours, minutes and seconds 
Materials: 
 Activity Cards 
 Clean writing papers 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a 
different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. Instruct pupils to shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them 
face down in a stack at the centre. 
3. Teacher signals to the pupils to begin answering the questions in 
the first Activity Card drawn. 
4. Once they have completed the first Card, they continue with the 
next Activity Card. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their 
answer paper to the teacher. 
6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to add, subtract, multiply 
and divide time in hours, minutes and seconds.
112  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of an Activity Card: 
1. Add the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. 
(a) 3 hrs 40 min 30 s (b) 2 hrs 35 min 20 s 
+ 4 hrs 35 min 35 s + 5 hrs 35 min 40 s 
2. Subtract the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. 
(a) 7 hrs 40 min 30 s (b) 8 hrs 35 min 20 s 
- 4 hrs 35 min 35 s - 5 hrs 35 min 40 s 
3. Multiply the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. 
(a) 3 hrs 50 min 20 s (b) 5 hrs 35 min 25 s 
 5  3 
4. Divide the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. 
(a) 6 18 hrs 24 min 30 s (b) 8 20 hrs 42 min 32 s 
ACTIVITY 6.11 
Work in pairs to prepare eleven more Activity Cards for the group. 
There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are 
based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.10.
TOPIC 6 TIME  113 
6.3.5 Duration of an Event 
ACTIVITY 6.12 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To calculate the duration of an event involving hours, minutes and 
seconds 
 To calculate the duration of an event involving days and hours 
 To determine the start or end time of an event from a given duration 
of time 
 To calculate the duration of an event in months, years and dates 
Materials: 
 Exercise Sheets 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into pairs (two pupils in each group). 
2. Give each group a different colour pencil. 
3. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with four questions each. 
4. The group that finishes first with all correct answers will be the 
winner. 
5. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the duration of an 
event. 
ACTIVITY 1
114  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of an Exercise Sheet: 
1. Find the duration of the following events. 
From To Duration 
(a) 1335 hrs 1945 hrs 
(b) 11.30 a.m. 3.45 p.m. 
2. Find the duration of the following events. 
Starting Time Ending Time Duration 
(a) 0900 hrs, 
5 April 
1100 hrs, 
12 April 
(b) 6.30 a.m., 
15 November 
3.30 p.m., 
17 November 
3. Calculate the starting or ending time of the following events. 
Starting Time Ending Time Duration 
(a) 0900 hrs, 
5 April 
1 hour 
15 minutes 
(b) 3.30 p.m., 
17 November 
4 days 
3 hours 
4. Find the duration of the following events. 
(a) From July 2013 to September 2014 
= _________ years ______ months 
(b) From 0730 hrs, 20 June 2013 till 1740 hrs, 21 June 2014 
= _________ day ______hours ______ minutes
TOPIC 6 TIME  115 
6.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Time 
ACTIVITY 6.13 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To solve problems involving duration of time in fractions and/or 
decimals of hours, minutes and seconds 
 To solve problems involving computations of duration of time 
Materials: 
 Time worksheets 
 Clean writing papers 
 Colour pencils 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into ten groups and give each group a Time 
Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 
2. The teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the 
Time Worksheet. 
3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 
4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Time Worksheets. 
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4. 
6. Once all the 10 Time Worksheets have been answered, the teacher 
collects the answer papers and corrects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems 
involving duration of time.
116  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Example of a Time Worksheet: 
TIME WORKSHEET 1 
1. A drawing competition started at 1425 hrs and ended at 1645 hrs. 
Calculate the duration of the competition. 
The duration of the competition is _____________. 
2. Mrs. Chong spent 
1 day to bake a cake and 
8 
1 day to sew a 
4 
dress. How long did she take to complete the work altogether? 
She took ___________ to complete the work altogether. 
3. Sharipah works in Ipoh General Hospital as a nurse. She works 
for 
1 of a day. How many hours does she work? 
3 
Sharipah works_________ hours. 
4. Meng Choo was posted to Sabah on 2 August 2008. Then, she 
was transferred to Perak on 1 July 2012. Find the duration, in 
years and months, of her stay in Sabah. 
The duration of her stay in Sabah is ____________. 
ACTIVITY 6.14 
Prepare nine more Time Worksheets for the group. There should be 
four questions in each worksheet. Make sure your worksheets are 
based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.13
TOPIC 6 TIME  117 
 Timekeeping has been an important part of all cultures throughout the 
centuries. The history of clocks is very long, and many different types of 
clocks have been invented over the centuries. 
 The first method people used to tell the time was by looking at the sun as it 
crossed the sky. The oldest type of clock was a sundial, also called a sun 
clock. Water clocks worked better than sundials because they told the time at 
night as well as during the day. 
 The first practical clock was driven by a pendulum. One problem with 
pendulum clocks was that they stopped running after a while and had to be 
restarted. Quartz crystal clocks were invented in 1920. 
 In Year 5 and Year 6, pupils need to know how to read and write time using 
the 24-hour system; convert time in fractions and decimals to hours, minutes 
and seconds; add, subtract, multiply and divide time; calculate the duration of 
an event; and finally solve problems involving duration of time. 
 Pedagogical Content Knowledge for this topic is divided into history of time, 
time zones, saying time correctly and the 24-hour system. This knowledge 
would equip us with some added information for the teaching and learning of 
time. 
 It is important to provide our pupils opportunities to explore and have 
practical experiences with the concept of time; using physical materials and 
other representations to help them develop their understanding of it. 
24-hour system 
Analog clock 
Ante meridiem 
Digital clock 
Hour hand 
Minute hand 
Post meridiem 
Time zones
118  TOPIC 6 TIME 
Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in education workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: 
Pearson Education Asia. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Mathematics KBSR Year 5, siri 
intensif. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Mathematics KBSR Year 6, Siri 
Intensif. Kuala Lumpur. Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Peter, C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann 
Educational Publishers. 
Reys, R. E., Suydam, M. N., & Lindquist, M. M. (1989). Helping children learn 
mathematics. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. 
Smith, K. J. (2001). The nature of mathematics. US: Thomson Learning. 
Sunny Yee & Ng, K. H. (2007). A problem solving approach : Mathematics year 
2. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
Topic 
7 
 Length, Mass 
and Volume 
of Liquids 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Use the vocabulary related to length, mass and volume of liquids 
correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics 
Syllabus; 
2. Relate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to the length, mass and volume of liquids; 
3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division involving length, mass and volume of liquids correctly; 
4. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division 
of length, mass and volume of liquids; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division involving length, mass and volume of 
liquids. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Welcome to a new topic on Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids. I am sure you 
will agree with me that measurement problems, such as arithmetic problems, are 
encountered in many different situations in our daily lives. One of the reasons to 
include measurement in KBSR mathematics is to enable children to work with its 
many practical applications in real life situations. It is important for children to 
have opportunities to learn more about measurement. Knowing how children tend 
to think about measurement helps teachers to guide children's discovery of the 
principles of measurement.
120  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
One of the earliest measuring tools invented by man was used to weigh things. 
Primitive societies needed fundamental measures for daily jobs (for example, 
constructing homes of an appropriate size and shape, fashioning clothes, or 
bartering food or raw materials). As man evolved, measurement units became 
more and more complex. For more sophisticated jobs, it was necessary not only to 
weigh and measure complex things - it was also necessary to do it accurately time 
after time and in different places. 
The need for a single worldwide coordinated measurement system was recognized 
over 300 years ago. Measures for mass were to be derived from the unit of length. 
The metric unit of mass, called the “gram” was defined as the mass of one cubic 
centimetre of water. The name Le Systeme International d’Units (International 
System of Units), with the international abbreviation SI, was adopted for this 
modernised metric system. 
Children can use unconventional items like paper clips to measure lengths, seeds 
to measure mass and glass containers to measure volume of liquids. However, 
they need to understand that identical standard units must be used when 
uniformity in measuring is required. In Year 5 and Year 6, our pupils would have 
to learn the relationship between centimetres, metres and kilometres, the 
relationship between kilograms and grams, as well as to estimate the volume of 
liquids in litres. It is important that our pupils master these concepts and 
relationships in order to extend their skills to cover addition, subtraction, 
multiplication and division of units of length, mass and volume of liquids. 
In the first part of this topic, we will learn about the pedagogical content 
knowledge of measurement such as the historical notes, the vocabulary, the basic 
principles, units, and relationship between units of measurement. In the second 
part of the topic, we will look at the major mathematical skills of measurements 
for Year 5 and Year 6. Before we conclude this topic, we will learn how to plan 
and carry out innovative activities to teach the topic of measurement of length, 
mass and volume of liquids. 
ACTIVITY 7.1 
Think of five reasons why measurement plays an important role in 
our lives. List the reasons before you compare them with your 
partner.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  121 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
Important information regarding the content and pedagogical aspects for teaching 
measurement covers the following aspects: 
(a) Historical notes on length, mass and volume of liquids; 
(b) The basic principles of measurement; 
(c) The meanings of length, mass and volume of liquids; and 
(d) Units of length, mass and volume of liquids. 
Figure 7.1: Some human-referenced units of measurement 
7.1 
ACTIVITY 7.2 
Figure 7.1 shows human-referenced units of measurement. List 
down four more of such units of measurement that were used in the 
olden days. 
You may refer to the following URL : 
http://www-history.mcs.st-andrews.ac.uk/ 
HistTopics/Measurement.html
122  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
7.1.1 Historical Note on Measurement 
Measurement has been important ever since man settled from his nomadic 
lifestyle and started using building materials, occupying land and trading with his 
neighbours. As society become more technologically orientated much higher 
accuracies of measurement are now required in an increasingly diverse set of 
fields, from micro-electronics to interplanetary ranging. 
Ancient measurement of length was based on the human body (refer to Figure 
7.2). There were many different measurement systems developed in early times, 
most of them only being used in a small locality. One which gained a certain 
universal nature was that of the Egyptian cubit developed around 3000 BC. Based 
on the human body, it was taken to be the length of an arm from the elbow to the 
extended fingertips. A traditional tale tells the story of Henry I (1100-1135) who 
decreed that the yardstick should be "the distance from the tip of the King's nose 
to the end of his outstretched thumb". 
The cubit 
(finger tip to elbow) 
The Yardstick 
(Henry I – thumb to nose) 
Figure 7.2: Ancient length measurements 
It had long been realised that a universal standard of measurement was needed, 
and that it should be a natural constant. The need for a single worldwide 
coordinated measurement system was recognised over 300 years ago. In 1790, the 
National Assembly of France requested the French Academy of Sciences to 
“deduce an invariable standard for all the measures and all the weights.” The 
Commission that was appointed created a system that was, at once, simple and 
scientific. Measures for mass were to be derived from the unit of length. 
Furthermore, the larger and smaller version of each unit was to be created by 
multiplying and dividing the basic units by 10 and its power. The metric unit of 
mass, called the “gram” was defined as the mass of one cubic centimetre of water. 
The name Le Systeme International d’Units (International System of Units), with 
the international abbreviation SI, was adopted for this modernised metric system.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  123 
Figure 7.3: Triple beam balances 
(Instruments to measure mass) 
Figure 7.4: Measuring cylinders 
(Instruments to measure volume of liquids) 
7.1.2 The Basic Principles of Measurement 
Understanding the following basic principles will definitely help us to teach this 
topic effectively. The four basic principles underlying the measurement of length, 
mass and volume of liquids are as follows: 
(a) Comparison principle – This principle deals with comparing and ordering 
of objects by a specific attribute. It involves using suitable vocabulary to 
describe and compare: 
(i) Length such as short, shorter, tall, taller, long, longer, high, higher, 
deep, deeper, wide, wider, width, depth, height, etc. 
(ii) Mass such as heavy, heavier, light, lighter, etc. 
(iii) Volume of liquids such as big volume, bigger volume, small volume, 
smaller volume
124  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
(b) Transitivity principle – This principle involves comparing and ordering of 
three or more objects using appropriate language, e.g. If A is heavier than B 
and C is heavier than A, then C must be heavier than B, etc. 
(c) Conservation principle – This principle states that the length, mass or the 
volume of an object does not change even when the position or the 
orientation of the object is changed. 
(d) Measuring principle – This principle refers to the fact that measurement 
involves stating how many of a given unit match the attribute (e.g. length, 
mass or volume) of an object. For example, when measuring the mass of a 
rod, stating the number of kilograms that can be used to weigh it. 
One other point to note is that there are some conceptual differences between 
counting and measuring. For instance, when counting the number of pupils in the 
classroom, the result must be a whole number, i.e. the quantity is discrete. 
However, when measuring the height of pupils, the result can take on values other 
than whole numbers, for example, 129.3 cm, etc. Such quantities are called 
continuous quantities. The number line model can be used to help your pupils to 
visualise the continuous number scales used in measuring length, mass and 
volume. 
7.1.3 The Meanings of Length, Mass and Volume of 
Liquids 
Let us look at the meaning of measurement in broad terms. It is associating 
numbers with physical quantities and so the earliest forms of measurement 
constituted the first steps towards mathematics. Once “associating numbers with 
physical objects” was carried out, it became possible to compare the objects by 
comparing the associated numbers. This led to the development of methods of 
working with numbers. 
(a) Length 
Now, let us take a look at the formal definition of length. The length of an 
object refers to the number of standard units (e.g. centimetres) which can be 
laid in a straight line along or beside the object. 
Length of a coloured ribbon = 6 units
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  125 
In other words, “length” is the distance between any two points (locations) 
measured along a straight line. Two lengths can be compared directly by putting 
them side by side, with one end of each length aligned. In fact, lengths can be 
measured indirectly by comparing each length with a third length and that third 
length is a measuring instrument such as a ruler or scale. 
(b) Mass 
Do you know how to introduce mass to primary school pupils? For primary 
school pupils, the concept of mass can be described as the general 
“heaviness” of an object. Mass is one of the least common forms of 
measurement used for comparing objects in everyday situations. In fact, it 
has been found that the concept of mass is quite difficult for children to 
grasp because mass cannot be seen but has to be held and felt. In other 
words, the mass of two objects cannot be compared by just seeing them 
together. Moreover, the mass of an object may not be proportional to its 
size. A big piece of cotton wool may be lighter than a small piece of metal. 
Therefore, it is important for us to establish in the minds of children that “a 
smaller sized object may not necessarily be lighter than a bigger sized 
object” and vice versa. 
Scientifically, the terms weight and mass have different meanings. Mass is 
the measure of the amount of matter in an object whereas weight is the 
gravitational force (g) acting on that mass. For example, a boy of mass 20 kg 
has a weight of 200 N (taking g = 10 ms 2 ). However, these two terms are 
used to mean the same thing. Nevertheless, it is normal to refer to the 
“weighing of an object” as a process to find its mass. 
(c) Volume of liquids 
Volume is literally the “amount of space filled” by an object. But on a 
practical level, we often want to know about its capacity, how much does a 
container hold? So, we often measure volume as the number of units it takes 
to “fill the object”. Figure 7.5 shows a container and a rock. The space that 
the container surrounds (and is occupied by air) and the space that the rock 
takes up (and is occupied by elements such as oxygen, silicon and 
aluminium) are both called volume.
126  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Volume Volume 
Container Rock 
Figure 7.5: Two meanings of volume 
The concept of volume is tricky. Two objects (like the container and the rock) 
might occupy the same volume but might contain totally different amounts of 
matter. Children often confuse the amount of matter, which we call mass, with the 
space occupied, which we now know is volume. Thus children tell us that a 
“heavy” object has more volume than a “light” object even though the latter may 
actually occupy more space. Indeed, volume is so oversimplified in primary 
schools that many Year 6 pupils think of volume as length width height, no 
matter what the shape of the object. Others assume that volume is length cubed. 
Misconceptions such as these are a result of a curriculum that emphasises 
memorisation of formulas without giving attention to the conceptual foundations 
of volume. 
7.1.4 Units of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 
Now, let us look at how to teach children units of length, mass and volume of 
liquid. If children are simply told to measure length in a unit like an inch, they 
develop very little understanding of the basic concept of measurement. Children 
need the opportunity to understand these basic concepts of measurement. These 
basic concepts of measurements include: 
(a) Appropriate units 
Use units of measurement appropriate to the thing being measured. Units 
that work for measuring the length of your car porch may not work for 
measuring the length of your notebook. Units used to measure the mass of a 
book may not work for measuring the mass of a bus. Similarly, units used to 
measure the volume of liquid medicine consumed by a sick child may not 
serve well for measuring the volume of water in a swimming pool.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  127 
(b) Non-standard units of measurement 
Non-standard unit for measurement is any arbitrary measure used as a unit. 
Some common examples are: 
(i) Length – body parts such as span, foot, pace and arm length, paper 
clips; 
(ii) Mass – objects such as beans, thumb tacks and rubber seeds; 
(iii) Volume of liquids – containers such as cups, mugs, bottles and 
tumblers. 
(c) Standard Units of measurement 
A standard unit for measurement is any fixed measure that has been 
accepted as a standard internationally. Some examples include: 
(i) Yards, miles, feet, inches, metres and kilometres; 
(ii) Ounces, pounds, grams and kilograms; and 
(iii) Pints, gallons, litres and cubic metres. 
Units such as the yard, mile, inch, ounce, pound, pint and gallon are known 
as Imperial units, whereas the metre, kilometre, gram, kilogram, litre and 
cubic metre are known as Metric units. However, in the Malaysian school 
curriculum, only metric units are taught. 
SELF-CHECK 7.1 
1. Describe briefly the four basic principles of measurement. 
2. Explain the difference between discrete quantities and 
continuous quantities. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
MEASUREMENT IN YEAR 5 AND YEAR 6 
7.2 
Pupils will learn this topic of measurement effectively if we plan the lessons 
systematically. A well organised conceptual development of length, mass and 
volume of liquid is essential for our pupils to understand these concepts . It would 
be advisable to introduce this topic in a less stressful manner. Remember to 
provide opportunities for pupils to understand the meanings of length, mass and 
volume of liquid and their respective units. Physical materials and other 
representations should be used to help children develop their understanding of 
these concepts.
128  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of 
measurement in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: 
(a) Measuring Length 
(i) Convert units of length metres to kilometres and vice versa; 
(ii) Add and subtract units of length involving metres and kilometres; 
(iii) Multiply and divide units of length involving metres and kilometres; 
and 
(iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of 
length. 
(b) Comparing Mass 
(i) Convert units of mass from fractions and decimals of kilogram to 
grams and vice versa; 
(ii) Add and subtract units of mass involving grams and kilograms; 
(iii) Multiply and divide units of mass involving grams and kilograms; and 
(iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of mass. 
(c) Comparing Volume of Liquids 
(i) Convert units of volume involving fractions and decimals of litres to 
millilitres and vice versa; 
(ii) Add and subtract units of volume involving millilitres and litres; 
(iii) Multiply and divide units of volume involving millilitres and litres; 
and 
(iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of 
volume of liquids. 
Next, we move on to the teaching and learning activities on length, mass and 
volume of a liquids. Let us consider Activity 7.3 first.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  129 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
7.3 
7.3.1 Length 
ACTIVITY 7.3 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert metre to kilometre and vice versa; and 
 To convert units of length from fractions and decimals of 
kilometres to metres and vice versa. 
Materials: 
 Task Cards; and 
 Answer Sheets. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils and give each pupil an 
Answer Sheet. 
2. Ask pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 
3. Ask them to shuffle Six Task Cards and place them face down in 
a stack at the centre. 
4. Ask each player to begin by drawing a card from the stack. 
5. Ask the players to write all the answers to the questions in the 
card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 
6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
pupils in the group exchange the card with the pupil on their left 
in clockwise direction. 
7. Ask the pupils to repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the pupils in the 
group have answered questions in all the cards. 
8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct 
answers. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of length.
130  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of an Answer Sheet: 
Name :________________________ Class :______________________ 
Card A Card B Card C 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
Card D Card E Card E 
1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 
2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 
3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 
Example of a Task Card: 
Task Card A 
1. Convert metres to kilometres. 
8492 m = _______________ km 
2. Convert kilometres to metres. 
7,125 km = ______________ m 
3. Calculate the fraction of length. 
2 of 27 km = ___________ m 
9 
ACTIVITY 7.4 
Work with a friend in class to prepare five more Task Cards. 
There should be three questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
7.3.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  131 
7.3.2 Basic Operations on Length 
ACTIVITY 7.5 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To add units of length in metres and kilometres; 
 To subtract units of length in metres and kilometres; 
 To multiply units of length in metres and kilometres; and 
 To divide units of length in metres and kilometres. 
Materials: 
 30 different Flash Cards; and 
 Clean writing papers. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a 
clean writing paper. 
2. Ask the pupils to write their names on the clean paper given. 
3. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the 
centre. 
4. Asks Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack. He shows 
the card to Player B. 
5. Asks Player B to do the calculations and read out the answers 
within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 
6. Asks Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each 
correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points for 
each Flash Card). 
7. Ask the Players to repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards are drawn by 
Player A. 
8. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the 
opportunity to read and complete the questions on all 10 Flash 
Cards shown to them. 
9. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the most number of 
points. 
10. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic operations on length .
132  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of a Flash Card: 
Flash Card 1 
1. Add the following: 
1.8 km + 870 m = ________ km 
2. Subtract the following: 
4.82 km – 1 293 m = ________ m 
3. Multiply the following: 
2.34 km  4 = _______ m 
4. Divide the following: 
4 992  8 = _________ km 
ACTIVITY 7.6 
Work with three friends of yours in class to prepare another 29 Flash 
Cards. 
There should be four questions in each Flash Card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.5.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  133 
7.3.3 Mass 
ACTIVITY 7.7 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert units of mass from fractions and decimals of a kilogram 
to grams and vice versa; 
 To add and subtract units of mass in grams and kilograms: and 
 To multiply and divide units of mass in grams and kilograms. 
Materials: 
 Task Sheets; 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils and give each 
group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom and places a 
Task Sheet at each station. 
3. The teacher instructs pupils to solve the questions in the Task 
Sheet at each station. 
4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the 
next station in the clockwise direction. 
6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct 
answers) is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of mass and how 
to do basic operations on mass. 
ACTIVITY 1
134  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of a Task Sheet: 
STATION 1 
1. Convert the following to gram: 
(a) 
2 kg = _______ g 
5 
(b) 0.64 kg = ______ g 
2. Convert the following to kilogram: 
(a) 250 g = ________ kg 
(b) 8 015 g = ________ kg 
3. Add and subtract the following: 
(a) 7.27 kg + 1 025 g = _________ kg 
(b) 0.137 kg – 55 g = ___________ g 
4. Multiply and divide the following: 
(a) 6.32 g  100 = ________ kg 
(b) 654  100 = _________ g 
ACTIVITY 7.8 
Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets 
for the other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. 
Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 7.7.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  135 
7.3.4 Problem Solving Involving Mass 
ACTIVITY 7.9 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To solve problems involving conversion of units of mass in 
fractions and decimals; and 
 To solve problems involving computation of mass. 
Materials: 
 Activity Cards; 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a 
different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. Shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a 
stack at the centre. 
3. Signal to the pupils to begin solving the questions in the first 
Activity Card drawn. 
4. Once they are done with the first Card, they may continue with 
the next Activity Card. 
5. Ask the groups to stop and hand their answer paper to the teacher 
at the end of 10 minutes. 
6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real 
contexts involving computation of mass. 
ACTIVITY 1
136  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of an Activity Card: 
Activity Card 1 
1. The combined mass of a watermelon and a comb of bananas is 
4.8 kg. If the mass of the watermelon is 2.2 kg, what is the mass 
of the bananas? 
The mass of the banana is _____________ kg. 
2. The mass of a book is 430 g. Find the total mass of 7 similar 
books in kg. 
The mass of the books is _________ kg. 
3. En. Mahmud filled 8.4 kg of prawns into 4 containers. What is 
the mass of prawns (in grams) in each container ? 
The mass of prawns in each container is _________ g. 
4. Box A weighs 5 kg. The mass of Box B is 
2 1 times the mass 
5 
of Box A. Find the mass, in kg, of Box B. 
The mass of Box B is ___________ kg. 
ACTIVITY 7.10 
Prepare 11 more Activity Cards for the group. There should be four 
questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.9
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  137 
7.3.5 Volume of Liquids 
ACTIVITY 7.11 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To convert units of volume involving fractions and decimals of 
litres to millilitres and vice versa; 
 To add and subtract units of volume in litres and millilitres; and 
 To multiply and divide units of volume in litres and millilitres. 
Materials: 
 Exercise Sheets; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of two pupils and give each group a 
different colour pencil. 
2. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with four questions. 
3. Instruct them to answer the questions in the Exercise Sheet. 
3. The group that finishes first with all correct answers is the winner. 
4. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of volume of 
liquids and how to do basic operations on volume of liquids.
138  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of an Exercise Sheet: 
Exercise Sheet A 
1. Convert the following to millilitres: 
(a) 
1 litres = ______ millilitres. 
4 
(b) 
3 litres = ______ millilitres. 
5 
2. Convert the following to litres: 
(a) 1 008 millilitres = ________ litres. 
(b) 555 millilitres = ________ litres. 
3. Add and subtract the following: 
(a) 5.723 litres (b) 17.536 litres 
+ 2.758 litres - 9.043 litres 
4. Multiply and divide the following: 
(a) 7.424 litres (b) 3 49.623 millilitres 
 5 
ACTIVITY 7.12 
Prepare 10 more Exercise Sheets for the group activity. There should 
be four questions in each card. 
Make sure your Exercise Sheets are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 7.11.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  139 
7.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Volume of Liquids 
ACTIVITY 7.13 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To solve problems involving conversion of units of volume in 
fractions and decimals; and 
 To solve problems involving computation of volume of liquids. 
Materials: 
 Volume Worksheets; 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into ten groups and give each group a Volume 
Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 
2. The teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the 
Volume Worksheet. 
3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 
4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the 
teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Volume Worksheets. 
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. 
6. Once all the 10 Volume Worksheets have been answered, teacher 
collects the answer papers and corrects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real 
contexts involving computation of units of volume of liquids.
140  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Example of a Volume Worksheet: 
VOLUME WORKSHEET 1 
1 A container has a capacity of 2.75 litres. How many millilitres of 
water does Mary need to fill up the container? 
Mary needs ________ of water to fill up the container. 
2. Mrs. Chong needs 25.35 litres of water to clean the floor every 
day. How much water does she need in a week? 
She needs ________ of water in a week. 
3. Miss Siew bought 4.25 litres of soy sauce. She used the soy 
sauce to cook food in her restaurant and has 745 millilitres of soy 
sauce left. Find the volume of soy sauce that she used. 
She used __________ of soy sauce. 
4. Ahmad has a bottle of orange juice. He pours the juice equally 
into 20 glasses. Each glass contains 50 millilitres of juice. What 
is the volume of orange juice, in millilitres, contained in the 
bottle? 
The bottle contains ________ millilitres of orange juice. 
ACTIVITY 7.14 
Prepare nine more Volume Worksheets for the group. There should 
be four questions in each worksheet. 
Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 7.13.
TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  141 
 Including measurements in KBSR mathematics is important because it has 
many practical applications in real life situations. 
 Ancient measurement of length was based on the human body. 
 The four basic principles underlying the measurement of length, mass and 
volume of liquids are comparison principle, transitivity principle, conservation 
principle and measuring principle. 
 Measuring quantities are continuous quantities whereas counting quantities are 
discrete quantities. 
 The length of an object refers to the number of standard units (e.g. 
centimetres) which can be laid in a straight line along or beside the object. In 
other words, length is the distance between any two points (locations) 
measured along a straight line. 
 The concept of mass can be described as the general heaviness of an object. 
Scientifically, the terms weight and mass have different meanings. Mass is the 
measure of the amount of matter in an object whereas weight is the 
gravitational force acting on that mass. 
 Volume is literally the amount of space filled by an object. But on a practical 
level, we often want to know about capacity, how much does a container 
hold? So, we often measure volume as the number of units it takes to fill the 
object. 
 These basic concepts of measurements include appropriate units, non-standard 
units of measurements and standard units of measurement. 
 Units such as the yard, mile, inch, ounce, pound, pint and gallon are known as 
Imperial units, whereas the metre, kilometre, gram, kilogram, litre and cubic 
metre are known as Metric units.
142  TOPIC 7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 
Addition 
Capacity 
Continuous quantities 
Discrete quantities 
Division 
Imperial units 
Litre 
Mass 
Metric units 
Multiplication 
Subtraction 
Weight 
Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling 
Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. 
Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan 
pembelajaran matematik: Ukuran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan 
Pustaka. 
Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR year 
5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri Intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 
6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson 
Education Asia. 
Peter, C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann 
Educational Publishers. 
Sunny Yee & Ng, K. H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics Year 
2. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication. 
Sunny Yee & Lau, P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics Year 
3. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
Topic 
8 
 Shape and 
Space 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the importance of developing the basics of measurements as 
preskills to the learning of perimeter and area; 
2. Show how to use the vocabulary related to perimeter, area and 
volume of solids correctly; 
3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to perimeter, area and volume of solids; and 
4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for perimeter, area and 
volume of solids. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Children typically enjoy learning the topics in geometry because they can relate 
what they learn to what they explore in the real world. Learning about geometric 
properties and shapes helps them to make sense of their environment as they 
become more capable of describing their world. As a result, they find the subject 
interesting and therefore, are motivated to learn it.
144  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
ACTIVITY 8.1 
“Geometry offers pupils an aspect of mathematical thinking that is 
different from, but connected to, the world of numbers ... Some pupils’ 
capabilities with geometric and spatial concepts exceed their numerical 
skills. Building on these strengths foster enthusiasm for mathematics 
and provides a context in which to develop number and other 
mathematical concepts.” (NCTM, 2000, p.97). 
Discuss the truth of this statement in our Malaysian context. 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
8.1 
Two Dutch teachers, Dina and Pierre van Hiele, have developed the van Hiele 
model for children to learn geometry. The van Hieles were concerned about the 
difficulties their pupils were having with geometry (Geddes & Fortunato, 1993). 
They conducted research aimed at understanding children’s level of geometric 
thinking to determine the kinds of instructions that could best help children learn 
geometry. A brief description of their work can be found in the OUM module, 
“HBMT2103 Teaching of Mathematics for Year Two Primary School”. 
Thus, it is important for teachers to assess the thinking of the children in their 
classes based on the van Hiele levels and use this information to plan instruction 
on shape and space that is suitable and relevant to the children’s level of thinking. 
ACTIVITY 8.2 
Examine the chapter on Shape and Space in a textbook and 
describe it in relation to the van Hiele levels. 
8.1.1 Geometric Formulas 
Formulas for area, perimeter, volume and surface area are introduced in Year 5 and 6. 
While formulas are necessary and useful tools for measuring, they should not take the 
place of careful development of the attributes and the measuring process. 
One skill that needs to be developed in children learning about perimeter and area 
is that of making the correct choice of formula when calculating perimeter and 
area. Equally important is that children need to see how the formulas are derived. 
This is to enable children to build understanding of the meaning of the perimeter 
and area formulas.
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  145 
8.1.2 Perimeter and Area 
Let us now discuss how to teach perimeter and area. 
(a) Perimeter 
The perimeter of a shape is the distance all the way round its edges. 
Perimeter is measured using the same unit as in the measurement of length 
such as centimetres, feet or metres. The measurements needed to calculate 
perimeter depends on the shape. For a rectangle you will need to know the 
length and width of the shape. (It is usual to call the longest side the length 
and the shortest the width or breadth.) 
Example: 
The diagram below represents a pen for Badrul's goats. How much netting 
does he need to go round the plot? All measurements are in metres. 
Tell the pupils that in a rectangle the opposite sides are equal, so to work out 
the perimeter of Badrul’s pen, you just need to know the length and width. 
Here the length is 5 m and the width is 4 m. 
Method 1 
Length = 5 m and width = 4 m 
Perimeter = 5 + 4 + 5 + 4 = 18 m 
Method 2 
Because opposite sides are equal you can also work out the perimeter in this 
way: double the length, double the width, then add the results together. 
(5 x 2) + (4 x 2) = 10 + 8 = 18 m 
Method 3 
Add the length and width then double it. 
5 + 4 = 9 m 
9 m x 2 = 18 m
146  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
All three methods will give you the same answer. From the above example we 
can show children how the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle is derived. 
(b) Area 
The area of a shape is the amount of surface enclosed in a plane. We do not 
actually measure area by measuring the length. In most cases, we measure 
some combination of lengths and use them in a formula to calculate the area. 
As such, the teaching and learning of area consist of two parts. The first part 
consists of developing the concepts of area and unit of area. The second part 
consists of the development of the area formulas. 
The concept of area should be developed first by making gross comparisons 
of areas of different shapes. Comparisons of area are more complex than 
comparisons of length. When comparing areas, we must take into account 
length, width, and shape. 
When the following shapes are compared, children may have problems 
deciding which has a bigger area because one shape is longer and the other 
is wider. Hence, this forces the child to think beyond one dimension. 
A 
B 
One way to check the comparison is to cut shape A into two parts and 
rearrange them on top of shape B. Then it can be easily seen that B has a 
bigger area than A. 
A 
B 
The unit of measurement for areas is called square units. If you use metres to 
make your measurement, the area will be measured in square metres (m²). If 
centimetres are used, the area will be in square centimetres (cm²). Children 
need to know that the symbol m2 is read “square meter” and not “meter 
square”.
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  147 
Children can become familiar with square centimetres (cm2) by using 
centimetre graph paper (Horak & Horak, 1982). One task is to find the 
approximate area of their hand by tracing it on a graph paper and counting 
the unit squares. Children can also be asked to count the number of square 
centimetres enclosing specific rectangles and polygons. Let us go through 
the following example in the class. 
Example: 
This square measures 1cm long and 1cm wide. It is 1 square centimetre (cm²). 
A rectangle drawn on the 1 cm² paper below is 3 cm long and 2 cm wide. 
Count the number of 1 cm 
squares. There are 6 squares. 
So the area of the rectangle is 6 
cm². 
8.1.3 Volume 
Volume is a measure of the amount of space inside a three-dimensional region, or 
the amount of space occupied by a three-dimensional object. It is measured in 
cubic units such as cubic centimetres (cm³) or cubic metres (m³). The Imperial 
system uses units such as cubic feet (ft³). One cubic centimetre (cm3) is the 
measure of a cube having an edge with a length of 1 cm. 
To introduce the concept of volume, you might hold up two solid rectangular 
prisms and ask which is “bigger”. The discussion should lead to the question of 
which occupies more space. Two empty shoe boxes, one of which fits within the 
other, can be used for direct comparison of volume. 
You can also show samples of objects made up of units of cubic centimetres (cm3) 
and have the children count the number of unit cubes it contains to determine its 
volume.
148  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
Each of the following diagrams represents a shape made from unit cubes. 
SELF-CHECK 8.1 
1. Why is the comparison of area more complex than comparison of 
different length? 
2. Explain how you would introduce the concept of volume and its 
unit of measurement. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
SHAPES 
8.2 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of 
shapes are as follows: 
(a) Measure the perimeter of the following composite 2-D shapes: 
(i) Square and square 
(ii) Rectangle and rectangle 
(iii) Triangle and triangle 
(iv) Square and rectangle 
(v) Square and triangle 
(vi) Rectangle and triangle 
(b) Calculate the perimeter of the following composite 2-D shapes: 
(i) Square and square 
(ii) Rectangle and rectangle 
(iii) Triangle and triangle 
(iv) Square and rectangle 
(v) Square and triangle
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  149 
(vi) Rectangle and triangle 
(c) Solve problems involving perimeters of composite 2-D shapes. 
(d) Measure the area of the following composite 2-D shapes: 
(i) Square and square 
(ii) Rectangle and rectangle 
(iii) Square and rectangle 
(e) Calculate the area of the following composite 2-D shapes: 
(i) Square and square 
(ii) Rectangle and rectangle 
(iii) Square and rectangle 
(f) Solve problems involving areas of composite 2-D shapes. 
(g) Measure the volume of the following composite 3-D shapes: 
(i) A cube and another cube 
(ii) A cuboid and another cuboid 
(iii) A cube and a cuboid 
(h) Calculate the volume of the following composite 3-D shapes: 
(i) A cube and another cube 
(ii) A cuboid and another cuboid 
(iii) A cube and a cuboid 
(i) Solve problems involving volume of composite 3-D shapes. 
(j) Find the perimeter of a 2-D composite shape of two or more quadrilaterals 
and triangles. 
(k) Find the area of a 2-D composite shape of two or more quadrilaterals and 
triangles. 
(l) Solve problems in real contexts involving calculation of perimeter and area 
of 2-D shapes.
150  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
(m) Find the surface area of a 3-D composite shape of two or more cubes and 
cuboids. 
(n) Find the volume of a 3-D composite shape of two or more cubes and 
cuboids. 
(o) Solve problems in real contexts involving calculations of surface areas and 
volumes of 3-D shapes 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
8.3 
In this section, we demonstrate to you some teaching and learning activities that 
can be used in the classroom to teach the topic Space and Shape. 
8.3.1 Finding the Perimeter 
ACTIVITY 8.3 
Learning Outcome: 
 To develop the concept of perimeter. 
Materials: 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 A variety of large regular and irregular shapes taped on the floor of 
the classroom. 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some clean writing paper. 
3. Tape a variety of large regular and irregular shapes on the floor 
of the classroom.
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  151 
4. Instruct the pupils in their team walk around the edge of each of the 
shapes on the floor. 
5. Ask pupils to keep a record of the number of steps they take as they walk 
along each of the edges of the shape. 
6. Have pupils post their “walk around” numbers for each of the shapes 
using each of the sides as an addend, for example 6 + 6 + 6 steps for an 
equilateral triangle. 
7. Ask the pupils to look for patterns in the measurement of each side, for 
example all of the sides of a square are of the same length and that a 
rectangle has two long sides and two short sides. 
8. Ask pupils to write a sentence using words instead of numbers for the 
perimeter of each figure. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson and introduces the concept that perimeter 
is the measure of the distance around a closed figure.
152  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
ACTIVITY 8.4 
Learning Outcome: 
 To reinforce the concept of perimeter. 
Materials: 
 Graph paper (cm square); and 
 Strings, ruler, pins. 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some graph papers, strings, ruler and pins. 
3. Cut a string 14 cm long and ask the children 
“How many different rectangles can you make with a perimeter of 
14 cm?” 
4. Using the graph paper, string and pins, demonstrate to the class 
how you can make a rectangle with a perimeter of 14 cm. Remind 
the children to keep the sides (in cm) a whole number. 
5. Ask the children to explore other rectangles with a perimeter of 14 
cm. 
P = 14 
6. Repeat steps (3) through (5) for rectangles with a perimeter of 20 
cm. What about rectangles with a perimeter of 13 cm? 
7. The teacher summarises the lesson on finding perimeter.
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  153 
ACTIVITY 8.5 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise finding perimeters. 
Materials: 
 Squares of sides 2 cm; and 
 Clean writing papers. 
Procedures: 
1. Dive the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some squares and some clean writing paper. 
3. Take four squares of sides 2 cm. Ask the children, 
“How many figures can you make by putting the squares side by 
side?” 
Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 are some possible examples. 
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 
4. Allow the children to explore and draw as many figures as 
possible. 
5. For each of the figures drawn, ask the children to calculate its 
perimeter. 
Example: 
Perimeter of Figure 1 = 20 cm 
Perimeter of Figure 2 = 22 cm 
Perimeter of Figure 3 = 24 cm 
6. Repeat steps (3) through (5) for five, six and eight squares. 
7. The teacher summarises the lesson on finding perimeter.
154  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
8.3.2 Finding Area 
ACTIVITY 8.6 
Learning Outcome: 
 To develop the concept of area of a rectangle. 
Materials: 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Rectangular cards. 
Procedures: 
1. Display a rectangle (15 cm by 6 cm). 
2. Ask a pupil to come forward to measure the length and the width 
of the rectangle. Label the rectangle. 
6 cm 
15 cm 
3. Ask another pupil to seperate the rectangle into 1 cm squares, as 
shown below: 
15 cm
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  155 
4. Have another pupil count the number of squares in the rectangle. 
5. Discuss with the pupils that each of the square is 1 cm2. Since a total of 
90 squares were used to cover the rectangle, the area of the rectangle is 
90 cm2. 
6. Point out to the pupils that the length is the same as the number of 
squares in one row, and the width is the same as the number of rows of 
squares. 
7. So, instead of counting the number of squares, the area of the rectangle 
can be found by multiplying the length and the width (or breath) of the 
rectangle. 
The area of a rectangle = Length x Width 
8. Ask the pupils to work on more examples of calculating area of 
rectangles.
156  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
ACTIVITY 8.7 
Learning Outcome: 
 To reinforce the concept of area. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards, some showing a rectangle with its sides labeled and 
the others showing the product of the two sides. 
Example: 
12 cm 
32 cm 
Area = 12 x 32 cm2 
1.6 m 
0.8 m 
Area = 1.6 x 0.8 m2 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare cards, some showing a rectangle with its sides labeled and 
others showing the product of the two sides. 
2. Hand a card to each child. 
3. Have the children holding the card with the rectangle calculate its 
area. 
4. Have the children find their partners holding the card showing the 
calculation of its area. 
5. If there is an odd number of children, you should take a card and 
participate so that everyone has a partner. 
6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see each 
other’s card. Have the children check everyone’s calculation of the 
area. Are the partners correctly paired? 
7. Hand out a Task Sheet and have the children work out the area of 
the rectangles.
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  157 
8.3.3 Finding Volume 
ACTIVITY 8.8 
Learning Outcome: 
 To introduce the concept of volume. 
Materials: 
 A variety of boxes of different sizes and shapes. 
Procedures: 
1. Choose two boxes from the collection of boxes of different sizes and 
shapes. 
2. Ask the pupils which will hold the most. 
3. Repeat this process with several pairs of boxes. If the pupils are 
unable to decide which of the pair of boxes is bigger, set the pair of 
boxes aside. 
4. Pick out one of the pairs of boxes for which the pupils were unable 
to identify the bigger box. 
5. Conduct a brainstorming session, asking pupils to think of ways to 
decide which box is bigger. Remind them that the bigger box is the 
one that would hold more. 
6. Write every suggestion on the chalkboard, regardless of how 
reasonable or how practical it is. Then ask the pupils to decide which 
methods are most reasonable. 
7. Then, try some of the suggested methods to see if it works to 
determine the bigger box.
158  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
ACTIVITY 8.9 
Learning Outcome: 
 To introduce the formula for calculating the volume of a cuboid. 
Materials: 
 Boxes of fixed volume; and 
 Unit cm3 cubes. 
Procedures: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four. 
2. Give each group some unit cm3 cubes and a box (cuboid) of fixed 
volume. 
Example: A small box measuring 15 cm by 5 cm by 2 cm. 
3. Have each group fill their cuboid with cubes to see how many unit 
cm3 cubes are needed. The number of cubes needed to fill the 
cuboid is the volume of the cuboid. 
4. Conduct a brainstorming session, asking pupils to think of ways to 
calculate the volume of a cuboid instead of counting the cubes 
needed to fill the cuboid. 
5. Write every suggestion on the chalkboard, regardless of how 
reasonable or how practical it is. Then ask the pupils to decide 
which method is the most reasonable. 
6. Using the following example, the teacher leads the pupil to derive 
the formula for calculating the volume of a cube and cuboid. 
Example 
Each of these two cuboids has the same volume, 8 cm³, and the 
same dimensions: length 4 cm, width 2 cm, height 1 cm. 
The volume of the first can be found by counting the unit cubes. 
The volume of the second is found using the rule: 
Volume of a cuboid = length x width x height
TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE  159 
The dimensions of a cube are all the same, so the rule for finding the 
volume is: 
Volume of a cube = length x length x length = length³ 
Hand out a Task Sheet and have the pupils work out the volume of 
cubes and cuboids. 
SELF-CHECK 8.2 
1. Design a teaching activity to introduce the standard measurement of 
area. 
2. Write a lesson plan to introduce the formula for calculating the 
perimeter of a rectangle. 
 It is important for teachers to assess the geometrical thinking of the children in 
their classroom based on Dina and Pierre van Hiele’s levels of thinking. This 
information can then be used to plan instruction on shape and space that is 
suitable and relevant to the children’s level of thinking. 
 While formulae are necessary and useful tools for calculating perimeter and 
area, they should not take the place of careful development of these attributes 
and the activities and processes that lead to the development of the formulas. 
 The area of a shape is the amount of surface enclosed in a plane. We do not 
actually measure area as in measuring length. In most cases, we measure some 
combination of lengths and use them in a formula to calculate the area. 
 The teaching and learning of area consist of two parts. The first part consists 
of developing the concepts of area and unit of area. The second part consists 
of the development of the area formulas. 
 To introduce the concept of volume, hold up two solid rectangular prisms and 
ask which is “bigger”. The discussion should lead to the question of which 
occupies more space.
160  TOPIC 8 SHAPE AND SPACE 
Area 
Perimeter 
Quadrilaterals 
Triangles 
Volume 
Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for 
the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. 
Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. 
US: Allyn & Wadsworth. 
Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: 
Heath and Company. 
Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. 
Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. 
Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and 
middle schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Topic 
9 
Averages 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain that average is a measure of central tendency and it 
describes what is “typical” of a set of data; 
2. Use the vocabulary related to averages correctly; 
3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to averages; and 
4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for averages. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Data are all around us. Indeed, sometimes there is so much data that children can 
become overwhelmed. Beside examining a set of data by looking at graphs and 
tables, it is often convenient to describe a set of data by choosing a single number 
that indicates where the data in the set are centred or concentrated. 
The number most commonly used to characterise a set of data is the arithmetic 
mean, frequently called the average. 
ACTIVITY 9.1 
Examine the following set of data for three teachers. All of them claim 
that his or her class scored better than the other two classes. 
Cikgu Ahmad: 40, 62, 85, 99, 99 
Miss Lee: 20, 84, 85, 98, 98 
Mr Sivanesan: 59, 59, 78, 89, 100 
Are these teachers correct in their assertions? Discuss it.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
162 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
9.1 
The average value is a number that is typical for a set of data. The average is like 
the middle point of a set of numbers. Finding the average helps you do 
calculations and also makes it possible to compare sets of numbers. 
Figure 9.1: Weekly shopping 
For example, you might spend between RM20 and RM90 a week on shopping 
(refer to Figure 9.1). Finding the average amount you have spent per week will 
help you plan your month's spending. The average weekly expenditure gives you 
an idea of whether you are spending more or less than you plan to. 
ACTIVITY 9.2 
Calculating the mean temperature. 
Choose your town and select a full five day weather 
forecast. Use the data to calculate the mean 
temperature. 
Now, we move on to learn on how to conduct teaching of averages. 
9.1.1 Teaching Averages 
A good introduction might be to have pupils engage in a discussion about “being 
average” (Paull, 1990). What does it mean to be “an average pupil”? Is being 
average something good or bad?
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  163 
An understanding of average can be developed through using concrete materials 
and visual manipulation (Rubenstein, 1989). For example, using interlocking 
cubes, ask pupils to build two towers. 
Figure 9.2: Interlocking cubes 
Build a tower with seven cubes and another with five cubes (see Figure 9.2). They 
can now discuss what they would have to do to make both towers the same height, 
using only the cubes they have used to construct the towers. As a teacher, you 
advise the pupils, to make both towers the same height, they have to find the total 
number of interlocking cubes used in building both towers. Next, the pupils will 
have to divide the total number of cubes by two. By doing the calculation, the 
pupils will understand the concept of average and also the method of calculating 
averages. 
After several examples with two towers of interlocking cubes, pupils can then use 
the same strategy in determining the average heights of three or four towers. 
As an extension to the above activity, pupils can attempt to apply the process and 
discuss a situation in which the cubes cannot be equally shared. Allow the pupils 
to use their own language in their discussion, but the end result should be an 
understanding that the average is simply one number that describes or 
characterizes all the numbers in the data set. 
Once the pupils understand the concept, provide them with more activities that 
reinforces their understanding of averages. 
9.1.2 Measures of Central Tendency 
Measures of central tendency describe what is “typical” in a set of data. There are 
three types or measures of central tendency. They are the arithmetical average 
(mean), mode and median.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
164 
(a) The Average 
This section illustrates how to teach your pupils the average. Do you know 
what is the arithmetical average? The arithmetical average is the most 
commonly used measure of central tendency. It is calculated by dividing the 
sum of a set of numbers by the number of numbers in the set. 
When people talk about the average of something, like average price, 
average wage or average height, they are usually talking about the mean 
value. 
The mean value of the weekly spending shown in the graph as indicated in 
Figure 9.1 is RM46. 
The calculation is as follows: 
Mean spending = RM20 + RM40 + RM30 + RM90 + RM50 
---------------------------------------------------- 
5 
= RM230 
--------- 
5 
= RM46 
Can you see that the value is located about the middle of the five different 
amounts shown? 
The average can be useful for comparing things. For example you can find 
the average height for the pupils in your class. When you compare the 
averages of two classes you are comparing the average height of the pupils 
in the two classes. 
Sometimes averages may give a false impression of the figures. In that case 
the average is said to be distorted. 
Example: The mean annual salary earned in a pharmaceutical store is 
RM42,200. You might like the idea of working for the store! 
But let us look at the figures: 
Employee 1 earns RM8,000 per annum 
Employee 2 earns RM11,000 per annum 
Employee 3 earns RM9,000 per annum
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  165 
Employee 4 earns RM 8,000 per annum 
The Manager of the store earns RM175,000 per annum 
Because the Manager earns a lot more than the employees, his/her salary 
raises the mean salary. Let us do the calculation: 
The total of the wages : 
RM8,000 + RM11,000 + RM9,000 + RM8,000 + RM175,000 = 
RM211,000 
Then divide the total amount by 5, the number of people: 
RM211,000 ÷ 5 = RM42,200 
The average salary is RM42,200. But most of the staff earn a lot less than 
this. Most employees earn less than the mean salary. For this reason we say 
that the mean is distorted. 
(b) The Mode 
A second measure of central tendency is the mode. The concept of the mode, 
but not the term, is introduced informally in a child’s early school 
experience. When a child makes statements like: 
“April has the most number of public holidays.” 
“Most members of the class like white coffee.” 
“Blue seems to be their favourite colour.” 
The mode is the name of another type of average. The mode is the most 
common item in a set of data. It is the number or thing that appears most 
often. Sometimes one or two values in a data set can distort the “typical” 
value described by the average as in the example mentioned above. In this 
case, the mode is the preferred measure of central tendency. 
Example: The mode for the annual salary for the staff of the pharmaceutical 
store is RM8,000. That is because two out of five of the employees earn 
RM8,000 per annum. 
(c) The Median 
Another measure of the central tendency is the median. The median is the 
middle number in a set of numbers recorded in ascending manner. It is the 
mid-point when the numbers are written out in order. 
The concept of the median can be easily modelled. In the example above, 
arrange the salary in ascending order: 
First put the numbers in order. This makes it easier to find the median.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
166 
RM8,000; RM8,000; RM9,000; RM11,000; RM175,000 
You can now see that RM9,000 is the middle number. It is half way along 
the list. So the median of this set of data is RM9,000. 
The mean is RM42,200. This is misleading as it is much higher than most of 
the employees’ salaries. 
The median value is the middle one in the list. The median salary is 
RM9,000. This is a good indication of the general level of the staff salaries. 
SELF-CHECK 9.1 
1. Explain the meaning of average. 
2. Using an example, explain why average may not be a good 
measure of central tendency. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
AVERAGES 
9.2 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic on 
averages are as follows: 
(a) Describe the meaning of average. 
(b) State the average of two or three quantities. 
(c) Determine the formula for average. 
(d) Calculate the average using a formula. 
(e) Calculate the average of up to five numbers. 
(f) Solve problems in real life situations involving average.
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  167 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
9.3 
This section highlights the teaching and learning activities for you to conduct a 
lesson on the topic of average in the classroom. 
9.3.1 Meaning of Average 
ACTIVITIY 9.3 
Learning Outcome: 
 To describe the meaning of average. 
Materials: 
 Interlocking blocks 
Procedures: 
1. In a place visible to all pupils, and using 15 interlocking blocks 
arrange five stacks of blocks as illustrated below. 
2. Discuss with the children the number of blocks in each stack. 
3. Demonstrate the meaning of average by having a pupil remove 
enough blocks from the tallest stack to put atop the shortest stack 
so that both stacks match the middle stack. 
4. Have another pupil do the same with the second and fourth stacks.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
168 
5. Ask the children, 
“Are all the five stacks of the same height?” [Yes] 
“How many blocks are there in each stack?”[3] 
“Does each stack have the same number of blocks?”[Yes] 
6. The teacher explains by saying, 
Each stack has three blocks; three is the average of the set of blocks. 
7. Repeat step (1) through (6) using different number of stacks and 
different number of blocks in each stack. 
ACTIVITY 9.4 
Learning Outcome: 
 To investigate the addition-division process for determining average. 
Materials: 
 Task Sheet; and 
 Interlocking blocks. 
Procedures: 
1. Using 15 interlocking blocks arrange five stacks of blocks as 
illustrated below (as in Activity 1). 
2. Have the children demonstrate the meaning of average by having a 
pupil remove enough blocks from the tallest stack to put atop the 
shortest stack so that both stacks match the middle stack.
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  169 
3. Have another student do the same with the second and fourth stacks. 
4. The teacher explains the concept of average by saying, 
“In the example, average means having all the highs and low 
stacks evened out until all the stacks are of the same height. 
Each stack has three blocks and three is the average of the set 
of blocks.” 
5. Instruct the children to form groups of four. 
6. Instruct the children to discuss how to determine the average for the 
blocks without shifting blocks from one stack to another. 
7. Using the children’s thinking as the basis for discussion, guide the 
children learn the addition-division process of determining the 
average. 
8. The teacher explains the steps involved in finding average by saying, 
“The average for the blocks is determined by adding 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 
5 = 15; 15 5 = 3.” 
9. Then teacher introduces the formula for finding average: 
10. Give the Task Sheets and ask students to complete it
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
170 
TASK SHEET 
The average is calculated by adding up the item values and dividing it by the number of 
items. 
1. Calculate the average of the following numbers. 
(a) 132, 246 and 174 
(b) 1345, 1080, 1605 
and 1830 
(c) 156, 145, 556, 3352 and 
4488 
(d) 14.3, 9.68, and 8.7 
(e) 20.36, 13.6, 22.44 
and 45.6 
(f) 23.4, 7.4, 46.1, 18.3 and 
5.6 
2. Calculate the average of the following quantities. 
(a) 45 kg, 48 kg, 52 kg, 
and 43 kg 
(b) RM675, RM725, 
RM750, and 
RM775 
(c) 900 mℓ, 950 mℓ, 
1050 mℓ and 
1200 mℓ 
(d) 13.5 m, 6.3 m, 
14 m and 84.1 m 
(e) 19.6 cm3 , 600 cm3 , 
198 cm3 and 
129.8 cm3 
(f) 86.6 ℓ, 43 ℓ, 51.3 ℓ, 
61 ℓ and 44.6 ℓ.
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  171 
9.3.2 Calculating Average 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise calculating averages. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards comprising sets of numbers and answers; and 
Example: 
 Clean writing papers. 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare cards, some with sets of numbers and some with the 
average of the sets of numbers. 
2. Hand a card to each child. 
3. Ask the children who are holding the cards with the sets of 
numbers to calculate the average. 
4. Ask the children to find their partners who are holding the 
calculated averages. 
5. If there is an odd number of children, you should take a card and 
participate so that everyone has a partner. 
6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see each 
other’s cards. Have the children check everyone’s calculation of 
the average. Are the partners correctly paired? 
7. Distribute the Task Sheets and have the children work out the 
answer. 
4.66, 9, 0.12, and 
13.5 
8604, 777, 20, 1639 
and 535 
2315 6.82 
ACTIVITIY 9.5
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
172 
ACTIVITY 9.5 
TASK SHEET 
The average is calculated by adding up the item values and dividing it by 
the number of items. 
1. Calculate the average of the following numbers. 
(a) 79, 105, 211, 
234 and 81 
(b) 100, 2000, 
250,139 and 
1331 
(c) 7511, 1380, 
4, 22, and 28 
2. Solve the following problems. 
(a) The sum of five numbers is 78 140. What is their average? 
(b) The average of four numbers is 265.7. What is the sum of the 
four numbers? 
(c) The average of 55, 219, 7, 77 and X is 134. Find the value of X. 
(d) Pak Hanif bought 4 watermelons. The masses of the watermelons 
were 4.45 kg, 3.2 kg, 5.6 kg and 3.85 kg. What is the average 
mass of the watermelons? 
(e) The KL Monorail transported a total of 23 568 passengers from 
KL Central to Bukit Bintang station over three days. What is the 
average number of passengers transported in a day over the three 
day period?
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  173 
ACTIVITIY 9.6 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise calculating averages. 
Materials: 
 A deck of cards comprising sets of numbers and answers. 
a Example: 
830, 1000 and 
960 
930 
24.3 and 10.7 
17.5 
 Clean writing papers 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare cards, some with sets of numbers and some with the 
average of the sets of numbers. 
2. Place the answer cards (grey cards) in a circle on the floor. 
3. Have the children march around the circle of answer cards on the 
floor, chanting this rhyme: 
Marching, marching, ‘round we go, 
Not too fast and not too slow. 
We won’t run and we won’t hop, 
We’re almost there, it’s time to stop. 
4. When the rhyme is finished, hold up a question card and ask the 
children to find the average of the set of numbers shown on the 
card. 
5. The child who is standing by the answer card with the correct 
calculated average, picks up the answer card and shows it to the 
rest of the children. 
6. Have the children check his or her answer. Is she or he correct? 
7. Repeat the procedure several times or until all the answer cards 
have been picked up.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
174 
ACTIVITY 9.7 
Learning Outcome: 
 To practise calculating averages. 
Materials: 
 Four lists of questions on finding averages. Some of the questions 
may be the same on each list. 
 Answers to the averages. 
Example: 
List 1 
Calculate the average of the following numbers. 
1. 212, 108, 124 and 176 
2. 16, 315, 4, 1986 and 24 
3. 63, 147, 8, 192, and 10 
4. 14.3, 16.76, 9.6 and 8.7 
5. 12.8, 509 and 200.6 
6. 13.02, 3.8, 5.22 and 14 
List 2 
Calculate the average of the following numbers. 
1. 346, 15 and 1307 
2. 16, 315, 4, 1986 and 24 
3. 25, 125, 5, 25, and 225 
4. 15.4, 34.7 and 75.9 
5. 18, 120.9 and 221.1 
6. 13.02, 3.8, 5.22 and 14
TOPIC 9 AVERAGES  175 
Procedures: 
1. Prepare four lists of questions on finding averages. Some of the 
questions may be the same on each list. 
2. Prepare 24 cards, each showing the calculated average for each 
question on each list. Tape these cards to the walls of the classroom. 
3. Divide the children into four teams. 
4. Give one of the lists to each of the team. (You might want to provide a 
copy of the list for every member of the team). 
5. Have the children calculate the averages for the numbers on their list. 
6. Have the team members search for the answer cards taped on the walls 
 A set of data can be described by choosing a single number that indicates 
where the data in the set are centred or concentrated. The number most 
commonly used to characterise a set of data is the arithmetic mean, frequently 
called the average. 
 The understanding of average can be developed through using concrete 
materials and visual manipulation like using the interlocking cubes. 
 Three types or measures of central tendency can be calculated. They are the 
arithmetical average (mean), mode and median. 
Distorted 
Average 
Mean (Average) 
Median 
Mode 
of the classroom. 
7. The first team to correctly calculate the average and collect all the 
answer cards wins.
 TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 
176 
Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for 
the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. 
Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. 
US: Allyn & Wadsworth. 
Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington DC: 
Heath and Company. 
Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. 
Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. 
Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and 
middle Schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
Topic 
10 
 Data 
Handling 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Use vocabulary related to data handling correctly as required by the 
Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 
2. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to data handling; 
3. Use the vocabulary related to data organisation in graphs correctly; 
4. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content 
knowledge related to data organisation in graphs; and 
5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for data handling and data 
organisation in graphs. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Most of the important decision making of modern society is based on statistics, 
graphs and probability. In politics, advertising and economics, samples are 
organised, survey questions developed, answers sought, results tabulated and 
organised and predictions displayed with averages and graphs to show 
distributions, relationships and trends of the data collected before decisions are 
made. What will be the next flavour of cakes manufactured? Where will the land 
for the next supermarket be bought? Data handling has become an important 
aspect of life for many people today. 
Graphs and statistics are indispensable to comprehending the raw data on which 
decision making is based. A mass of data is incomprehensible. Averages supply a 
framework with which to describe what happens. Graphs supply a visual way of 
presenting the range of alternatives available and indicating where the density of
178  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
interest lies. The forms of graph that are commonly used are bar graphs, 
histograms, picture graphs, line graphs and pie charts. 
Statistics within the primary school is predominantly the study of procedures for 
collecting, recording, organising and interpreting data. Data handling is 
introduced in primary schools in the belief that it is crucial for children to begin 
study of the concepts and processes in statistics, graphs and probability as early as 
possible. The difficulty lies in the lack of knowledge of what aspects of data 
handling are suitable for primary children. Many primary school teachers have 
little preparation for teaching data handling and little experience of it being taught 
to them. By reading and applying what is written in this topic, it is expected that 
teachers will be able to: 
(a) Show pupils that statistics and graphs are part of mathematical activities in 
their daily lives; 
(b) Show pupils the connections between statistics and graphs to basic numbers 
and space concepts; and 
(c) Allow pupils to conduct simple statistical investigations and graphical 
presentations. 
ACTIVITY 10.1 
Can you think of reasons why data handling exists in our lives? List 
down the reasons before you could compare them with your partner. 
PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 
10.1 
Important information regarding the content and pedagogical aspects for teaching 
data handling covers the following aspects: 
(a) Statistical measures such as range, mode, median and mean; 
(b) Collecting, recording, organising and interpreting data; 
(c) Statistical procedures on organising data such as tables, charts and diagrams; 
and 
(d) Types of graphs used to visualise data.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  179 
Mean: 60.07 inches 
Median: 62.50 inches 
Range: 42 inches 
Variance: 117.681 
Standard deviation: 10.85 inches 
Minimum: 36 inches 
Maximum: 78 inches 
First quartile: 51.63 inches 
Third quartile: 67.38 inches 
Count: 58 bears 
Sum: 3438.1 inches 
2 
1 
0 
Black Bears 
3 4 5 6 7 8 
Frequency 
Length in Inches 
Figure 10.1: Histogram showing the statistics of Black Bears 
ACTIVITY 10.2 
Figure 10.1 above shows an example of how a histogram can be used to 
visualize data on black bears. List down four other graphical 
representations and show how they differ from one another. 
10.1.1 Statistical Measures 
Computational statistics is a large and complex branch of mathematics with 
significance for the social as well as physical and biological sciences. However, in 
primary schools, pupils will be exposed only to the simplest of descriptive 
statistics. The statistical measures studied in Year 5 and Year 6 are range, mean, 
mode and median. 
(a) Range 
In a list of data, range is the difference between the greatest and the least 
value. Consider the following results (out of 20) in a mathematics test for 
two groups of students (the BLUE and the RED): 
The BLUE scores: 6, 8, 10, 10, 5, 6, 11, 8, 11, 6, 7 
The RED scores: 7, 9, 12, 14, 7, 9, 9, 5, 16, 9, 13
180  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
The range for the BLUE group is 11 – 5 = 6, while the range for the RED 
group is 16 – 5 = 11. 
(b) Mean 
Mean is the average of the scores. To calculate it, the scores are added and 
the result is divided by the number of scores. In the example above, the 
mean for the BLUE group is 
6 + 8 + 10 + 10 + 5 + 6 + 11+ 8 + 11 + 6 + 7 = 88, 88 divided by 11 is 8. 
While the mean for the RED group is 
7 + 9 + 12 + 14 + 7 + 9 + 9 + 5 + 16 + 9 + 13 = 110, 110 divided by 11 is 10. 
(c) Mode 
Mode is the most commonly occurring score. In the example above, the 
mode for the BLUE group is 6, while the mode for the RED group is 9. 
(d) Median 
Median is the middle score when the scores are arranged in ascending order. 
In the above example, there are 11 scores altogether, therefore the median is 
the sixth score when the scores are arranged in ascending order. 
BLUE: 5, 6, 6, 6, 7, 8, 8, 10, 10, 11, 11 
RED: 5, 7, 7, 9, 9, 9, 9, 12, 13, 14, 16 
Hence, the median for the BLUE group is 8 and the median for the RED 
group is 9. 
Note: If there is an even number of scores (say 10), then the median is 
halfway between the half “score” and the next score (example: half way 
between the 5th and the 6th score in ascending order). For example, for scores 
5, 9, 3, 8, 6, 4, 6, 3 
The arrangement of the scores in ascending order is 
3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 8, 9 
And the fourth score is 5 and the fifth score is 6. 
This means that the median is 5 + 6 = 11 divided by 2, and that will be 5.5.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  181 
10.1.2 Collecting, Recording, Organising and 
Interpreting Data 
Data handling can be a valuable aid in decision making. A commonly used format 
to investigate problems (Thompson et al; 1976) is stated in the following 5 steps: 
(a) Recognise and clearly formulate a problem; 
(b) Collect relevant data; 
(c) Organise the data appropriately; 
(d) Analyse and interpret the data; and 
(e) Relate the statistics obtained from the data to the original problem. 
The five step format in using data to make decisions can be illustrated with the 
example adapted from Thompson et al (1976). 
(a) A group of children wished to send a representative to a softball throwing 
contest. Three children volunteered. Each volunteer was asked to make five 
throws which were measured with a trundle wheel to the nearest metre. The 
results were: 
Table 10.1: Result of softball throwing contest 
Volunteers Their 5 throws ( to the nearest metre) 
Shahar 28, 23, 22, 24, 27 
Bala 24, 23, 27, 24, 27 
Tony 23, 27, 29, 18, 26 
(b) To help comprehend these results, the children tallied them into a frequency 
table and graphed them onto bar graphs. They then calculated the mean, 
median and range for each volunteer. The tables and the bar graphs are 
shown below: 
Table 10.2: The frequency 
Distance of 
throw (m) 
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
Shahar 1 1 1 1 1 
Bala 1 2 2 
Tony 1 1 1 1 1
182  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
Bar Graph: Shahar 
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
F 
r 
e 
q 
u 
e 
n 
c 
y 
3 
2 
1 
0 
Length of throw (m) 
Bar Graphs: Bala 
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
F 
r 
e 
q 
u 
e 
n 
c 
y 
3 
2 
1 
0 
Length of throw (m) 
Bar Graphs: Tony 
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
F 
r 
e 
q 
u 
e 
n 
c 
y 
3 
2 
1 
0 
Length of throw (m) 
Figure 10.2: Statistical measures 
Next, the three statistical measures, mean, median an range are calculated and 
tabulated in the table below.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  183 
Table 10.3: Three Statistical Measures 
Mean Median Range 
Shahar 24.8 24 6 
Bala 25.0 24 4 
Tony 24.6 26 11 
Based on the frequency table, bar graphs and the statistical measures 
constructed, ask your students the following questions. 
(c) Who would be the best representative? Why? 
Who is the most consistent? Why? 
Who has the longest throw? 
(d) What should be our criteria for selecting the best representative? 
Who has the best typical throw? 
How do we define typical? 
Is consistency important? 
Should we have measured more or less than five throws? 
Should bad throws be excluded? 
Is anything important lost in rounding to the nearest metre? 
(e) Would it make it easier if we tallied the throws into sections, say 15-19, 20- 
24, 25-29 etc.? 
ACTIVITY 10.3 
Write your answers for these two questions and compare them with your 
partner next to you. 
1. What are statistical measures? 
2. Why is it necessary for children to know how to collect, record, 
organise and interpret data? 
10.1.3 Methods of Organising Data 
The appropriate methods of organising data that seem suitable for the primary 
years are interpreting and constructing simple tables, charts and diagrams that are 
commonly used in everyday life to display information. The basis of this 
component is the organisation of raw data into collections. This means 
determining the extent of the possible outcomes, forming these into categories and
184  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
organising the data under these categories. The techniques that may have to be 
used in this process are combinatorial counting (to determine all the possible 
outcomes) and tallying (to organise the data under the categories). Let us begin 
this section by introducing to you the tables. 
(a) Tables 
(i) The simple table 
An example of this simple table is the table of contents on a cereal packet. 
It consists of words and figures in two columns (refer to Figure 10.3). 
Oats Meal Cereal: Average contents per serving: 
Vitamin C 25 mg 
Iron 27 mg 
Niacin 11 mg 
Riboflavin 38 mg 
Figure 10.3: Table of contents on a cereal packet 
(ii) The regular table 
The regular table is the matrix style table where there are more than 
two columns (more than column of data). The everyday example is the 
bus timetable. It is useful when comparing, for example, results from 
one year to another or between different people. Another common 
example of this table is in advertisements where prices at different 
shops are compared (refer to Table 10.4). 
Table 10.4: Materials Collected by the Children in 6 Orkid 
Bakar Muthu Chong Mary Rokiah 
Bottle tops 5 8 7 6 2 
Cotton reels 9 3 5 2 8 
Egg Cartons 5 7 2 9 3 
Plastic spoons 3 5 8 3 7 
(b) Charts 
Charts are less regular in terms of rows and columns. They attempt to 
display information more visually, to relate the display to what actually 
occurs. As such, we have the road maps and bus routes of transport and the 
time lines of history.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  185 
(i) The strip map 
This may be the bus route of an area or the time line of a history topic. 
A line is drawn and on this line are marked references to major 
features (refer to Figure 10.4). 
Bus Route: 
Ipoh Tapah Bidor Sungkai 
The Rule of King Willhem: 
Coronation The 
Great 
War 
Birth of 
Prince 
Henry 
Birth of 
Prince 
Derek 
Death of 
the Duke 
Figure 10.4: Bus route of an area or time line of a history topic 
(ii) The branch map 
This is a combination of strip maps, involving branching as in a tree. 
The most straight forward examples are the road maps or genealogy 
diagrams (family tree of parents, grandparents etc.). The skill of 
following directions from a map is an important life skill that our 
children must master. An example of a family tree is shown below. 
Kamal Baharuddin and Fauziah Hamid 
Kassim Fauziah m Ahmad Karim m Rokiah Kamsiah 
Siti Yusuf Kamarul 
Figure 10.5: Kamal Baharuddin’s family tree
186  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
(a) Diagrams 
These are visual ways to represent membership in different sets and subsets. 
A Venn diagram and a Carroll diagram could be considered the most 
favourable diagrams used to show the relationship between the members of 
a given group of objects. 
(i) Venn Diagram: An example of a Venn diagram for flowers in terms 
of red and scented. 
Neither red nor scented 
Red 
Flowers 
Scented 
flowers 
Red and scented 
Figure 10.6: Venn Diagram 
(ii) Carroll Diagram: An example of a Carroll diagram for flowers in 
terms of red and scented. 
Red Not Red 
Scented Red and scented 
flowers 
Not red and scented 
flowers 
Not Scented Red and not scented 
flowers 
Not red and not scented 
flowers 
Figure 10.7: Carroll diagram 
10.1.4 Types of Graphs 
The importance of graphs in primary schools arises from two simple ideas 
(a) A picture is worth a thousand words; and 
(b) Mathematics is a study of relationships.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  187 
Graphs are not in the syllabus to give light relief to the numerical activities. Their 
purpose is to improve communication and understanding, especially for children 
of lower ability. However, we can all gain insight to complicated statistical 
information if it is displayed in a graphical manner. Obviously, knowing how to 
draw graphs and to draw inferences from them are valuable skills to acquire. 
Bar graphs, picture graphs, line graphs, circle graphs and scatter graphs, can all be 
used to visualise data. These various forms of graphs are commonly seen in real 
life – in magazines, newspapers, textbooks and advertisements. The objective in 
using a graph is to visually present information in a form which enables it to be 
assimilated “at a glance” as compared to a list of numbers. 
Graphs are yet further examples of representing information in such a way that 
patterns are evident or worthwhile seeking. If particular patterns emerge, time and 
time again we can conclude that, indeed, some generalisation can be made about 
the circumstances we are representing. Hypothesis can be formulated and tested 
and a visual display made of the results. Concepts are more clearly understood as 
a consequence and fundamental principals are consolidated. 
(i) Bar graphs 
Bar graphs facilitate comparisons of quantities. Bar graphs can be vertical as 
well as horizontal (columns as well as rows). They can also be in the form of 
blocks, or bar lines. The following are examples of bar graphs (Figure 10.8): 
Cats 
Dogs 
Fish 
Birds 
0 5 10 15 20 25 
(a) Horizontal Bar Graph: Types of pets children have
188  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
Bus Car Bicycle Motorcycle 
25 
20 
15 
10 
5 
(b) Vertical Bar Graph: Types of vehicles children use to go to school 
Figure 10.8 (a) & (b): Bar graphs 
(ii) Picture Graphs 
Picture graphs can also facilitate comparisons of quantities just like bar 
graphs. They can easily be updated. Picture graphs are also called 
pictographs and isotypes. An example of a picture graph is shown below. 
KEY: represents RM 100 
Class A 
Class B 
Class C 
Class D 
Figure 10.9: Picture Graph Money accumulated for classroom projects
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  189 
(iii) Line Graphs 
Line graphs can be used for comparisons and for expressing allocations of 
resources, but they seem particularly useful for communicating trends. Here 
is an example of a line graph. 
40oC 
30oC 
20oC 
10oC 
Mon Tue Wed Thurs Fri 
Figure 10.10: Line graph maximum temperatures during the week 
(iv) Circle Graphs 
Circle graphs (also known as pie charts) are used to picture the totality of a 
quantity and to indicate how portions of the totality are allocated. Here is a 
circle graph indicating how one college student spent his budget. 
College Costs 
Room and Board 
Entertainment 
Clothing 
Miscellaneous 
Figure 10.11: Circle graph: Kamaruddin’s budget 
(v) Scatter graphs 
Scatter graphs are similar to line graphs which show the relationship between 
two different sets of data. The scatter graph is made for data which is not in 
sequence (in terms of the horizontal axis) and is unsuitable for a line graph. 
Here is a scatter graph which shows that mass is related to height.
190  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
50 kg 100 kg 150 kg 200 kg 
200 cm 
150 cm 
100 cm 
50 cm 
Figure 10.12: Scatter graph weight and height of students 
SELF-CHECK 10.1 
1. Describe briefly the three methods of organising data. 
2. Explain the five types of graphs with the help of visual 
representations. 
MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR 
DATA HANDLING IN YEAR 5 AND 
YEAR 6 
10.2 
Our students will learn the topic of data handling effectively if we plan the 
lessons systematically. A well organised conceptual development of statistical 
measures, collecting, recording, organising and interpreting of data will be very 
helpful for our students to understand these concepts better. It is recommended to 
instruct this topic within a problem solving environment and in a less stressful 
manner. Remember to provide opportunities for our students to differentiate the 
different types of graphs and when they are best used.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  191 
The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of data 
handling in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: 
(a) Average 
(i) Describe the meaning of average; 
(ii) State the average of two, three, four or five quantities; 
(iii) Calculate the average using a formula; and 
(iv) Solve problems in real life situations. 
(b) Data Collection 
(i) Collect data; 
(ii) Process data; and 
(iii) Analyse data. 
(c) Pictograph 
(i) Identify pictograph which represents one or more than one unit; 
(ii) Extract information from a pictograph; and 
(iii) Construct a pictograph. 
(d) Bar Charts 
(i) Identify characteristics of a bar chart; 
(ii) Extract information from a bar chart; and 
(ii) Construct a bar chart. 
TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 
10.3 
This section begins by describing the teaching and learning activities for you to 
conduct a lesson on data handling. Let us do Activity 10.4 first. Enjoy!
192  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
10.3.1 Average 
ACTIVITY 10.4 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To state the average of two, three, four or five quantities 
 To calculate the average using a formula 
Materials: 
 Task Cards 
 Answer Sheets 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of five students and give each student 
an Answer Sheet. 
2. Ask the students to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 
3. Shuffle the Five Task Cards and place them face down in a stack at 
the centre. 
4. Instruct each player to begin by drawing a card from the stack. 
5. Instruct the player to write all the answers to the questions in the 
card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 
6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils 
in the group exchange cards with the pupil on their left in a 
clockwise direction. 
7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until everyone has answered the 
questions in all the cards. 
8. The pupil with the most number of correct answers, wins. 
9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the meaning of average. 
Example of an Answer Sheet:
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  193 
Name :___________________ Class :__________ 
Card A Card B Card C 
1._____ 1._____ 1._____ 
2._____ 2._____ 2._____ 
3._____ 3._____ 3._____ 
Card D Card E 
1._____ 1._____ 
2._____ 2._____ 
3._____ 3._____ 
Example of a Task Card: 
Task Card A 
1. Calculate the average of 264 and 246. 
Average = _______________ 
2. Calculate the average of RM273, RM264 and RM 252. 
Average = RM ___________ 
3. Find the average of 4.2 km, 5.1 km, 4900 m and 5 km. 
Average = ___________ km 
ACTIVITY 10.5 
Work with your friend in class to prepare four other Task Cards. 
There should be three questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of 
Activity 10.4.
194  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
10.3.2 Organising and Interpreting Data 
ACTIVITY 10.6 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To recognise frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and 
maximum value from a bar graph; and 
 To find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and 
maximum value from a given bar graph. 
Materials: 
 30 different Flash Cards; and 
 Clean writing papers. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of three students and give each group a 
clean writing paper. 
2. Ask the students to write their names on the clean paper given. 
3. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the 
centre. 
4. Instruct Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack. He 
shows the card to Player B. 
5. Instruct Player B to read the answers within the stipulated time 
(decided by the teacher). 
6. Instruct Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each 
correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 6 points for 
each Flash Card). 
7. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until all 10 cards have been drawn by 
Player A. 
8. Repeat steps (3 through 6) until all the players have the opportunity 
to read all 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 
9. The winner is the group of students that has the most number of 
points. 
10. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the frequency, 
mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given 
bar graph.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  195 
Example of a Flash Card: 
Flash Card 1 
Mass of fish caught in kg 
Mon 
150 
100 
50 
Tue Wed Thurs Days 
1. What is the most common amount of fish caught? 
Answer: __________ kg 
2. What is the mass of fish caught on Monday? 
Answer: __________ kg 
3. Find the average mass of fish caught in the four days. 
Answer: __________ kg 
4. What is the minimum mass of fish caught? 
Answer: __________ kg 
5. What is the maximum mass of fish caught? 
Answer: __________ kg 
6. Find the range between the maximum and the minimum mass of fish 
caught. 
Answer: __________ kg 
ACTIVITY 10.7 
Work with three friends of yours in class to prepare twenty-nine other 
Flash Cards. There should be six questions in each Flash Card. Make 
sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 10.6.
196  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
10.3.3 Pie Chart 
ACTIVITY 10.8 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To recognise frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and 
maximum value from a pie chart; and 
 To find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and 
maximum value from a given pie chart. 
Materials: 
 Task Sheets; 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four to six students. Give each 
group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom and places a Task 
Sheet at each station. 
3. The teacher instructs students to solve the questions in the Task 
Sheet at each station. 
4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the 
next station in the clockwise direction. 
6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 
7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct 
answers) is the winner. 
8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the frequency, 
mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given 
pie chart.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  197 
Example of a Task Sheet: 
STATION 1 
The pie chart below shows the colours of 1,000 marbles owned by Gopal. 
White 
19% 
Blue 
Black 
5% 
Red 
25% 
Green 
19% 
1. What is the percentage of blue marbles? 
Answer:___________ 
2. What is the most common colour of the marbles? 
Answer:___________ 
3. Calculate the range. 
Answer:___________ 
4. Find the average percentage of the different colours of marbles owned by 
Gopal. 
Answer:___________ 
ACTIVITY 10.9 
Work with two of your friends to prepare four other Task Sheets for the 
other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. 
Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
10.8.
198  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
10.3.4 Problem Solving 
ACTIVITY 10.10 
Learning Outcomes: 
 To solve problems involving average; and 
 To solve problems involving graphs. 
Materials: 
 Activity Cards; 
 Clean writing papers; and 
 Colour pencils. 
Procedure: 
1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a 
different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 
2. Shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a 
stack at the centre. 
3. Teacher signals to the students to begin solving the questions in the 
first Activity Card drawn. 
4. Once they have completed the first Card, they may continue with 
the next Activity Card. 
5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their 
answer papers to the teacher. 
6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 
7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real 
contexts involving averages and graphs. 
ACTIVITY 10.10 
ACTIVITY 1
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  199 
Example of an Activity Card: 
Activity Card 1 
1. The total score of Ali, Babu and Chin in a mathematics test is 260. The 
average score of Ali and Chin is 85. Find Babu’s score. 
2. The average mass of four pupils is 22.9kg. Ali joins the group and the 
average mass of the pupils is now 23.6 kg. What is Ali’s mass in kg? 
Questions 3 and 4 are based on the bar graph below. 
Amount of money saved by four students 
Suzy 
150 
100 
50 
Samy Sarah Samsul Girl 
Money (RM) 
3. What is the percentage of money saved by Sarah? 
4. What is the difference between the amount of money saved by Samy 
and Samsul? 
ACTIVITY 10.11 
Prepare 11 other Activity Cards for the group. There should be four 
questions in each card. 
Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 
10.10.
200  TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING 
 Most of the important decision-making carried out in modern society is based 
on statistics, graphs and probabilities. 
 Graphs and statistics are indispensable to comprehending the raw data on 
which decision-making is based. 
 Statistics within the primary school is predominantly the study of procedures 
for the collection, recording, organisation and interpretation of data. 
 Many primary school teachers have little preparation for teaching data 
handling and little experience of it being taught to them. 
 In a list of data, range is the difference between the greatest and the least 
value. Mean is the average of the scores. Mode is the most commonly 
occurring score. Median is the middle score when the scores have been 
arranged in an ascending order. 
 A commonly used format to investigate problems in data handling are the 
following 5 steps: 
– Recognise and clearly formulate a problem; 
– Collect relevant data; 
– Organise the data appropriately; 
– Analyse and interpret the data; and 
– Relate the statistics obtained from the data to the original problem. 
 The appropriate methods of organising data that seem suitable for the primary 
years are interpreting and constructing simple tables, charts and diagrams 
that are commonly used in everyday life to display information. 
 Bar graphs, picture graphs, line graphs, circle graphs and scatter graphs, 
can all be used to picture data. These various forms of graphs are commonly 
seen in the real world – in magazines, newspapers, textbooks and 
advertisements.
TOPIC 10 DATA HANDLING  201 
Chart 
Diagram 
Graph 
Mean 
Median 
Mode 
Probability 
Range 
Raw data 
Statistics 
Table 
Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 5. Petaling 
Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. 
Bahagian Pendidikan Guru. (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan 
pembelajaran matematik: Ukuran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan 
Pustaka. 
Burrows, D., & Cooper, T. (1987). Statistics, graphs and probability in the primary 
school (trial materials). Queensland, Australia: Carseldine Campus. 
Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 
5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Nur Alia Abd Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR year 
6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. 
Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson 
Education Asia. 
Clarke, P. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann 
Educational Publishers.

HBMT 3203

  • 1.
    Table of Contents Course Guide ix-xvi Topic 1 Whole Numbers 1 1.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 2 1.1.1 Whole Numbers Computation 2 1.1.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 3 1.1.3 Computational Procedure 4 1.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Whole Numbers 5 1.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 6 1.3.1 Basic Operations of Whole Number 6 1.3.2 Estimation and Mental Computation 15 Summary 18 Key Terms 18 References 18 Topic 2 Fractions 20 2.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 21 2.1.1 Types of Fractions 22 2.1.2 Equivalent Fractions 23 2.1.3 Simplifying Fractions 25 2.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Fractions 26 2.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 27 2.3.1 Improper Fractions 27 2.3.2 Mixed Numbers 29 2.3.3 Addition of Fractions 31 2.3.4 Subtraction of Fractions 33 2.3.5 Multiplication of Fractions 35 2.3.6 Division of Fractions 37 Summary 39 Key Terms 40 References 40 Topic 3 Decimals 41 3.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 42 3.1.1 Meanings of Decimals 43 3.1.2 Decimal Fractions 43 3.1.3 Extension of Base-10 Place Value System 45 3.1.4 Decimal Place 46
  • 2.
    i v XTABLE OF CONTENTS 3.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Decimals 47 3.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 49 3.3.1 Decimal Numbers 49 3.3.2 Converting Fractions to Decimal Numbers 51 and Vice Versa 3.3.3 Addition of Decimal Numbers 53 3.3.4 Subtraction of Decimal Numbers 55 3.3.5 Multiplication of Decimal Numbers 57 3.3.6 Division of Decimal Numbers 59 Summary 61 Key Terms 62 References 62 Topic 4 Money 63 4.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 64 4.1.1 Teaching Children About Money 64 4.1.2 Teaching Money Concepts 65 4.1.3 Using Coins to Model Decimals 67 4.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Money 68 4.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 68 4.3.1 Basic Operations on Money 69 4.3.2 Problem Solving on Money 73 Summary 76 Key Terms 76 References 77 Topic 5 Percentages 78 5.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 79 5.1.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent 79 5.1.2 Teaching Aids in Learning Percent 81 5.1.3 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 82 5.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Percentage 83 5.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 84 5.3.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent 84 5.3.2 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents 87 Summary 93 Key Terms 94 References 94
  • 3.
    TABLE OF CONTENTSW v Topic 6 Time 95 6.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 97 6.1.1 History of Time 97 6.1.2 Time Zones 98 6.1.3 Telling the Time Correctly 99 6.1.4 24-hour System 101 6.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Time 103 6.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 104 6.3.1 Time in the 24-hour System 104 6.3.2 Converting Time in Fractions and Decimals 107 6.3.3 Year, Decade, Century and Millennium 109 6.3.4 Basic Operations Involving Time 111 6.3.5 Duration of an Event 113 6.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Time 115 Summary 117 Key Terms 117 References 118 Topic 7 Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 119 7.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 121 7.1.1 Historical Note on Measurement 122 7.1.2 The Basic Principles of Measurement 123 7.1.3 The Meanings of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 124 7.1.4 Units of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids 126 7.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Measurement in Year 5 and Year 6 127 7.3 Teaching And Learning Activities 129 7.3.1 Length 129 7.3.2 Basic Operations on Length 131 7.3.3 Mass 133 7.3.4 Problem Solving Involving Mass 135 7.3.5 Volume of Liquids 137 7.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Volume of Liquids 139 Summary 141 Key Terms 142 References 142 Topic 8 Shape and Space 143 8.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 144 8.1.1 Geometric Formulas 144 8.1.2 Perimeter and Area 145 8.1.3 Volume 147
  • 4.
    v i XTABLE OF CONTENTS 8.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Shapes 148 8.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 150 8.3.1 Finding Perimeter 150 8.3.2 Finding Area 154 8.3.3 Finding Volume 157 Summary 159 Key Terms 160 References 160 Topic 9 Averages 161 9.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 162 9.1.1 Teaching Averages 162 9.1.2 Measures of Central Tendency 163 9.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Averages 166 9.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 167 9.3.1 Meaning of Average 167 9.3.2 Calculating Average 171 Summary 175 Key Terms 175 References 176 Topic 10 Data Handling 177 10.1 Pedagogical Content Knowledge 178 10.1.1 Statistical Measures 179 10.1.2 Collecting, Recording, Organising and Interpreting 181 Data 10.1.3 Methods of Organising Data 183 10.1.4 Types of Graphs 186 10.2 Major Mathematical Skills for Data Handling in Year 5 190 and Year 6 10.3 Teaching and Learning Activities 192 10.3.1 Average 192 10.3.2 Organising and Interpreting Data 194 10.3.3 Pie Chart 196 10.3.4 Problem Solving 198 Summary 200 Key Terms 201 References 201
  • 5.
    Topic 1 Whole Numbers LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the importance of developing number sense for whole numbers to 1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics; 2. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to whole numbers to 1,000,000; 3. Show how to use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers correctly; 4. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in the range of 1,000,000; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for whole numbers, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in the range of 1,000,000.  INTRODUCTION Welcome to the first topic of Teaching of Elementary Mathematics Part IV. What is your expectation of this topic? Well, this topic has been designed to assist you in teaching whole numbers to primary school pupils in Years Five and Six. For hundreds of years, computational skills with paper-and-pencil algorithms have been viewed as an essential component of children’s mathematical achievement. However, calculators are now readily available to relieve the burden of computation, but the ability to use algorithms is still considered essential. In An Agenda for Action (NCTM, 2000, p. 6), the NCTM standards support the decreased emphasis on performing paper-and-pencil calculations with numbers more than two digits. Most of the operations in this topic will cover the content area of whole numbers to 1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics.
  • 6.
    2  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE Computation with whole numbers continues to be the focus of KBSR Mathematics. Thus, when you observe a classroom mathematics lesson, there is a high probability you will find a lesson related to computation being taught. The National Council of Teachers of Mathematics (NCTM) emphasises the importance of computational fluency, that is, “having efficient and accurate methods for computing” (NCTM, 2000, pg. 152). Computational fluency includes children being able to flexibly choose computational methods, understand these methods, explain these methods, and produce answers accurately and efficiently. 1.1.1 Whole Numbers Computation A common but rather narrow view of whole numbers computation is that it is a sequence of steps to arrive at an answer. These sequence or step-by-step procedures are commonly referred to as algorithms. Tell your pupils, that there are three important points that need to be emphasised when teachers talk about whole numbers computation. (a) Computation is much broader than using just standard paper-and-pencil algorithms. It should also include estimation, mental computation, and the use of a calculator. Estimation and mental computation often make better use of good number sense and place-value concepts. (b) Children should be allowed ample time and opportunity to create and use their own algorithms. The following shows a child’s procedure for subtracting (Cochran, Barson, & Davis, 1970): 64 - 28 - 4 +40 36 1.1 ACTIVITY 1.1 Talk to children in your classroom about the algorithms they use to solve problems. Describe these algorithms.
  • 7.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  3 What is the child doing? His thinking could be as follows: “4 minus 8 is -4, 60 minus 20 is 40. -4 plus 40 is 36”! This child’s method might not make sense to all or most children, however, it did make sense to that child, which makes it a powerful and effective method for him at that moment. (c) There is no one correct algorithm. Computational procedures may be altered depending on the situation. There are many algorithms that are efficient and meaningful. For this reason, teachers should be familiar with some of the more common alternative algorithms. Alternative algorithms may help children develop flexible mathematical thinking and may also serve as reinforcement, enrichment, and remedial objectives. 1.1.2 Estimation and Mental Computation Estimation and mental computation skills should be developed along with paper-and- pencil computation because these help children to spot unreasonable answers. Teachers should also provide various sources for computational creativity for children. (a) Mental Computation Sometimes, we need to do mental computation to estimate the quantity or volume. Mental computation involves finding an exact answer without the aid of paper and pencil, calculators, or any other device. Mental computation can enhance understanding of numeration, number properties, and operations and promote problem solving and flexible thinking (Reys, 1985; Reys and Reys, 1990). When children compute mentally, they will develop their own strategies and, in the process, develop good number sense. Good number sense helps pupils use strategies effectively. Teachers should explain to the children how to do mental computation. You should also encourage children to share and explain how they did a problem in their heads. Children often can learn new strategies by hearing their classmates’ explanations. Mental computation is often employed even when a calculator is used. For example, when adding 1,350, 785, 448, and 1,150, a child with good number sense will mentally compute “1,350 plus 1,150” and key in 2,500 into the calculator before entering the other numbers (Sowder, 1990).
  • 8.
    4  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS (b) Estimation You should know that estimation involves finding an approximate answer. Estimation may also employ mental computation, but the end result is only an approximate answer. Teachers should ensure that children are aware of the difference between Mental Computation and Estimation. Reys (1986) describes four strategies for whole number computational estimation. They are the front-end strategy, rounding strategy, clustering strategy, and compatible number strategy. The definition of each strategy is as follows: (i) Front-end strategy The front-end strategy focuses on the left-most or highest place-value digits. For example, for children using this strategy they would estimate the difference between 542 and 238 by subtracting the front-end digits, 5 and 2, and estimate the answer as 300. (ii) Rounding strategy Children using this rounding strategy would round 542 to 500 and 238 to 200 and estimate the difference between the numbers as 300. (iii) Clustering strategy The clustering strategy is used when a set of numbers is close to each other in value. For example, to find the sum of 170 + 290 + 230, children would first add 170 and 230 to get 400, and then they can estimate the sum of 400 + 290, so it’s about 700. (iv) Compatible number strategy When using the compatible number strategy, children adjust the numbers so that they are easier to work with. For example, to estimate the answer for 332 , they would note that 333 is close to 332 and is divisible by 3, and that would give an estimated answer of 111. 1.1.3 Computational Procedure When teachers engage their children in the four number operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, it is important that they pay special attention to the following points: (a) Use models for computation Concrete models, such as bundled sticks and base-ten blocks help children to visualise the problem. (b) Use estimation and mental computation These strategies help children to determine if their answers are reasonable.
  • 9.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  5 (c) Develop bridging algorithms to connect problems, models, estimation and symbols Bridging algorithms help children connect manipulative materials with symbols in order to make sense of the symbolic representation. (d) Develop time-tested algorithms These algorithms can be developed meaningfully through the use of mathematical language and models. (e) The teacher poses story problems set in real-world contexts. Children are able to determine the reasonableness of their answers when story problems are based in familiar and real-world contexts. SELF-CHECK 1.1 1. Explain the three important points that need to be emphasised when teaching whole number computations. 2. Explain Reys’ four strategies for whole number computational estimation. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR WHOLE NUMBERS 1.2 The introduction of the basics of whole number skills will help children to learn higher mathematical skills more effectively. Teachers should note that before children learn to name and write numbers they will already have developed considerable number sense. The major mathematical skills to be mastered by your pupil when studying the topic of whole numbers are as follows: (a) Name and write numbers up to 1,000,000. (b) Determine the place value of the digits in any whole number up to 1,000,000. (c) Compare value of numbers up to 1,000,000. (d) Round off numbers to the nearest tens, hundreds, thousands, ten thousands and hundred thousands. (e) Add any two to four numbers to 1,000,000. (f) Subtract one number from a bigger number less than 1,000,000. (g) Subtract successively from a bigger number less than 1,000,000.
  • 10.
    6  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS (h) Solve addition and subtraction problems. (i) Multiply up to five digit numbers with a one-digit number, a two-digit number, 10, 100 and 1,000. (j) Divide numbers up to six digits by a one-digit number, a two-digit number, 10, 100 and 1,000. (k) Solve problems involving multiplication and division. (l) Calculate mixed operations of whole numbers involving multiplication and division. (m) Solve problems involving mixed operations of division and multiplication. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 1.3 There are a few activities that can be carried out with pupils for better understanding about this topic. 1.3.1 Basic Operations of Whole Number Now, let us look at a few activities to learn the basic operations of whole numbers in class. ACTIVITY 1.2 Learning Outcome:  To practise the algorithms of addition. Materials:  Clean writing papers; and  Task Sheet as below Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each pair some clean writing paper and a Task Sheet.
  • 11.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  7 3. Each pupil in the group takes turn to fill in numerals from 0 to 9 randomly on the Task Sheet. 4. The teacher gives the instruction for addition by saying, Find the sum of any three three-digit numbers. 5. Each pupil identifies three three-digit numbers by reading the numerals from the square from left to right, right to left, top to bottom, bottom to top or even diagonally. Each pupil in the group checks the calculation of their peers using the calculator. Example: 841 + 859 + 768 = 2,469 8 6 7 4 5 3 1 0 9 6. The winner for this round is the pupil with the highest sum and is awarded 5 points. 7. Pupils in the group repeat steps (5) and (6) when the teacher gives the instruction for the next addition. 8. The teacher summarises the lesson on addition.
  • 12.
    8  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS In subsequent sections, some examples are provided for pupils to practise the algorithms of addition, subtraction multiplication and division. The next section discusses subtraction using the calculator and estimation of the product of two numbers. Let us look at Activity 1.3 first. ACTIVITY 1.3 Learning Outcome:  To practise the algorithms of addition.  To increase the understanding of place value. Materials:  10 cards numbered 0 through 9  Task Sheet as below Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each pair some clean writing paper and a Task Sheet. 3. Each pupil in the group takes turns to draw a card and announces the number on it. All players in the group write this number in one of the addend boxes on the Task Sheet. Once a number has been written on the Task Sheet, it cannot be moved or changed. 4. Replace the card and shuffle the cards. 5. Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all addend boxes are filled. 6. Pupils will compute their respective sum. 7. The winner is the pupil with the greatest sum and is awarded 5 points. 8. Repeat steps (3) through (7) until the teacher stops the game.
  • 13.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  9 Learning Outcomes:  To practise subtraction using the calculator.  To practise the algorithms of subtraction.  To increase the understanding of place value. Materials:  Calculator  Clean writing papers Procedures: 1. Pupils play this game in pairs. 2. Give each pair a calculator and some clean writing paper. 3. Throw a dice to decide who should start first. 4. Pupil A chooses three different single-digit numbers. For example: 1, 2, and 4. 5. Enter the selected digits into the calculator in order to create the largest number possible. 6. Enter “-“ 7. Next, enter the same three selected digits to create the smallest number possible followed by the “=” sign. Example: The largest number created from the three single-digit numbers is 421. The smallest number created from the three single-digit numbers is 124. 421 - 124 297 ACTIVITY 1.4
  • 14.
    10  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS 8. Repeat steps (5) through (7) with the digits 2, 7 and 9 (derived from the first subtraction) as shown below. ACTIVITY 1 421 972 963 - 124 - 279 - 369 297 693 594 954 - 459 495 9. Pupil B will have to write out all the algorithms of the subtractions and Pupil A will check it. 10. If Pupil B had carried out all the subtractions correctly, the answer will eventually yield the magic number 495! 11. Pupil B repeats steps (4) through (8). 12. The game continues until the teacher instructs the the pupils to stop. 13. The teacher summarises the lesson on subtraction.
  • 15.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  11 ACTIVITY 1.5 Learning Outcomes:  To estimate the product of two numbers.  To practise the algorithms of multiplication. Materials:  Calculator  Task Sheet as given Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some clean writing paper, a calculator and a Task Sheet. 3. Working in their group pupils will discuss the best strategy to fill in the missing numbers in the boxes. 4. Pupils will compute the algorithm of multiplication and fill in the blank boxes. 5. The winner is the group who obtained the correct answer in the shortest time. 6. Members of the winning group will explain to the class their strategy and also the algorithm of multiplication. 7. Teacher summarises the lesson on multiplication.
  • 16.
    12  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS TASK SHEET ACTIVITY 1 1. Use only the numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 to make  The largest possible product X  The smallest possible product X 2. Use your calculator to help you find the missing number. X 8 6 2 1 9 2 + 5 9
  • 17.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  13 ACTIVITY 1.6 Learning Outcome:  Using calculators to develop number sense involving division. Materials:  Task Sheet  Four calculators Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Provide each group some clean writing papers, a Task Sheet and four calculators. 3. Teacher explains the rules and starts the game. 4. Pupils will compete against members of their own group. 5. Pupils will use the calculator to determine a reasonable dividend and divisor. 6. The winner is the one in the group with the dividend and divisor that results in a quotient closest to the target number. Example: Target Number = 6,438 Entered into the calculator: 32,195 5 Followed by = (within 5 sec.) : Display shows “6,439” 7. The winner will explain to the group members his strategy in determining a reasonable answer. 8. The teacher summarises the lesson on division.
  • 18.
    14  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS TASK SHEET Target Numbers 446 815 845 490 6,438 654 8,523 6,658 29,881 31,455 44,467 51,118  Pick a target number and circle it.  Enter any number into your calculator.  Press the key.  Enter another number that you think will give you a product close to the target number.  Press the “=” key to determine your answer.  How close are you to the target number?
  • 19.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  15 1.3.2 Estimation and Mental Computation Below are the activities you can use to teach your pupils about estimation and mental computation. ACTIVITY 1.7 Learning Outcomes:  To recognise patterns in whole number operations.  To practise estimation and computation of whole numbers. Materials:  Calculator Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Ask each member of the group to choose a two-digit number. 3. Using the calculator ask them to multiply their numbers by 99. 4. Pupils in their group record and compare their results. 5. Ask them if they can see a pattern or relationship in their answers. 6. In their groups pupils will write a statement describing their pattern. 7. Ask pupils to predict the results of multiplying 5 other numbers by 99. 8. Repeat steps (2) through (7) but this time multiply the numbers by 999. 9. Ask pupils to compare results obtained from multiplication by 99 and 999 and write statements describing the pattern - The same as the one for two-digit numbers x 99. - Different from the two-digit numbers x 999.
  • 20.
    16  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS ACTIVITY 1.8 Learning Outcome:  To practise estimation and computation of whole numbers. Materials:  Calculator  Task Sheet Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some clean writing paper, a calculator and a Task Sheet. 3. In their groups, ask pupils to discuss the best strategy to fill in the missing numbers. 4. Pupils will compute the algorithm of division and fill in the blank boxes. 5. The winner is the group that arrives at the correct answer in the shortest time. 6. Members of the winning group will explain to the class their strategy and also the algorithm of division. 7. Teacher summarises the lesson on division.
  • 21.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  17 TASK SHEET 1. Use only the numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 to make  The largest possible answer )  The smallest possible answer ) 2. Use your calculator to help you find the missing number. 5 R 2 8 ) 6 0 7 8 ) 2 8
  • 22.
    18  TOPIC1 WHOLE NUMBERS In this topic, we have learned :  To explain the importance of developing number sense for whole numbers to 1,000,000 in KBSR Mathematics.  The major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to whole numbers to 1,000,000.  How to use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers correctly.  The major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in the range of 1,000,000.  To plan basic teaching and learning activities for whole numbers, as well as the addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers in the range of 1,000,000. Addition Division Multiplication Place value Subtraction Whole numbers Hatfield, M. M., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. US: Allyn &Wadsworth. Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C.A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: Heath and Company.
  • 23.
    TOPIC 1 WHOLENUMBERS  19 Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. Ohio: Merill Prentice Hall. Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and middle schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • 24.
    Topic 2 Fractions LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Use vocabulary related to fractions correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 2. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to fractions; 3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fractions correctly; 4. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fractions; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fractions.  INTRODUCTION Hello, and welcome to the topic on fractions. The basis of mathematics is the study of fractions, yet it is among the most difficult topics for school-going children. They often get confused when learning the concept of fractions as many of them have difficulty recognising when two fractions are equal, putting fractions in order by size, and understanding that the symbol for a fraction represents a single number. Pupils also rarely have the opportunity to understand fractions before they are asked to perform operations on them such as addition or subtraction (Cramer, Behr, Post, & Lesh, 1997). For that reason, we should provide opportunities for children to learn and understand fractions meaningfully. We could use physical materials and other representations to help children develop their understanding of the concept of fractions. The three commonly used representations are area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and
  • 25.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 21 discrete models (e.g., counters, sets). We introduced these representations to our pupils in Year 3 and Year 4. It would be useful to show them again these representations to reaffirm their understanding about fractions. In order to start teaching fractions in Year 5 and Year 6, it is important for us to have an overview of the mathematical skills pupils need in order to understand the concept of improper fractions and mixed numbers. It is also important to acquire the mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. At the beginning of this topic, we will learn about the pedagogical content knowledge of fractions such as the meanings of proper fractions, improper fractions and mixed numbers. In the second part of this topic, we will look at the major mathematical skills for fractions in Year 5 and Year 6. Before we finish this topic we will learn how to plan and implement basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fractions. ACTIVITY 2.1 Can you think of five reasons why fractions exist in our life? List down the reasons before comparing them with the person next to you. PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 2.1 Do you know how fractions came to be used? When human beings started to count things, they used whole numbers. However, as they realised that things do not always exist as complete wholes, they invented numbers that represented “a whole divided into equal parts”. In fact, fractions were invented to supplement the gap found in between whole numbers. We have discussed the meanings of fractions comprehensively in the Year 3. We have seen that there are three interpretations of fractions: (a) Fractions as parts of a whole unit; (b) Fractions as parts of a collection of objects; and (c) Fractions as division of whole numbers. In fact, it is important for us to provide opportunities for our children to differentiate these three interpretations in order to understand fractions better. In the following section, we will look at the pedagogical content knowledge of fractions such as the types of fractions; namely, proper fractions, improper fractions and mixed numbers.
  • 26.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 22 2.1.1 Types of Fractions You can introduce the meaning of fraction to teach them the types of fractions. A fraction is a rational number which can be expressed as a division of numbers in the form of p , where p and q are integers and q ≠ 0. The number p is called the q 4   and 7 8 numerator and q is called the denominator. For example, 4 5 5 7   . 8 Let us look at the different types of fractions in the next section. (a) Proper Fractions A proper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is less than the denominator. , 123 24 , 7 7 , 3 2 1 For example : ,.... 245 , 13 15 , 5 4 , 1 4 1 4 1 2 3 4 (b) Improper Fractions An improper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is equal to or greater than the denominator. , 523 24 For example : ,.... 245 , 33 15 , 15 7 , 9 4 4 , 5 4
  • 27.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 23 4 4 5 4 (c) Mixed Numbers A mixed number consists of an integer (except 0) and a proper fraction. , 122 133 24 For example: ,.... 245 , 22 13 15 , 5 2 7 , 3 2 4 1 3  11 2 1 3 4 Pupils should have ample opportunity to identify and represent the different types of fractions as well as to name and write them down in symbols and words. 2.1.2 Equivalent Fractions Similar to whole numbers, fractions too have various terms and names. For example, , 4 6 8 , 3 4 , 2 2 1 and 5 all represent the same amount. They are called 10 equivalent fractions. In other words, fractions with identical values are called equivalent fractions.
  • 28.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 24 5 1  2  3  4  1 and , 4 6 , 2 2 5 are equivalent fractions. Note that to find an equivalent fraction, we multiply or divide both the numerator and the denominator by the same number. For example: (i) Multiplying both numerator and denominator by the same number. 3 6 1 1  3  2 3 2   Therefore, 1 and 2 3 are equivalent fractions. 6 (ii) Dividing both numerator and denominator by the same number. 1 3 5 5  5  15 5 15   Therefore, 5 and 15 1 are equivalent fractions. 3 Use models to verify the generalisation: 1 2 2 4 3 6 6 12 Equivalent Fractions Since, 10 8 6 4 2 Therefore, 8 , 3 4 10
  • 29.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 25 2.1.3 Simplifying Fractions Now we move on to simplifying fractions. Remind your pupils that the ability to change a fraction to its equivalent fraction is an important skill that is required to understand the characteristics of fractions and to master other skills concerning basic operations of fractions. We should provide various activities for our pupils to master this skill. These activities should involve all the three stages of learning: concrete, spatial concrete and abstract. A fraction with its numerator and denominator without any common factors (except 1) is said to be in its simplest form. For example: , 7 7 15 , 3 3 , 5 4 1 , 2 4 and 2 and , 5 10 , 2 4 9 . Conversely, , 25 15 , 4 6 7 are not in their simplest form 28 because their numerators and denominators have common factors. The process of changing a fraction to its simplest form is called simplifying a fraction. Simplifying should be thought of as a process of renaming and not cancellation. In the example below, 4 and 8 2 are renamed or simplified to 4 1 . 2 1 2 4 2  2  4 2 2 4 4  2 8 2 8      1 is the simplified form of 2 2 and 4 4 . 8 As a teacher you need to tell your pupils that before they can master the skill of simplifying fractions, they must first understand the concept of proper fractions, improper fractions, mixed numbers and equivalent fractions. SELF-CHECK 2.1 1. Describe briefly with examples the three types of fractions. 2. Explain the two ways of finding equivalent fractions for a given fraction. 3. What is meant by simplifying a fraction?
  • 30.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 26 MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR FRACTIONS 2.2 A systematic conceptual development of fractions will be very helpful for our pupils to learn this topic effectively. It would be advisable for teachers to introduce the topic in a less stressful manner. It is important for us to provide opportunities for our pupils to understand improper fractions and mixed numbers meaningfully. We should use physical materials and other representations to help our children develop their understanding of these concepts. We should also provide opportunities for our children to acquire mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of fractions in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: (a) Name and write improper fractions with denominators up to 10. (b) Compare the value of the two improper fractions. (c) Name and write mixed numbers with denominators up to 10. (d) Convert improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa. (e) Add two mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. (f) Add two mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. (g) Solve problems involving addition of mixed numbers. (h) Subtract two mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. (i) Subtract two mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. (j) Solve problems involving subtraction of mixed numbers. (k) Multiply any proper fraction with a whole number up to 1,000. (l) Add three mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. (m) Add three mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. (n) Subtract three mixed numbers with the same denominators of up to 10. (o) Subtract three mixed numbers with different denominators of up to 10. (p) Solve problems involving addition and subtraction of fractions. (q) Multiply any mixed numbers with a whole number up to 1,000. (r) Divide fractions with a whole number and a fraction. (s) Solve problems involving multiplication and division of fractions.
  • 31.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 27 ACTIVITY 2.3 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 2.3 Now let us look at several activities that could help pupils not only to understand improper fractions and mixed numbers, but also to acquire the mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions. 2.3.1 Improper Fractions ACTIVITY 2.2 Learning Outcomes:  To write the improper fractions shown by the shaded parts.  To write the improper fractions in words.  To compare the value of the two improper fractions. Materials:  Task Cards  Answer Sheets Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils and give each pupil an Answer Sheet. 2. Ask pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 3. Six Task Cards are shuffled and put face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 5. The player writes all the answers to the questions in the card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), each pupil in the group exchanges the card with the pupil on their left in clockwise direction. 7. Pupils are asked to repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the pupils in the group have answered questions in all the cards. 8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct answers. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson by recalling the basic facts of improper fractions.
  • 32.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 28 Example of an Answer Sheet: Name :________________________ Class :______________________ Card A Card B Card C 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ Card D Card E Card F 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ Example of a Task Card: Card A 1. Write the improper fractions of the shaded parts. = 2. Write in words. 5 = 4 3. Circle the larger improper fraction. 7 4 9 4 ACTIVITY 2.3 1. Work with a friend in class to prepare five more Task Cards. 2. There should be three questions in each card. 3. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.2.
  • 33.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 29 2.3.2 Mixed Numbers ACTIVITY 2.4 Learning Outcomes:  To write the mixed numbers shown by the shaded parts  To convert improper fractions to mixed numbers  To convert mixed numbers to improper fractions Materials:  30 different Flash Cards  Clean writing paper Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a clean writing sheet. 2. Instruct the pupils to write their names on the clean paper. 3. Flash Cards are shuffled and put face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Player A begins by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the card to Player B. 5. Player B then reads out the answers within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 6. Player C writes the points obtained by Player B below his name. Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 3 points for each Flash Card). 7. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards have been drawn by Player A. 8. Players now change roles. Player B draws the cards, Player C reads out answers and Player A keeps the score. 9. Repeat steps (3 through 6) until all the players have had the opportunity to read the 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 10. The winner in the group is the student that has the most number of points. 11. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of mixed numbers.
  • 34.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 30 Example of a Flash Card: Flash Card 1 1. Write the mixed number shown by the shaded parts. 2. Convert this improper fraction to a mixed number. 15 = 4 3. Convert this mixed number to an improper fraction. 3 3 = 7 ACTIVITY 2.5 1. Work with three friends in class to prepare another 29 Flash Cards. 2. There should be three questions in each Flash Card. 3. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.4.
  • 35.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 31 2.3.3 Addition of Fractions ACTIVITY 2.6 Learning Outcomes:  To add two mixed numbers  To add three mixed numbers  To solve problems involving addition of mixed numbers. Materials:  Task Sheets  Clean writing papers  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Provide each group with a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is placed at each station. 3. Instruct the pupils to work together to solve the questions in the Task Sheet at each station. 4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the next station in the clockwise direction. 6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct answers) is the winner. 8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to add mixed numbers with the same denominators and different denominators.
  • 36.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 32 Example of a Task Sheet: STATION 1 1. Add the following two mixed numbers. Express your answers in the simplest form. (a)   3 3 4 2 3 4 4 2 13 (b)   3 5 2. Add the following three mixed numbers. Express your answers in the simplest form. (a)    2 1 5 2 2 5 13 5 3 3 1 2 2 1 (b)    4 3 2 3. Encik Ahmad sold 3 3 kg of prawns to Mr. Chong and 7 2 2 kg of 5 prawns to Mr. Samuel. Find the total mass of prawns sold by Encik Ahmad. The total mass of prawns sold is kg. ACTIVITY 2.7 Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets for the other stations. There should be three questions in each sheet. Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.6.
  • 37.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 33 2.3.4 Subtraction of Fractions ACTIVITY 2.8 Learning Outcomes:  To subtract two mixed numbers  To subtract three mixed numbers  To solve problems involving subtraction of mixed numbers Materials:  Activity Cards  Clean writing papers  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils. Provide each group with a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet 2. A set of 12 Activity Cards are shuffled and put face down in a stack at the centre. 3. When the teacher signals, pupils will begin solving the questions in the first Activity Card drawn. 4. Once they are done with the first Card, they may continue with the next Activity Card. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their answer paper to the teacher. 6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 7. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to subtract mixed numbers with the same denominators and different denominators.
  • 38.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 34 Example of an Activity Card: 1. Subtract the following two mixed numbers. Express your answers in the simplest form. (a)   2 3 4 4 1 4 2 2 4 3 (b)   3 5 2. Find the difference of the following mixed numbers. Express your answers in the simplest form. (a)    11 7 2 2 7 4 4 7 2 3 1 2 5 1 (b)    4 3 2 3. A container holds 6 3 litres of water. Abu Bakar pours 8 2 2 litres of 5 water from the container into a jug while his brother Arshad pours 3 1 2 litres of water from the container into a bottle. How much water, in fractions, is left in the container? The amount of water left is litres. ACTIVITY 2.9 Prepare another 11 Activity Cards for the group. There should be three questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.8.
  • 39.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 35 2.3.5 Multiplication of Fractions ACTIVITY 2.10 Learning Outcomes:  To multiply proper fractions with whole numbers  To multiply mixed numbers with whole numbers  To solve problems involving multiplication of mixed numbers Materials:  Exercise Sheets  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of two pupils. Give each group a different colour pencil. 2. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with five questions. 3. The group that finishes fastest with all correct answers is the winner. 4. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to multiply fractions with whole numbers.
  • 40.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 36 Example of an Exercise Sheet: 1. Solve the following multiplication 1 (a)  32  4 3 (b)  200  5 2. Solve the following multiplication 4 4 (a)  28  7 5 1 (b)  400  4 3. There are 440 apples in a box. 3 of the apples are green apples. 4 The remaining apples are red. How many red apples are there in the box? There are red apples in the box. 4. Muthu drinks 1 3 litres of water a day. How much water in litres, 4 will he drink in two weeks? Muthu drinks litres of water in two weeks. 5. Shalwani spends 1 3 hours watching television in a day. How much time 4 does she spend watching television in three weeks? Shalwani spends hours watching television in three weeks.
  • 41.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 37 2.3.6 Division of Fractions ACTIVITY 2.11 Learning Outcomes:  To divide fractions with whole numbers  To divide fractions with fractions  To solve problems involving division of fractions Materials:  Division Worksheets  Clean writing paper  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into 10 groups. Give each group a Division Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 2. Instruct the groups to answer all the questions in the Divison Worksheet. 3. The groups write their answers on the clean writing paper. 4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Division Worksheets. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. 6. Once all the 10 Division Worksheets have been answered, teacher collects the papers and corrects the answers. 7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to divide fractions with fractions and with whole numbers.
  • 42.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 38 Example of a Division Worksheet: WORKSHEET 1 1. Solve the following division of fractions. 1 1 (a)   28 4 9 3 (b)   25 5 2. Solve the following division of fractions. 2 3 (a)  33  4 3 13 (b)   10 5 3. A company wants to donate RM 2 3 million equally to eight charities. 4 How much money will each charity receive? Each charity receives RM million. 4. The total length of 7 similar ropes is 10 1 m. Find the length of one 2 rope. The length of one rope is m. ACTIVITY 2.12 Prepare another nine Division Worksheets for the group. There should be four questions in each worksheet. Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 2.11.
  • 43.
    TOPIC 2 FRACTIONS 39  The three commonly used representations for fractions are area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and discrete models (e.g., counters, sets).  The three interpretations for fractions are (i) fractions as parts of a unit whole, (ii) fractions as parts of a collection of objects, and (iii) fractions as division of whole numbers.  It is important to provide opportunities for our children to differentiate these three interpretations so that they can understand fractions better.  A fraction is a rational number which can be expressed as a division of numbers in the form of , where p and q are integers and q ≠ 0. The number p is called the numerator and q is called the denominator.  Pupils in Year 5 and Year 6 should be able to identify proper fractions, improper fractions and mixed numbers. They should be able to simplify the given fractions into its simplest form.  A proper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is less than the denominator.  An improper fraction is a fraction where its numerator is equal to or greater than the denominator.  A mixed number consists of an integer (except 0) and a proper fraction.  Fractions with identical values are called equivalent fractions.  The process of changing a fraction to its simplest form is called simplifying a fraction.  Pupils should be able to acquire the mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing fractions.  Pupils should also be able to solve daily life problems involving basic operations on fractions. p q
  • 44.
     TOPIC 2FRACTIONS 40  Story problems are set in real-life situations. Children are able to determine the reasonableness of their answers when story problems are based on familiar contexts. Addition Denominator Division Fraction Half Multiplication Numerator Quarter Share Subtraction Whole Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan pembelajaran matematik: Pecahan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman, Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Ng S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson Education Asia. Peter C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheet 1. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers. Sunny Yee & Lau P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach : Mathematics year 3. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
  • 45.
    Topic 3 Decimals LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Use the vocabulary related to decimals correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 2. Relate major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to decimals; 3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of decimals correctly; 4. Use major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of decimals; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for the addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of decimals.  INTRODUCTION Do you know the meaning of the word “decimal”? It means "based on 10" (from Latin decima: a tenth part). We sometimes say "decimal" when we mean anything to do with our numbering system, but a "decimal number" usually means there is a decimal point. The word “decimal” is used so loosely that most uses of it are really wrong. Properly speaking, since the "deci-" in the word means "ten", any number written in a base-ten system (that is, with each digit worth ten times as much as the one next to it) can be called a "decimal number". When we write "123", the 3 is worth 3 ones, the 2 is worth 2 tens, and the 1 is worth a ten of tens, or a hundred. That is decimal. A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in the base-ten, or a power of ten. A decimal fraction, also called a decimal, is a number with a decimal point in it, like 1.23. The decimal point separates the whole number from the
  • 46.
    42  TOPIC3 DECIMALS fractional part of a number. Generally speaking, any number with a decimal point in it would be commonly called a decimal, not just a number less than 1. Hopefully the explanation did not confuse you. What about young children? If children are taught the wrong concepts of decimals then working with decimals is going to be a dreadful experience for them. For that reason, we must provide opportunities for our children to learn and understand decimals meaningfully. We can use physical materials and other representations to help our children develop their understanding of the concept of decimals. Since decimal numbers are closely related to fractions, the three commonly used representations for fractions, namely the area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and discrete models (e.g., counters, sets) can be used again to teach the concept of decimals. It would be useful to show pupils these representations to reaffirm their understanding about decimals. In order to teach decimals in Years 5 and 6, it is important for us to have an overview of the mathematical skills involved in changing fractions and mixed numbers to decimals and vice versa. It is also important to acquire the mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing decimals. At the beginning of this topic, we will explore the pedagogical content knowledge of decimals such as the basic interpretation of decimals, and then ways to represent and read decimals. In the second part of this topic, we will look at the major mathematical skills for decimals in Years 5 and 6. Before we end this topic, we will learn how to plan and implement basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of decimals. ACTIVITY 3.1 Write your answers for these two questions and compare them with the person sitting next to you. 1. What are decimals? 2. Why is it necessary for us to learn about decimals? PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 3.1 Before you teach your pupils decimals, you should talk to them about the number system. The modern number system originated in India. Other cultures discovered
  • 47.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 43 a few features of this number system but the system, in its entirety, was compiled in India, where it attained coherence and completion. By the 9th century, this complete number system had existed in India but several of its ideas were transmitted to China and the Islamic world before that time. A straightforward decimal system, where 11 is expressed as ten-one and 23 as two-ten-three, is found in the Chinese and Vietnamese languages. The Japanese, Korean, and Thai languages imported the Chinese decimal system while many other languages with a decimal system have special words for the numbers between 10 and 20, and decades. Incan languages such as Quechua and Aymara have an almost straightforward decimal system, in which 11 is expressed as ten with one and 23 as two-ten with three. 3.1.1 Meanings of Decimals The decimal (base-ten or sometimes denary) numeral system has ten as its base. It is the most widely used numeral system, perhaps because humans have ten digits over both hands. Ten is the number which is the count of fingers on both hands. In many languages the word digit or its translation is also the anatomical term referring to fingers and toes. In English, decimal means tenth, decimate means reduce by a tenth, and denary means the unit of ten. The symbols for the digits in common use around the globe today are called Arabic numerals by Europeans and Indian numerals by Arabs, the two groups' terms both referring to the culture from which they learned the system. Decimal notation is the writing of numbers in the base 10 numeral system, which uses various symbols (called digits) for no more than ten distinct values (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9) to represent any numbers, no matter how large. These digits are often used with a decimal separator (decimal point) which indicates the start of a fractional part. The decimal system is a positional numeral system; it has positions for units, tens, hundreds, etc. The position of each digit conveys the multiplier (a power of ten) to be used with that digit - each position has a value ten times that of the position to its right. 3.1.2 Decimal Fractions A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in the base ten, or a power of ten. Decimal fractions are commonly expressed without a denominator, the decimal separator being inserted into the numerator (with
  • 48.
    44  TOPIC3 DECIMALS leading zeros added if needed), at the position from the right corresponding to the power of ten of the denominator. Examples: 0.0008 8     0.083 8 10000 0.83 83 1000 0.8 83 100 10 In English-speaking and many Asian countries, a period (.) is used as the decimal separator; in many other languages, a comma (,) is used (e.g. in France and Germany) The part from the decimal separator (decimal point) to the right is the fractional part; if considered as a separate number, a zero is often written in front (example: 0.23). Trailing zeros after the decimal point are not necessary, although in science, engineering and statistics they can be retained to indicate a required precision or to show a level of confidence in the accuracy of the number. Whereas 0.080 and 0.08 are numerically equal, in engineering 0.080 suggests a measurement with an error of up to 1 part in one thousand (±0.001), while 0.08 suggests a measurement with an error of up to 1 part in one hundred. The integer part or integral part of a decimal fraction is the part to the left of the decimal separator (decimal point). Decimal fractions can be expressed as fractions by converting the digits after the decimal separator to fractions in the base ten or power of ten. Example: 2 34 100 2.34  2  3      2  34  100 4 100 2 30 100 4 100 10 Fractions with denominators of base-ten, or power of ten, can be directly expressed as decimal fractions. Decimal fractions are confined to tenths, hundredths, thousandths and other powers of ten. Examples: 3.008 2.23 3 8 1 5    1000 1.5 2 23 100 10
  • 49.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 45 3.1.3 Extension of Base-10 Place Value System To help pupils understand the meaning of decimal fractions and its relationship to place value, you should first give opportunities to them to see and investigate the pattern that exists between place values in whole numbers. This is because the concept of place value in whole numbers is the basis of decimal fractions. In fact, decimal fractions should be introduced as an extension of base-10 place value. In the base-10 place value, it is clear that the digit in every place value is 10 times more than the digit which is to the right of it. In other words, the digit in every place value is 1 of the digit which is to the left of it. 10 Thousands Hundreds Tens Units 1000 100 10 1 1 1 1 1 The digit in the hundreds place value is 1 of the digit 10 in the thousands place value. The digit in the units place value is 1 of the digit in the 10 tens place value. By exploring the pattern that exists in the place value system, you should extend the procedure to identify the place value to the right of units. All the place values to the right of units represent decimal parts (parts of the number which is less than one). To show the separation between the decimal part and the whole number part, a decimal point (decimal separator) is placed after the place value of units. Thousands Hundreds Tens Units Tenths Hundredths Thousandths 1000 100 10 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 From the extended place value system above, you can see that there is a symmetry between the place values. The centre of symmetry is the place value of units. With
  • 50.
    46  TOPIC3 DECIMALS the help of this extended place value system, pupils would be able to explain every place value and appreciate the meaning of decimal fractions. Apart from that, it would be easier to read decimal fractions if pupils could write the decimal fractions according to the extended place value system. The digits before the decimal point will be read according to the place value, whereas the digits after the decimal point will be read as the digits themselves. For example: 6.5 is read as “six point five” 12.34 is read as “twelve point three, four” 45.005 is read as “forty five point zero, zero, five” 235.237 is read as “ two hundred and thirty five point two, three, seven” One or more than one Less than One Thousands Hundreds Tens Units Tenths Hundredths Thousandths 1000 100 10 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 6 • 5 1 2 • 3 4 4 5 • 0 0 5 2 3 5 • 2 3 7 For the decimal fraction, 235.237, the first digit after the decimal point, 2, is the tenths digit, the second digit, 3 is the hundredths digit, and the third digit, 7 is the thousandths digit. 3.1.4 Decimal Place Now, how are you going to teach pupils to count the number of decimal places. The decimal place (d.p.) for decimal fractions is counted by adding the number of digits after the decimal point. For example: 2 3 5 . 2 3 7 has 3 decimal places 1 digit + 1 digit + 1 digit = 3 (3 digits after the decimal point)
  • 51.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 47 SELF-CHECK 3.1 1. Though the meaning of decimal number is accepted by all, the symbol (the way the decimal separator is used) still varies. List down the various symbols used for decimal numbers. 2. How can you show the place value of hundredths with the help of a diagram of a concrete model ? MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR DECIMALS 3.2 A systematic conceptual development of decimals will be helpful for your pupils to learn this topic efficiently and effectively. It would be beneficial to introduce this topic in a meaningful way. In order to provide opportunities for your pupils to develop their understanding of decimal numbers in a less stressful manner, you should use models such as decimal squares, square grids, number lines, base-ten blocks. You should also provide opportunities for your pupils to acquire mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing decimal numbers. Pupils should be exposed to real life contexts that apply practical usage of decimals. The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying decimals in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: (a) Name and write decimal numbers to three decimal places. (b) Recognise the place value of thousandths. (c) Convert fractions of thousandths to decimal numbers and vice versa. (d) Round off decimal numbers to the nearest: (i) tenth, (ii) hundredth. (e) Add any two to four decimal numbers up to three decimal places involving: (i) decimal numbers and decimal number (ii) whole numbers and decimal numbers (f) Solve problems involving the addition of decimal numbers.
  • 52.
    48  TOPIC3 DECIMALS (g) Subtract a decimal number from another decimal number up to three decimal places. (h) Subtract successively any two decimal numbers up to three decimal places. (i) Solve problems involving subtraction of decimal places. (j) Multiply any decimal number up to three decimal places with: (i) a one-digit number, (ii) a two-digit number, (iii) 10, 100 and 1000. (k) Solve problems involving multiplication of decimal numbers. (l) Divide a whole number by: (i) 10 (ii) 100 (iii) 1000 (m) Divide a whole number by: (i) a one-digit number (ii) a two-digit number (n) Divide a decimal number of three decimal places by: (i) a one-digit number (ii) a two-digit whole number (iii) 10 (iv) 100 (o) Solve problems involving division of decimal numbers. (p) Add and subtract three to four decimal numbers of up to 3 decimal places involving: (i) decimal numbers only (ii) whole numbers and decimal numbers (q) Solve problems involving addition and subtraction of decimal numbers.
  • 53.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 49 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 3.3 Let us look at a few activities for pupils to develop their understanding of decimal numbers and major mathematical skills for decimals. 3.3.1 Decimal Numbers ACTIVITY 3.2 Learning Outcomes:  To write the decimal that represents the shaded parts  To write the decimal numbers in words  To write the place value of the underlined digits  To compare the value of the two decimal numbers Materials:  Task Cards  Answer Sheets Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils. Each student is given an Answer Sheet. 2. Ask pupils to write their names on the Answer Sheet. 3. Shuffle Six Task Cards and place them face down in the centre. 4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 5. The player writes all the answers to the questions in the Task Card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils (in their groups) exchange the cards with the pupil on their left in clockwise direction. 7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the members of the group have answered the questions in all the cards. 8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct answers. 9. The teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of decimal numbers.
  • 54.
    50  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Example of an Answer Sheet: Name :________________________ Class :______________________ Card A Card B Card C 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ Card D Card E Card F 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ 4.________________ Example of a Task Card: Card A 1. Write the shaded part in decimals. 2. Write in words. 1.408 = 3. Write the place value of the underlined digit. 8.354 = 4. Circle the decimal with the largest value. 27.357 27.537 27.753 27. 375
  • 55.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 51 ACTIVITY 3.3 Work with your colleagues or cousemates to prepare another five Task Cards. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.2. 3.3.2 Converting Fractions to Decimal Numbers and Vice Versa ACTIVITY 3.4 Learning Outcomes:  To convert fractions to decimal numbers  To convert decimal numbers to fractions  To round off decimal numbers to the nearest tenth  To round off decimal numbers to the nearest hundredth Materials:  30 different Flash Cards  Clean writing paper Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a clean writing sheet. 2. Ask pupils to shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Player A begins by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the card to Player B. 4. Player B then reads out the answers within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 5. Player C writes the points obtained by Player B below his name. Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points for each Flash Card).
  • 56.
    52  TOPIC3 DECIMALS 7. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until 10 cards have been drawn by Player A. 8. Players now change roles. Player B draws the cards, Player C reads out answers and Player A keeps the score. 9. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the opportunity to read 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 10. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the highest score. 11. The teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of decimal numbers. Example of a Flash Card: Flash Card 1 1. Convert this decimal number to a fraction. 0.083 = 2. Convert this fraction to a decimal number. 154 1000 = 3. Round off the decimal number to the nearest tenth. 3.628 = 4. Round off the decimal number to the nearest hundredth. 15.589 = ACTIVITY 3.5 Work with a few colleagues or cousemates to prepare another 29 Flash Cards. There should be four questions in each Flash Card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.4.
  • 57.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 53 3.3.3 Addition of Decimal Numbers ACTIVITY 3.6 Learning Outcomes:  To add two to four decimal numbers up to three decimal places  To add two to four decimal numbers involving whole numbers and decimal numbers  To solve problems involving the addition of decimal numbers Materials:  Task Sheets  Clean writing paper  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is placed at each station. 3. The teacher instructs pupils to solve the questions in the Task Sheet at each station. 4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the next station in a clockwise direction. 6. At the end of 50 minutes, teacher will collect the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct answers) is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to add decimal numbers up to three decimal places.
  • 58.
    54  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Example of a Task Sheet: STATION 1 1. Add the following decimal numbers. Express your answers in three decimal places. (a) 1.724 + 3.055 = (b) 9.2 + 2.32 + 0.535 = (c) 6.07 + 5.234 + 2.5 + 0.56 = 2. Add the following whole numbers and decimal numbers. Express your answers in three decimal places. (a) 6 + 3.652 = (b) 2.345 + 7 + 4.78 = (c) 4.534 + 2.43 + 6.8 + 8 = 3. The length of ribbon A is 21.43m. Ribbon B is 3.26m longer than ribbon A. What is the total length of the two ribbons? The total length of the two ribbons is ACTIVITY 3.7 Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets for the other stations. There should be three questions in each sheet. Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.6.
  • 59.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 55 3.3.4 Subtraction of Decimal Numbers ACTIVITY 3.8 Learning Outcomes:  To subtract two decimal numbers up to three decimal places  To subtract successively any two decimal numbers up to three decimal places  To solve problems involving subtraction of decimal numbers Materials:  Activity Cards  Clean writing paper  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils. Give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing sheet. 2. Ask pupils to shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Teacher instructs pupils to draw an Activity Card and begin solving the questions on the first Card drawn. 4. Once they have answered the questions on the first Card, they may continue with the next Activity Card. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their answer papers to the teacher. 6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 7. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to subtract decimal numbers up to three decimal places.
  • 60.
    56  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Example of an Activity Card: 1. Subtract the following two decimal numbers. Express your answers in three decimal places. (a) 7.34 – 3.567 = (b) 23. 6 – 11. 782 = 2. Carry out the subtraction of the following decimal numbers. Express your answers in three decimal places. (a) 6.7 – 1.24 – 3.007 = (b) 50.23 – 15.14 – 12.224 = 3. A fence measuring 12.47m needs to be painted. If 7.029m of the fence has been painted, how many metres more need to be painted? more need to be painted. ACTIVITY 3.9 Work in pairs to prepare another 11 Activity Cards for the group. There should be three questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.8. ACTIVITY 2.4
  • 61.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 57 3.3.5 Multiplication of Decimal Numbers ACTIVITY 3.10 Learning Outcomes:  To multiply decimal numbers with one-digit whole numbers  To multiply decimal numbers with two-digit whole numbers  To solve problems involving multiplication of decimal numbers Materials:  Exercise Sheets  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into pairs (two pupils in each group). 2. Give each group a different colour pencil. 3. Provide each group with an Exercise Sheet containing five questions each. 4. The group that finishes fastest with all correct answers will be the winner. 5. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to multiply whole numbers with decimal numbers. ACTIVITY 3.10
  • 62.
    58  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Example of an Exercise Sheet: 1. Solve the following multiplication problems. (a) 6.42  7 = (b) 3.456  15 = 2. Solve the following multiplication problems. (a) 2.34  10 = (b) 0.346  100 = 3. Mr. Lee bought 6 pieces of iron rods. The length of each iron rod is 4.56m. Find the total length of the iron rods. Total length of the iron rods is 4. A box of grapes weighs 7.2 kg. A box of oranges weighs 3 times the mass of the box of grapes. What is the mass of the box of oranges? The mass of the box of oranges is 5. A packet of green apples weighs 3.402 kg. What is the total weight of 100 packets of green apples? The total mass of 100 packets of green apples is
  • 63.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 59 3.3.6 Division of Decimal Numbers ACTIVITY 3.11 Learning Outcomes:  To divide decimal numbers with 10, 100, 1000  To divide decimal numbers with one-digit numbers  To divide decimal numbers with two-digit whole numbers  To solve problems involving the division of decimal numbers Materials:  Division Worksheets  Clean writing paper  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into 10 groups. Give each group a Division Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 2. Teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the Divison Worksheet. 3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Division Worksheets. 5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4. 6. Once all the 10 Division Worksheets have been answered, the teacher collects the answer papers and corrects the answers. 7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 8. The teacher summarises the lesson on how to divide decimal numbers with whole numbers.
  • 64.
    60  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Example of a Division Worksheet: WORKSHEET 1 1. Solve the following division problems. (a) 921  100 = (b) 8652  1000 = 2. Solve the following division problems. (a) 44.272  8 = (b) 18.324  12 = 3. Puan Rohana pours 3.26 litres of syrup equally into 5 bottles. What is the volume of syrup in each bottle? The volume of syrup in each bottle is 4. Mrs. Rama put 31.85 kg of prawns equally into 7 boxes. What is the mass of prawns in each box? The mass of prawns in each box is ACTIVITY 3.12 Prepare another nine Division Worksheets for the groups. There should be four questions in each worksheet. Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 3.11. ACTIVITY 3.12
  • 65.
    TOPIC 3 DECIMALS 61  The three commonly used representations for fractions namely the area models (e.g., fraction circles, paper folding, geo-boards), linear models (e.g., fraction strips, Cuisenaire rods, number lines), and discrete models (e.g., counters, sets) can be also used to explain the concept of decimals.  The decimal (base-ten or sometimes denary) numeral system has ten as its base.  Decimal notation is the writing of numbers in the base-10 numeral system, which uses various symbols (called digits) for no more than ten distinct values (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9) to represent any numbers, no matter how large.  A decimal fraction is a special form of fraction where the denominator is in the base-ten, or a power of ten.  The integer part or integral part of a decimal fraction is the part to the left of the decimal separator (decimal point).  Decimal fractions can be expressed as fractions by converting the digits after the decimal separator to fractions in the base ten or power of ten.  All the place values to the of right of units represent decimal parts (parts of the number which are less than one).  The separation between the decimal part and the whole number part is shown by a decimal point placed after the place value of units.  The digits before the decimal point will be read according to the place value, whereas the digits after the decimal point will be read as the digits themselves.  The decimal place (d.p.) for decimal fractions is counted by adding the number of digits after the decimal point.
  • 66.
    62  TOPIC3 DECIMALS Addition Decimal Decimal fractions Decimal point Decimal place Decimal separator Integral part Subtraction Multiplication Division Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan pembelajaran matematik: Perpuluhan dan peratus. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR year 6. Kuala Lumpur. Penerbitan Fargoes. Ng S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson Education Asia. Peter Clarke et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers. Sunny Yee & Lau P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics year 3. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
  • 67.
    Topic 4 Money LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Demonstrate to your pupils how to use the vocabulary related to money correctly for the topic of Money in the KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 2. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to the addition and subtraction of money up to the value of RM 10,000,000; 3. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to the multiplication and division of money up to the value of RM 10,000,000; 4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for the topic of Money up to a value of RM 10,000,000; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities to help pupils solve daily problems related to money.  INTRODUCTION The lifelong benefits of teaching children good money habits make it well worth the effort. Children who are not taught these lessons face the consequences for a lifetime. Some parents do not teach children about money because they think they should not talk about money with children, do not have the time, or think they do not have enough money. ACTIVITY 4.1 Most people have strong feelings and opinions about money, based on childhood experiences and the values and beliefs of their families. Do you agree with the above statement? Discuss the truth of this statement with your coursemates.
  • 68.
    64  TOPIC4 MONEY PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 4.1 Teaching children about money is more than preparing them for employment or teaching them to save some of the money they earn. It includes helping them understand the positive and negative meanings of money. For example, children need to learn that while it is nice to show someone love by buying a gift, it is just as important to show love through actions and words. Teachers and children should talk about their feelings, values, attitudes, and beliefs about money. This helps children understand the issues that may occur due to money and that compromises are often necessary to deal with them. ACTIVITY 4.2 1. How do you create an open environment to discuss money issues? 2. How do you respond to the effects of advertising and peer pressure on our children's requests for things? 4.1.1 Teaching Children About Money How do you teach your children the topic on money? When teaching children about money, teachers need to make an effort to think from the children's point of view, not from adults’ point of view. For instance, a young child may ask his or her parents how much money they make, but what they really want to know is not how much their parents earn, but why they cannot have certain toys or why their family cannot go for holidays overseas. It is important for teachers to use examples or activities that match the child's stage of development, not necessarily the child's actual age in years. It is also important for teachers to communicate with children about money matters in very concrete terms. Children want to know how to operate in the adult world. Any time money is earned, moved, spent, donated, shared, borrowed or saved provides an opportunity for teachers to teach children how the money world works and what thoughts and feelings go into making money decisions. Children should be introduced to the origin of money; the barter system, the use of objects to represent money and the use of coins and notes in various denominations. Children learn mainly through observation and example; participation in discussions and group decision making; direct teaching through planned experiences; and by making their own decisions. Through observation, children learn a great deal more than teachers realise. Teachers can add to this
  • 69.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 65 experiential learning through intentionally planned learning activities. As you teach children about money they can learn about: 1. Responsibility; 2. Family values and attitudes; 3. Decision-making; 4. Comparison-shopping; 5. Setting goals and priorities; and 6. Managing money outside the home. Let us learn about teaching money concepts in the next section. Enjoy! 4.1.2 Teaching Money Concepts The right focus I was browsing through the chapter on Money in the Mathematics Year One textbook that my children are using in school when it suddenly struck me that we may not be teaching our children the right values about money. Almost all the problem-solving questions in the textbook focus on buying things and totalling up the amount spent. Why can’t the writers ask better questions, for instance, those which revolve around saving money and using it wisely? Questions pitched from this angle would help to inculcate good values and teach our children to be money-savvy at the same time. I think the present focus imparts unhealthy values about money to our children from Year One. Something is not quite right here. H.C. FOO (Source: Sunday STAR, 30 March 2008) What do you think about the truth as expressed by H.C. FOO? Do you think there is a need to educate children on the concepts of earning, saving, borrowing and sharing, besides spending? These financial concepts of earning, spending, saving, borrowing, and sharing are generic money concepts. Earning refers to how children receive money. Spending refers to the way children decide to use their money. Saving refers to money that the children set aside for some future use. Borrowing means that money can be obtained for use in the present but must be paid back in the future with an additional cost. Sharing means both the idea of sharing what we have with those who are less fortunate and obligations such as paying taxes which are required of
  • 70.
    66  TOPIC4 MONEY everybody. By providing children with intentional learning experiences related to these financial concepts we can provide children practical skills and knowledge and a perspective on money based upon values and beliefs. Among the benefits of teaching these concepts are: Earning teaches: (a) Financial independence (b) Work standards and habits (c) How to evaluate job alternatives (d) Relationship of money, time, skills and energy Spending teaches: (a) Difference and balance between wants and needs (b) Opportunities for comparing alternatives (c) Making decisions and taking responsibility for them (d) Keeping records Borrowing teaches: (a) Cost of borrowing (b) Borrowed money needs to be paid back (c) When it is appropriate to borrow (d) Consequences of buying now and paying later (e) Structure of borrowing (f) The idea of credit limits Sharing teaches: (a) Good feelings for giver and receiver (b) Helps other people (c) Doesn't always require public recognition (d) Obligations to give money to certain organisations, i.e. taxes to the government (e) Giving of yourself rather than giving money or gifts
  • 71.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 67 Saving teaches: (a) How to get what you want or need by saving for it (b) Planning and delayed gratification (c) Interrelationship of spending and earning (d) Different purposes of planned and regular saving (Source: Sharon M. Danes and Tammy Dunrud, 2002. University of Minnesota) Now, let us look at some mathematical skills, beginning with how to model decimals using coins. 4.1.3 Using Coins to Model Decimals Do you know how to model decimals? Some teachers use coins to model decimals. Recording amounts in Ringgit and sen does involve decimal fractions, but care must be taken on how the children see the connection between the sen and the fractional part of a decimal number. For example, children do not readily relate RM75.25 to RM75 and 25 hundredths of a Ringgit or 10sen to one-tenth of a Ringgit. If money is used as a model for decimals, children need to think of 10 sen and 1 sen as fractional parts of a Ringgit. It is common to find in supermarket advertisements the use of incorrect decimal notations. For example, the price of an item may be indicated as .75 sen. The assumption is that .75sen means the same as RM0.75. In fact .75 sen means 75 hundredths of a sen! It is important to provide children with opportunities to practise recording money correctly. SELF-CHECK 4.1 1. Explain with examples, the meaning of the following statement: “When teaching children about money, teachers need to make an effort to think from children's point of view, not from adults’ point of view ”. 2. State the benefits of teaching the concept of saving and earning money.
  • 72.
    68  TOPIC4 MONEY MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR MONEY 4.2 The introduction of money usually follows instruction on the basics of fraction and decimal skills. Teachers should note that various basics of fraction and decimal skills are prerequisite skills for the topic of money. The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of money are as follows: (a) Read and write the value of money in ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. (b) Add money in ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. (c) Subtract money in ringgit and sen within the range of RM10 million. (d) Multiply money in ringgit and sen with a whole number, fraction or decimal with products within RM 10 million. (e) Divide money in ringgit and sen with the dividend up to RM10 million. (f) Perform mixed operations of multiplication and division involving money in ringgit and sen up to RM10 million. (g) Solve problems in real context involving money in ringgit and sen up to RM 10 million. (h) Perform mixed operations with money up to a value of RM10 million. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 4.3 Below are several activities for pupils to understand basic operations on money. They also can acquire the major mathematical skills involved in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing money.
  • 73.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 69 4.3.1 Basic Operations on Money ACTIVITY 4.3 Learning Outcome:  To practise the basic operations on money. Materials:  A deck of cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. Example: RM 1 642 000 - RM 871 420 RM 167 234 X 23 = RM 770 580 RM 3 846 382  Clean writing paper Procedures: 1. Prepare cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. 2. Place the answer cards (grey cards) in a circle on the floor. 3. Instruct the children to march around the circle of answer cards on the floor, chanting this rhyme: Basic operations, ‘round we go, Not too fast and not too slow. We won’t run and we won’t hop, We are almost there, it’s time to stop. 4. When the rhyme finishes, the teacher will hold up a question card (white card) and ask them to work out the answer to the question. 5. The child who is standing by the card with the answer to the question, picks up the answer card and shows it to the rest of the children. 6. Instruct the children to check his or her answer. Is she or he correct? 7. Repeat the procedure several times or until all the answer cards have been picked up. 8. The child with the most answer cards wins and is awarded a prize.
  • 74.
    70  TOPIC4 MONEY ACTIVITY 4.4 Learning Outcome:  To practise the basic operations on money Materials:  Four lists of questions on mixed operations with money. Some of the questions may be repeated on each list.  Answers to the questions. Example: List 1 1. RM 328 200 + RM 6 720 X 15 = 2. RM 564 000 ÷ 40 + RM 484 120 = 3. RM 1 875 223 – RM 956 600 ÷ 20 = 4. RM 12 875 X 12 + RM 840 280 = 5. RM 840 280 ÷ 20 – RM 9 027 = 6. RM 2 411 610 – RM 21 140 X 22 =
  • 75.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 71 List 2 1. RM345,225 + RM2,550 X 24 = 2. RM564,000 ÷ 40 + RM484,120 = 3. RM528,500 – RM225,000 ÷ 20 = 4. RM56,780 X 12 + RM450,228 = 5. RM840,280 ÷ 20 – RM9,027 = 6. RM2,667,345 – RM18,246 X 32 = Procedures: 1. Prepare four lists of questions on mixed operations with money. Some of the questions may repeated on each list. 2. Prepare 24 cards, each containing an answer for each of the 24 questions. Tape these cards to the walls around the classroom. 3. Divide the children into four teams. 4. Give one list to each team. (You might want to provide a copy of the list for every member of the team). 5. Ask the children to calculate the answers to the questions on their list. 6. Ask the team members to search for the answer cards taped on the walls of the classroom. 7. The first team to correctly calculate the answers to all the questions in their list and collect all the answer cards wins and will be awarded a prize.
  • 76.
    72  TOPIC4 MONEY ACTIVITY 4.5 Learning Outcome:  To practice the basic operations on money. Materials:  A deck of cards comprising sets of question cards and answers. Example: RM328,100 ÷ 25 + RM532,590 = RM545,714  Clean writing paper Procedures: 1. Prepare cards comprising sets of question cards and answer cards. The questions on mixed operations should involve money in ringgit and sen up to ten million Ringgit. 2. Hand a card to each child. Some of the children will get question cards and some will get answer cards. 3. Get the children holding the card with the question to calculate its answer. 4. Ask the children to find their partner holding the card showing the answer to the question. 5. If there is an odd number of children in the class, you should take a card and participate so that everyone has a partner. 6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see the other’s card. Ask the children to check everyone’s calculation. Are the partners matched correctly? 7. Hand out a Task Sheet containing ten questions on mixed operations with money up to ten million Ringgit and have the children work out the answers to reinforce their understanding of mixed operations with money.
  • 77.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 73 4.3.2 Problem Solving on Money ACTIVITY 4.6 Learning Outcomes:  To practise the basic operations on money.  To solve daily problems involving money. Materials:  Sets of cards Procedures: 1. Instruct the children to form groups of three. 2. Make three sets of the Game Cards and cut out the cards. 3. Give each group a set of the cards. 4. Shuffle the cards and spread them out face down on the table. 5. Ask the children to take turns to choose two cards and place them face up on the table. 6. If the cards show a word problem and its matching calculation, give the child time to solve the problem. If the pupil can give the correct answer, the child keeps both the cards. 7. If the cards that the child chose do not show a word problem and its matching calculation or the child offers an incorrect answer to the problem, the cards are replaced in their original position on the table. 8. When all the cards have been chosen, the children will count how many cards they have. The winner is the child with the most number of cards. ACTIVITY 1
  • 78.
    74  TOPIC4 MONEY A Proton Iswara costs RM26,754. A Waja costs RM65,467. How much cheaper is the Proton Iswara than the Waja? RM65,467 - RM26,754 12 girls bought a gold chain as a wedding present for a friend. Each paid RM725. What was the cost of the gold chain? RM725 x 12 The usual price of a luxurious car is RM236,789. Its sale price is RM199,888. How much is the difference between the sale price and the usual price? RM236,789 - RM199,888 8 brothers and sisters shared an inheritance of RM3,465,000 equally. How much money does each of the siblings receive? RM3,465,000 ÷ 8 = Pn Salmah bought a refrigerator and a stove. The refrigerator cost RM2,225. The stove cost RM4,355 more than the refrigerator. How much did she spend altogether? RM2,225 RM2,225 + RM4,355 A single-storey house costs RM93,888. A double-storey bungalow costs 6 times as much as the single-storey house. Find the cost of the double-storey bungalow. RM93,888 x 6 Dr Chen donated RM121,000 to Rumah Charis and RM324,500 to Rumah Chaya. He had RM3,500,000 left. How much money did he have at the beginning? RM121,000 RM324,500 + RM3,500,000 Mustafa has RM345,000 as savings. He has 5 times as much money as his brother. How much money does his brother have? RM345,000 ÷ 5 Suhaimee has RM55,345 in his savings. His mother gave him some more money. He now has RM115,300. How much money did his mother give him? RM115,300 - RM55,345 Syarikat Jefa donated RM125,700 and RM67,000 to two relief funds. What is Syarikat Jefa’s total donation ? RM125,700 + RM67,000
  • 79.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 75 GAME CARDS ACTIVITY 4.7 Learning Outcome:  To solve daily problems involving money. Materials:  Sets of catalogues  Clean writing paper Procedures: 1. Instruct pupils to form groups of four. 2. Give each pupil in the group a different catalogue. 3. Tell each group that its the newspaper’s 10th Anniversary. In conjuction with their anniversary celebration, they are carrying out some charity work. 4. The publisher of the newspaper has generously donated RM250,000 to the school. The money will be used to further equip the school resoure centre. 5. Each person in the group is to study the catalogue provided to him or her. 6. The person is to write the name and cost of one or two items that he or she feels would be of use to the school resource centre. 7. Using the round robin format of the cooperative learning technique, members of the group will discuss each item chosen and why it was chosen. One member of the group serves as a recorder. 8. The group will have to come out with a final list of items to be purchased. The group may need to make adjustments to keep the total cost below RM250,000. 9. Prepare a bulletin-board to display the list of items presented by the groups. Displays help pupils to recap what they have learned and it is also a means of seeing the practical applications of mathematics.
  • 80.
    76  TOPIC4 MONEY  Teaching children about money is more than preparing them for employment or teaching them to save some of the money they earn. It includes helping them understand the positive and negative aspects of money.  Teachers and children should talk about their feelings, values, attitudes and beliefs about money.  When teaching children about money, teachers need to make an effort to think from the children's point of view, not the adults’ point of view.  As you teach children about money they can learn about responsibility; family values and attitudes; decision-making; comparison-shopping; setting goals and priorities; and managing money outside the home.  The financial concepts of earning, spending, saving, borrowing, and sharing are generic money concepts.  Some benefits of providing intentional learning experiences related to these financial concepts are children’s mastery of practical skills and knowledge, as well as a perspective about money based upon values and beliefs.  Recording amounts in Ringgit and sen does involve decimal fractions, but care must be taken on how children see the connection between the sen and the fractional part of a decimal number.  It is important to give children contextual examples on the use of money. Coin Money Note Value
  • 81.
    TOPIC 4 MONEY 77 Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. US: Allyn &Wadsworth. Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: Heath and Company. Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and middle schools. , Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • 82.
    Topic 5 Percentages LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Demonstrate the importance of developing the basics of fraction and decimal skills as prerequisites to the learning of percentages; 2. Use the vocabulary related to percentages correctly; 3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to percentages; and 4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for percentages.  INTRODUCTION Basically, percentages are used in many everyday situations. Children probably already know a bit about percentages. They are exposed to percentages when they go shopping with their parents. Shops use percentages in sales. Banks use them for loan rates. Schools use percentages in their forecast of examination results. Unfortunately, they are also often incorrectly used. For example, a store advertises prices reduced by 100%, rather than 50%; an interest rate of .03%, rather than 3%; and a school reports the number of straight A’s pupils increased by 200%, which is correct, but a little misleading, since the number of pupils that scored straight A’s went up from 1 to 3! ACTIVITY 5.1 Visit the Math Forum website: http://mathforum.org/dr.math/tocs/fractions.middle.html Find out the frequently asked questions about percentages in the website.
  • 83.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 79 PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE The introduction of percentages usually follows instruction after the mastery of basic fraction and decimal mathematical skills. Teachers should note that various fraction and decimal skills are prerequisite skills for learning percentages. For example, to solve a percentage problem, the pupil must be able to convert a percentage into a fraction or a decimal as shown below: For example, 26 100 = 26%, and 45% = 45 100 = 0.45 5.1.1 Meaning and Notation of Percent Figure 5.1: The various sales discount signs that we often see in shopping centres. [Source: http://www.bbc.co.uk] 5.1 ACTIVITY 5.2 1. Change the following percents to decimals: ½ %, ⅘ %, ⅝ %. 2. Develop an instructional sequence to teach pupils how to change percents like ½ %, ⅘ %, or ⅝ % to decimals.
  • 84.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 80 First of all, let us look at the meaning of the term “percent”. The term percent means “parts per hundred.” It expresses a relationship between some number and 100. The symbol % indicates a denominator of 100. For example, 25% is an expression of the ratio between the number 25 and 100 and means 25 parts of 100, or 25 out of 100. When an item is sold for RM 100, the cost is the base to which the discount is applied. A 20% off the cost price is the rate of discount, and RM 20 is the amount of discount, or percentage. The table below illustrates some ways percent is used and it helps to clarify the confusion about the term per cent and percentage. Table 5.1: Common Uses of Percent Rate Base Percentage Sales 25% off retail price of plasma TV RM3,200 retail price RM800 reduction in price Service tax 10% service tax RM250 purchased RM25 in service tax charged Increase in tax 4% raise in property tax Property tax of a RM360,000 house Increased RM14,400 in property taxes As a teacher, you must make it clear that per cent indicates the rate (of discount, and taxes), whereas percentage indicates the amount, or quantity (of discount and taxes). Note that the base and percentage always represent numbers that refer to the same units, and per cent is the rate by which percentage compares with the base. However in the Year 5 and Year 6 textbooks, percentage is represented with the symbol ‘%’ and is called ‘percent’. Another point of confusion arises when a given rate is applied to different bases. Consider the result when a RM 50 book is increased by 20%. An increase of 20% raises the price of the book to RM 60. After a year, the price of the book is reduced by 20%. Will the price of the book be the same as it was a year ago? In both cases, the percent is the same; an increase of 20% and a year later a reduction of 20%. Try calculating it and check if the price of the book a year later is the same as the price before the 20% increment?.
  • 85.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 81 5.1.2 Teaching Aids in Learning Per Cent A key idea in mathematics is that numbers can be represented in many ways. A rational number can be expressed as a fraction, a decimal, or a percent. The content readiness children need before they are introduced to per cent is an understanding of both common and decimal fractions. The pedagogical readiness required is an understanding of the teaching aids they will use. During introductory and developmental activities each whole unit or set should be one that is easily subdivided into 100 parts. It is easier for children to understand the meaning of per cent when they deal with portions of the 100 parts of a unit. As an example, teachers are encouraged to use the 10-by-10 grid to represent per cent as shown in Figure 5.2: Figure 5.2: Using a 10-by-10 Grid to Represent Percents Source: http://www.bbc.co.uk This large square is made up of 100 small parts. 10 parts are yellow. So 10% of the large square is yellow. 40 parts are red. So 40% of the large square is red. 50 parts are brown. So 50% of the large square is brown. Other than the 10-by-10 grid, teachers can also use the Cuisenaire materials.
  • 86.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 82 5.1.3 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents As children show percent on a 10-by-10 grid and reflect on the language they use to describe their representations, the fraction and decimal names of the numbers will become apparent. Example 7% = 7 100 = 0.07 Because 7% (seven per cent) means 7 out of 100, it is seven-hundredths, which is written as in fraction notation and 0.07 in decimal notation. (a) Decimals as percent Writing a decimal as a per cent involves finding an equivalent decimal in hundredths. For example, For example, eight-tenths = eighty percent or 0.8 = 0.8 x 100% = 80% Children find that to change a decimal to percent, one needs only to multiply by 100, which means “moving” the decimal point two places to the right. For example, 0.33 = 33% and 1.2 = 120%. To express a percent as a decimal, the opposite rule applies. For example, 62.5% = 0.625 and 225% = 2.25. (b) Fractions as percent Children who have mastered the meaning of percent as “parts per hundred” should not have much problem expressing fractions as percent. For example, 29 100 = 29%. Children can be challenged to apply this understanding to find ways of writing a fraction whose denominator is other than 100 as a percent. For example, 4 5 = 80 100 = 80%.
  • 87.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 83 As a teacher you can tell the pupils that a basic method is to find an equivalent fraction having a denominator of 100. Another method is to write the fraction in decimal and then multiply this number by 100. For example, 4 5 = 0.8 = 80%. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR PERCENTAGE Now, we move on to the major mathematical skill for percentage. Remember that various basic fraction and decimal skills are prerequisites for learning percentage. The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils when studying the topic of percentage are as follows:  Name and write the symbol for percentage.  State and convert fraction of hundredths to percentage and vice versa. Example 26 100 = 26% and 45% = 45 100  Convert proper fractions with the denominations of 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25 and 50 to percentage. Example 4 5 = 80 100 = 80%.  Convert percentage to decimal number and fraction in its simplest form. = 0.05 = ½ 5.2 SELF-CHECK 5.1 1. Explain the meaning of percent and percentage. 2. Using a suitable teaching aid, explain how you can introduce the topic on Percentages. 5 100
  • 88.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 84  Convert mixed numbers to percentage. Example 1 1 2 = 3 2 = 150 100 = 150%.  Convert decimal numbers of value more than 1 to percentage.  Find the value for a given percentage of a quality  Finding values of percentage of a quantity.  Solve problems in real context involving relationships between percentage, fractions and decimals. We move on to the teaching and learning activities in the following section. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 5.3 Let us look at a few activities to develop pupils’ understanding of percentage and master the major mathematical skills for percentage. 5.3.1 Meaning and Notation of Per Cent ACTIVITY 5.3 Learning Outcome:  To name and write the notion of per cent.  To state fraction of hundredths in percentage Materials:  Clean writing papers  10 x 10 Grid.
  • 89.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 85 Procedures: 1. Display a 10 x 10 grid. Ask the children to verify that there are 100 equal squares on the grid. 2. Shade one square and ask a pupil to name the shaded square. . [one hundredth]. 3. Ask for a volunteer to come to the board to write a numeral to name the shaded square. [ Accept either 1 ACTIVITY 1 100 or 0.01 ]. 4. Tell the children that 1 100 can also be named 1 per cent. 5. Explain to the children that percent means per hundred, or out of hundred. 6. Explain to the children that the symbol % expresses a denominator of 100. As such, the name of 1 of the small square can be written as 1% and read as one per cent. 7. Ask fo a volunteer to count the number of shaded squares in the diagram above. 8. Ask the volunteer to come to the board to write a numeral to name shaded squares. [ 40 100 ]. 9. Ask the volunteer to express the shaded squares in per cent. [ 40%]. 10. Give out the Task Sheet and instruct the children to complete it.
  • 90.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 86 TASK SHEET 1. Study the 10-by-10 grid below and fill in the blanks. ACTIVITY 1 Now 20 parts have been coloured green. 20 out of the 100 is _____, so ____ % of the square is green. There are ____ parts not shaded. ____ out of 100 is ____%, so _____ of the square is not shaded. What happens if you add up the percentages for the blue, green and unshaded parts? ____ + ____ + ____ = _____ So, the whole square is equal ______ . 2. Study the picture below and fill in the blanks.
  • 91.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 87 5.3.2 Fraction and Decimal Equivalents Learning Outcomes:  To convert proper fractions with denominators of 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25 and 50 to percent.  To convert mixed numbers to percentage Materials:  Clean writing papers  Task Sheet as below Procedures: 1. Display 10 magnetic chips, 4 green and 6 blue on a magnetic board. 2. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of coloured magnetic chips. [10] 3. Ask the children, “What part of the set of magnetic chips is green?” [ 4/10] “Can anyone tell what percent of the chips is green?” [ 40% ] If a child gives the answer as 40%, ask for an explaination of how it was determined. If no answer is given, ask, “What must we do to change 4 10 to a fraction with a denominator of 100?” [Multiply both numerator and denominator by 10]. Ask, “Why do we do this ?” [ 40 100 is equivalent to 40% ] ACTIVITY 5.4
  • 92.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 88 4. Next, add another 10 green magnetic chips to the magnetic board. ACTIVITY 1 5. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of coloured magnetic chips. [20] 6. Ask the children, “Are the green chips in this set still 40% of the set?” 7. Ask the children, “What part of the set of magnetic chips is green?” [ 14 20 ] “Can anyone tell what percent of the chips is green?” [ 70% ] If a child gives the answer as 70%, ask for an explaination of how it was determined. If no answer is given, ask, “What must we do to change 14 20 to a fraction with a denominator of 100?” [Multiply both numerator and denominator by 5]. Ask, “Why do we do this ?” [ 14 5 x 20 5 = 70 100 is equivalent to 70% ] 8. Repeat steps (4) through (7) with more examples. 9. Handout Task Sheet and ask pupils to complete it.
  • 93.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 89 TASK SHEET State the percentage of the shaded region in the diagram below: ACTIVITY 1 ________ % of the figure is shaded. ________ % of the figure is shaded. ________ % of the figure is shaded. Convert the following fractions to percentages. (a) 3 5  (b) 1 2  (c) 3 4  (d) 3 25  (e) 7 1 10  (f) 2 3 5  (g) 1 5 4  (h) 7 6 20 
  • 94.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 90 ACTIVITY 5.5 Learning Outcomes:  To convert percentage to decimal number and vice versa  To convert decimal numbers of values more than 1 to percentages Materials:  Clean writing paper  Task Sheet as below Procedures: 1. Display a 10 x 1 grid on the board. 2. Have a volunteer come forward to count the number of boxes on the grid. [10] 3. Ask the children, “What decimal represents the shaded part of the grid ?” [ 0.3 ] “Can anyone tell what per cent of the grid is shaded?” [ 30% ] If a child gives the answer as 30%, ask for an explanation on how it was determined. If no answer is given, ask, “What decimal fraction represents the shaded part of the grid?” [ ] “Can anyone change the fraction to a decimal?” [ 0.3 ] “What must we do to change a decimal to per cent?” [Multiply by 100]. Ask, “What per cent is 0.3 ?” [ 0.3 x 100 is equivalent to 30% ] 4. Next, show another strip of 10 x 2 grid on the board. 5. Ask for a volunteer to come forward to count the number of boxes on the grid. [20] 6. Ask the children, “What decimal represents the shaded part of the grid ?” [ 0.4] 7. Ask the children, “Can anyone tell what percent of the grid is shaded?” [ 40% ]
  • 95.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 91 8. Ask for an explanation on how it was determined. [Multiply 0.4 by 100 ] 9. Repeat steps (4) through (7) with other examples. 10. Hand out the Task Sheet and ask pupils to complete it. TASK SHEET ACTIVITY 1 1. Convert the following decimal to percentage. (a) 0.4 = (b) 0.7 = (c) 0.6 = (d) 0.9 = (e) 0.53 = (f) 0.78 = (g) 0.13 = (h) 0.66 = 2. Convert the following decimal to percentage. (a) 1.5 = (b) 3.1 = (c) 2.7 = (d) 9.1 = (e) 5.01 = (f) 1.99 = (g) 3.14 = (h) 8.08 =
  • 96.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 92 ACTIVITY 5.6 Learning Outcome:  To practise the fraction and decimal equivalent of per cent. Materials:  A deck of cards comprising 13 numbers in 4 equivalent forms. Example: 50% ½ 0.5 Procedures: 1. Two, three or four players can play this game. The objective of the game is to lay all your cards down. 2. Begin by dealing seven cards to each player. The remainder of the pack is placed face down on the table. 3. Next, the top card from the deck is placed face up near the pack to begin the discard pile. 4. The first player may either draw the top card from the face down pile or pick up the top card on the discard pile. The player must then discard a card, and the turn goes to the next player. 5. When one player has accumulated three cards of equivalent value, these are laid face up on the table. 6. The player who has the fourth equivalent value for the set may lay that card face up on the table in front of himself or herself. The player next to the one who laid down the three equivalent cards continues the play. 7. When the pack is gone, the discard pile is turned over and becomes the pack.
  • 97.
    TOPIC 5 PERCENTAGES 93 8. The first player to lay all his or her cards down wins that hand. Each player receives 5 points for every card laid down and loses 5 points for every card still held. 9. The game is over when one player has 100 points or the teacher gives the instruction to stop playing the game. Percentage Fraction 10% 20% 25% 50% 75%  The term per cent means “parts per hundred.” It expresses a relationship between some number and 100.  The symbol % indicates a denominator of 100.  Percent indicates the rate (of discount and taxes), whereas percentage indicates the amount or quantity (of discount and taxes).
  • 98.
     TOPIC 5PERCENTAGES 94  During introductory and developmental activities on per cent, materials used should be one that is easily subdivided into 100 parts.  To change a decimal to percent, one needs only to multiply by 100, which means “moving” the decimal point two places to the right. To express a percent as a decimal, the opposite rule applies.  To change a fraction to percent, a basic method is to find an equivalent fraction having a denominator of 100.  Another method is to write the fraction in decimal and then multiply this number by 100. Percent Percentage Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for the elementary and middle School. Needham Heights, MA.: Allyn & Bacon. Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. US: Allyn & Wadsworth. Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington DC: Heath and Company. Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and middle Schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • 99.
    Topic 6 Time LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Use vocabulary related to time correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus ; 2. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to time; 3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of time correctly; 4. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of time; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities of time for Years 5 and 6.  INTRODUCTION Throughout history, people have sought out various ways to measure time. Timekeeping has been an important part of all cultures throughout the centuries. How did people first tell time? People first told time by looking at the sun as it crossed the sky. When the sun was directly overhead in the sky, it was the middle of the day, or noon. When the sun was close to the horizon, it was either early morning (sunrise) or late evening (sunset). The history of clocks is very interesting, and there have been many elaborate types of clocks developed over the centuries. The word clock was first used in the 14th century (about 700 years ago). It comes from the Latin word for bell "clocca".
  • 100.
    96  TOPIC6 TIME The oldest type of clock was a sundial, also called a sun clock. Sundials used the sun to tell the time. The shadow of the sun pointed to a number on a circular disk that showed you the time. In the picture below, the shadow created by the sun points to 9, so it is nine o'clock. Since sundials depend on the sun, they can only be used to tell the time during the day. SUNDIAL WATER CLOCK PENDULUM CLOCK Figure 6.1: Types of clocks A water clock was made of two containers of water, one higher than the other. Water travelled from the higher container to the lower container through a tube connecting the containers. The containers had marks showing the water level, and the marks told the time. Water clocks worked better than sundials because they told the time at night as well as during the day. They were also more accurate than sundials. The first practical clock was driven by a pendulum. The pendulum swings left and right, and as it swings, it turns a wheel with teeth. The turning wheel turns the hour and minute hands on the clock. One problem with pendulum clocks is that they stopped running after a while and had to be restarted. Quartz crystal clocks were then invented. Quartz is a type of crystal that looks like glass. When you apply voltage, or electricity, and pressure, the quartz crystal vibrates or oscillates at a very constant frequency or rate. The vibration moves the clock's hands very precisely.
  • 101.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 97 PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 6.1 In this subtopic, we will be looking at how to teach pupils how to tell time. ACTIVITY 6.1 Search the Internet for information about how man started to tell time. State two reasons for time to be taught as one of the important topics in the Years 5 and 6 KBSR Mathematics syllabus. 6.1.1 History of Time The Greeks divided the year into 12 parts that are called months. They divided each month into 30 parts that are called days. Their year had a total of 360 days or 12 times 30 days (12 x 30 = 360). The Egyptians and Babylonians decided to divide the day from sunrise to sunset into 12 parts that are called hours. They also divided the night, the time from sunset to sunrise, into 12 hours. This system of measuring time was not very accurate because the length of an hour changed depending on the time of year. Somebody finally figured out that by dividing the whole day into 24 hours of equal length (12 hours of the day plus 12 hours of the night), the time could be measured more accurately. The hour is divided into 60 minutes, and each minute is divided into 60 seconds. The idea of dividing the hour and minutes into 60 parts comes from the Sumerian sexagesimal system, which is based on the number 60. This system was developed about 4,000 years ago. As we know, a clock only shows 12 hours at a time, and the hour hand must go around the clock twice to measure 24 hours, or a complete day. To tell the first 12 hours of the day (from midnight to noon) apart from the second 12 hours of the day (from noon to midnight), we use these terms: AM – Ante meridiem, from the Latin term for "before noon" PM – Post meridiem, from the Latin term for "after noon"
  • 102.
    98  TOPIC6 TIME ACTIVITY 6.2 Visit the Math Forum website: http://mathforum.org/dr.math/tocs/time.middle.html Find out why day and night are divided into 12 parts. 6.1.2 Time Zones Because the Earth turns, it is daytime on one side of the world and night time on the other side. In 1884, delegates from 25 countries met and agreed to divide the world into time zones. If you draw a line around the middle of the Earth, it is a circle (equator). The delegates divided the 360 degrees of the circle into 24 zones, each 15 degrees apart (24 x 15 = 360). They decided to start counting from Greenwich (pronounced GREN-ich), England, which is 0 degrees longitude. To see the standard time zones of the world, refer to the Figure 6.2 below. Figure 6.2: Time zones Source: http://www.arcytech.org/jaya/clock/images/time_zones.jpg
  • 103.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 99 6.1.3 Telling the Time Correctly Clocks and watches have both a big hand to tell the minutes and a small hand to tell the hour. Look at the picture below. The hour hand is pointing to the 1, and the minute hand is pointing to the 12 (or 0 minutes). It is exactly one o'clock. One way to write one o'clock is 1.00. Another way to write it is 1:00. The symbol : is called a colon. It separates the hours from the minutes. The number on the left side of the colon tells the hour and the number on the right side tells the minutes. To tell the time, we look at the hour hand first and then the minute hand. In the picture above, the hour hand is pointing to the number 1, and the minute hand is pointing to the number 15 (look at the outside of the clock), so it is one-fifteen, or 1:15. Notice that the hour hand is not pointing exactly at the 1, but has moved a little closer to the 2. As the minute hand moves all the way around the clock, the hour hand moves from one hour to the next. You can divide an hour, which is 60 minutes long, into four parts. The parts are divided by the 0, 15, 30, and 45 minute marks as shown in the picture below. Each of the four parts is called a quarter. In the table below, you will learn ways to say the time using the word "quarter".
  • 104.
    100  TOPIC6 TIME O'clock quarter to quarter past half past When the number of minutes is greater than 30, instead of saying the number of minutes after the hour, you can say the number of minutes before the next hour, or the number of minutes to the next hour. The following table shows different ways to say the time, including using the word "quarter" and the word "to". Table 6.1: Different Ways to Say the Time Time Ways to Tell the Time 6:00 Six o'clock 2:15 Two-fifteen Quarter past two 5:30 Five-thirty Half past five 8:45 Eight-forty-five Quarter to nine 3:50 Three-fifty Ten to four 7:11 Seven-eleven Eleven minutes past seven 11:48 Eleven-forty-eight Twelve minutes to twelve 12:00 Twelve o'clock Noon (middle of the day) Midnight (middle of the night)
  • 105.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 101 ACTIVITY 6.3 Look through the last few years of the Arithmetic Teacher or other journals of teaching Mathematics in Primary Schools. Read an article on the teaching and learning of time that is relevant to the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus. Discuss your article with your coursemates and tutor. 6.1.4 24-Hour System A 24-hour system is used for international time readings. The times of arrivals and departures of airplanes, international trains and ships are read in the form of the 24-hour clock instead of the 12-hour clock. The international time system uses 4 digits to indicate time, the first 2 digits indicate hours while the last two digits indicate minutes. For example: 12-Hour Clock 24-Hour Clock 5.30 am 0530 8.15 pm 2015 The time-line below can be used to show the relationship between the 12-hour system and the 24-hour system. It is similar to the number line used in the number system except that in the time-line we have 60 divisions to represent the minutes in an hour. 12-hour System mid-night morning (a.m.) noon 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 0900 1000 1100 1200 24-hour System
  • 106.
    102  TOPIC6 TIME 12-hour System noon afternoon (p.m.) mid-night 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 24-hour System To convert the 12-hour system to the 24-hour system, we do the following: (i) 1.45 a.m. = 0145 we add 0 to make 4 digits and we read as 01, 45. (ii) 5.48 p.m. = 1748 we add 12 to the hours if it is after noon and we read it as 17, 48. To convert the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system, we do the following: (i) 0045 = 0.45 am The first two digits (less than 12) indicates morning (a.m.). We put a dot (.) after the first two digits to indicate hours and minutes. (ii) 1535 = 3.15 pm The first two digits (more than 12) indicates afternoon (p.m.). For hours more than 12, we subtract 12 from the given hour (15 – 12 = 3 hours) (iii) 2345 = 11.45 pm Here again, the first two digits are more than 12, so we subtract 12 from 23 (23 – 12 = 11hours). It indicates (p.m.) in this case it is night. SELF-CHECK 6.1 1. Explain the difference between the 12-hour system and the 24- hour system. 2. Using a suitable teaching aid, explain how you would convert 2145 into the 12-hour system.
  • 107.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 103 MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR TIME Our pupils will learn the topic of time effectively if we plan the lesson systematically. A well organised conceptual development of time will help our pupils to understand the concept of time better. Though pupils have been exposed to time before, it is still our responsibility as teachers of Year 5 and Year 6 to provide adequate opportunities for our pupils to explore and have practical experience of time. We should use physical materials and other representations to help our children develop their understanding of time. The major mathematical skills related to time to be mastered by Year 5 and Year 6 pupils are as follows: (a) Time in the 24-hour system (i) Read and write time in hours and minutes in the 24-hour system; (ii) Convert time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system and vice versa; and (iii) Solve real life problems involving time in the 24-hour system. (b) Convert time in fractions and decimals; (i) Convert time in fractions and decimals of a minute to seconds; and (ii) Convert time in fractions and decimals of an hour to minutes and to seconds. (c). Year, Decade, Century and Millennium (i) Convert time involving year and decade; (ii) Convert time involving year and century; (iii) Convert time involving year, decade, century and millennium; and (iv) Solve real problems involving year, decade, century and millennium. (d) Operations (i) Add and subtract time involving hours, minutes and seconds; (ii) Multiply and divide time involving hours, minutes and seconds; and (iii) Solve real problems involving addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of time. 6.2
  • 108.
    104  TOPIC6 TIME (e) Calculate the duration of an event (i) Calculate the duration of an event involving hours, minutes and seconds; (ii) Calculate the duration of an event involving days and hours; (iii) Calculate the duration of an event involving months, years and dates; (iv) Determine the start or end time of an event from a given duration of time; and (v) Solve problems involving time duration in fractions and/or decimals of hours, minutes and seconds. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 6.3 In this subtopic, we demonstrate to you the teaching and learning activities for the topic of time that can be used in the classroom. Pupils can master major mathematical skills involving time by carrying out these activities. 6.3.1 Time in the 24-hour System ACTIVITY 6.4 Learning Outcomes:  To write the time in words  To write the time in numerals  To convert the time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system and vice versa Materials:  Task Cards  Answer Sheets
  • 109.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 105 Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of five pupils and give each pupil an Answer Sheet. 2. Instruct pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 3. Shuffle five Task Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Each player begins by drawing a card from the stack. 5. Ask the player to write all the answers to the questions in the card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils in the group exchange the card with the pupil on their left in clockwise direction. 7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until all of them in the group have answered the questions in all the cards. 8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct answers. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the vocabulary related to time. Example of an Answer Sheet : Name :________________________ Class :______________________ Card A Card B Card C 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ Card D Card E 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________
  • 110.
    106  TOPIC6 TIME Example of a Task Card: Card A 1. Write the time in words. 0932 hrs = 2. Write the time in numerals. Seventeen twenty-four hours = 3. Convert the time from the 24-hour system to the 12-hour system. 1352 hrs = 4. Convert the time from the 12-hour system to the 24-hour system 7. 30 a.m. = ACTIVITY 6.5 Work with your friend in class to prepare four more Task Cards. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.4.
  • 111.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 107 6.3.2 Converting Time in Fractions and Decimals ACTIVITY 6.6 Learning Outcomes:  To convert time in fractions and decimals of a minute to seconds  To convert time in fractions and decimals of an hour to minutes and to seconds  To convert time in fractions and decimals of a day to hours, minutes and seconds Materials:  30 different Flash Cards  Clean writing paper Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a clean writing sheet. 2. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Instruct Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack and showing the card to Player B. 4. Instruct Player B to read the answers to the questions in the card within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 5. Instruct Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points for each Flash Card). 6. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards are drawn by Player A. 7. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the opportunity to read the 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 8. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the most number of points. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts about units of time.
  • 112.
    108  TOPIC6 TIME Example of a Flash Card: Flash Card 1 1. Convert the following time to seconds. 0.2 minute = seconds 2. Convert the following time to minutes. 3 hour = minutes 5 3. Convert the following time to hours. 0.5 day = hours 4. Convert the following time to hours, minutes and seconds. 0.48 day = hours minutes seconds ACTIVITY 6.7 Work with a few friends of yours in class to prepare 29 more Flash Cards. There should be four questions in each Flash Card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.6.
  • 113.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 109 6.3.3 Year, Decade, Century and Millennium ACTIVITY 6.8 Learning Outcomes:  To convert units of time from century to years and vice versa  To convert units of time from century to decades and vice versa  To convert units of time from millennium to years and vice versa  To convert units of time from millennium to decades and vice versa Materials:  Task Sheets  Clean writing papers  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils. Give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom. A Task Sheet is placed at each station. 3. The teacher instructs pupils to answer the questions in the Task Sheet at each station. 4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will move on to the next station in the clockwise direction. 6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct answers) is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to convert units of time from century and millennium to years and decades and vice versa.
  • 114.
    110  TOPIC6 TIME Example of a Task Sheet: STATION 1 1. Convert the following centuries to years. (a) 6 centuries = years (b) 2 centuries = years 5 2. Convert the following years to centuries (a) 175 years = centuries (b) 800 years = centuries 3. Convert the following decades to centuries and vice versa. (a) 5 centuries = decades (b) 150 decades = centuries 4. Convert the following millennium to centuries. (a) 7 millennium = centuries (b) 50 centuries = millennium ACTIVITY 6.9 Work with two of your friends to prepare four more Task Sheets for the other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.8.
  • 115.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 111 6.3.4 Basic Operations Involving Time ACTIVITY 6.10 Learning Outcomes:  To add time in hours, minutes and seconds  To subtract time in hours, minutes and seconds  To multiply time in hours, minutes and seconds  To divide time in hours, minutes and seconds Materials:  Activity Cards  Clean writing papers  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. Instruct pupils to shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Teacher signals to the pupils to begin answering the questions in the first Activity Card drawn. 4. Once they have completed the first Card, they continue with the next Activity Card. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their answer paper to the teacher. 6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to add, subtract, multiply and divide time in hours, minutes and seconds.
  • 116.
    112  TOPIC6 TIME Example of an Activity Card: 1. Add the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. (a) 3 hrs 40 min 30 s (b) 2 hrs 35 min 20 s + 4 hrs 35 min 35 s + 5 hrs 35 min 40 s 2. Subtract the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. (a) 7 hrs 40 min 30 s (b) 8 hrs 35 min 20 s - 4 hrs 35 min 35 s - 5 hrs 35 min 40 s 3. Multiply the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. (a) 3 hrs 50 min 20 s (b) 5 hrs 35 min 25 s  5  3 4. Divide the following time in hours, minutes and seconds. (a) 6 18 hrs 24 min 30 s (b) 8 20 hrs 42 min 32 s ACTIVITY 6.11 Work in pairs to prepare eleven more Activity Cards for the group. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.10.
  • 117.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 113 6.3.5 Duration of an Event ACTIVITY 6.12 Learning Outcomes:  To calculate the duration of an event involving hours, minutes and seconds  To calculate the duration of an event involving days and hours  To determine the start or end time of an event from a given duration of time  To calculate the duration of an event in months, years and dates Materials:  Exercise Sheets  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into pairs (two pupils in each group). 2. Give each group a different colour pencil. 3. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with four questions each. 4. The group that finishes first with all correct answers will be the winner. 5. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the duration of an event. ACTIVITY 1
  • 118.
    114  TOPIC6 TIME Example of an Exercise Sheet: 1. Find the duration of the following events. From To Duration (a) 1335 hrs 1945 hrs (b) 11.30 a.m. 3.45 p.m. 2. Find the duration of the following events. Starting Time Ending Time Duration (a) 0900 hrs, 5 April 1100 hrs, 12 April (b) 6.30 a.m., 15 November 3.30 p.m., 17 November 3. Calculate the starting or ending time of the following events. Starting Time Ending Time Duration (a) 0900 hrs, 5 April 1 hour 15 minutes (b) 3.30 p.m., 17 November 4 days 3 hours 4. Find the duration of the following events. (a) From July 2013 to September 2014 = _________ years ______ months (b) From 0730 hrs, 20 June 2013 till 1740 hrs, 21 June 2014 = _________ day ______hours ______ minutes
  • 119.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 115 6.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Time ACTIVITY 6.13 Learning Outcomes:  To solve problems involving duration of time in fractions and/or decimals of hours, minutes and seconds  To solve problems involving computations of duration of time Materials:  Time worksheets  Clean writing papers  Colour pencils Procedure: 1. Divide the class into ten groups and give each group a Time Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 2. The teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the Time Worksheet. 3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Time Worksheets. 5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4. 6. Once all the 10 Time Worksheets have been answered, the teacher collects the answer papers and corrects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems involving duration of time.
  • 120.
    116  TOPIC6 TIME Example of a Time Worksheet: TIME WORKSHEET 1 1. A drawing competition started at 1425 hrs and ended at 1645 hrs. Calculate the duration of the competition. The duration of the competition is _____________. 2. Mrs. Chong spent 1 day to bake a cake and 8 1 day to sew a 4 dress. How long did she take to complete the work altogether? She took ___________ to complete the work altogether. 3. Sharipah works in Ipoh General Hospital as a nurse. She works for 1 of a day. How many hours does she work? 3 Sharipah works_________ hours. 4. Meng Choo was posted to Sabah on 2 August 2008. Then, she was transferred to Perak on 1 July 2012. Find the duration, in years and months, of her stay in Sabah. The duration of her stay in Sabah is ____________. ACTIVITY 6.14 Prepare nine more Time Worksheets for the group. There should be four questions in each worksheet. Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 6.13
  • 121.
    TOPIC 6 TIME 117  Timekeeping has been an important part of all cultures throughout the centuries. The history of clocks is very long, and many different types of clocks have been invented over the centuries.  The first method people used to tell the time was by looking at the sun as it crossed the sky. The oldest type of clock was a sundial, also called a sun clock. Water clocks worked better than sundials because they told the time at night as well as during the day.  The first practical clock was driven by a pendulum. One problem with pendulum clocks was that they stopped running after a while and had to be restarted. Quartz crystal clocks were invented in 1920.  In Year 5 and Year 6, pupils need to know how to read and write time using the 24-hour system; convert time in fractions and decimals to hours, minutes and seconds; add, subtract, multiply and divide time; calculate the duration of an event; and finally solve problems involving duration of time.  Pedagogical Content Knowledge for this topic is divided into history of time, time zones, saying time correctly and the 24-hour system. This knowledge would equip us with some added information for the teaching and learning of time.  It is important to provide our pupils opportunities to explore and have practical experiences with the concept of time; using physical materials and other representations to help them develop their understanding of it. 24-hour system Analog clock Ante meridiem Digital clock Hour hand Minute hand Post meridiem Time zones
  • 122.
    118  TOPIC6 TIME Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in education workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson Education Asia. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Mathematics KBSR Year 5, siri intensif. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Nur Alia bt. Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Mathematics KBSR Year 6, Siri Intensif. Kuala Lumpur. Penerbitan Fargoes. Peter, C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers. Reys, R. E., Suydam, M. N., & Lindquist, M. M. (1989). Helping children learn mathematics. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Smith, K. J. (2001). The nature of mathematics. US: Thomson Learning. Sunny Yee & Ng, K. H. (2007). A problem solving approach : Mathematics year 2. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
  • 123.
    Topic 7 Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Use the vocabulary related to length, mass and volume of liquids correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 2. Relate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to the length, mass and volume of liquids; 3. Use the vocabulary related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division involving length, mass and volume of liquids correctly; 4. Illustrate the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of length, mass and volume of liquids; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division involving length, mass and volume of liquids.  INTRODUCTION Welcome to a new topic on Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids. I am sure you will agree with me that measurement problems, such as arithmetic problems, are encountered in many different situations in our daily lives. One of the reasons to include measurement in KBSR mathematics is to enable children to work with its many practical applications in real life situations. It is important for children to have opportunities to learn more about measurement. Knowing how children tend to think about measurement helps teachers to guide children's discovery of the principles of measurement.
  • 124.
    120  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS One of the earliest measuring tools invented by man was used to weigh things. Primitive societies needed fundamental measures for daily jobs (for example, constructing homes of an appropriate size and shape, fashioning clothes, or bartering food or raw materials). As man evolved, measurement units became more and more complex. For more sophisticated jobs, it was necessary not only to weigh and measure complex things - it was also necessary to do it accurately time after time and in different places. The need for a single worldwide coordinated measurement system was recognized over 300 years ago. Measures for mass were to be derived from the unit of length. The metric unit of mass, called the “gram” was defined as the mass of one cubic centimetre of water. The name Le Systeme International d’Units (International System of Units), with the international abbreviation SI, was adopted for this modernised metric system. Children can use unconventional items like paper clips to measure lengths, seeds to measure mass and glass containers to measure volume of liquids. However, they need to understand that identical standard units must be used when uniformity in measuring is required. In Year 5 and Year 6, our pupils would have to learn the relationship between centimetres, metres and kilometres, the relationship between kilograms and grams, as well as to estimate the volume of liquids in litres. It is important that our pupils master these concepts and relationships in order to extend their skills to cover addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of units of length, mass and volume of liquids. In the first part of this topic, we will learn about the pedagogical content knowledge of measurement such as the historical notes, the vocabulary, the basic principles, units, and relationship between units of measurement. In the second part of the topic, we will look at the major mathematical skills of measurements for Year 5 and Year 6. Before we conclude this topic, we will learn how to plan and carry out innovative activities to teach the topic of measurement of length, mass and volume of liquids. ACTIVITY 7.1 Think of five reasons why measurement plays an important role in our lives. List the reasons before you compare them with your partner.
  • 125.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  121 PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE Important information regarding the content and pedagogical aspects for teaching measurement covers the following aspects: (a) Historical notes on length, mass and volume of liquids; (b) The basic principles of measurement; (c) The meanings of length, mass and volume of liquids; and (d) Units of length, mass and volume of liquids. Figure 7.1: Some human-referenced units of measurement 7.1 ACTIVITY 7.2 Figure 7.1 shows human-referenced units of measurement. List down four more of such units of measurement that were used in the olden days. You may refer to the following URL : http://www-history.mcs.st-andrews.ac.uk/ HistTopics/Measurement.html
  • 126.
    122  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS 7.1.1 Historical Note on Measurement Measurement has been important ever since man settled from his nomadic lifestyle and started using building materials, occupying land and trading with his neighbours. As society become more technologically orientated much higher accuracies of measurement are now required in an increasingly diverse set of fields, from micro-electronics to interplanetary ranging. Ancient measurement of length was based on the human body (refer to Figure 7.2). There were many different measurement systems developed in early times, most of them only being used in a small locality. One which gained a certain universal nature was that of the Egyptian cubit developed around 3000 BC. Based on the human body, it was taken to be the length of an arm from the elbow to the extended fingertips. A traditional tale tells the story of Henry I (1100-1135) who decreed that the yardstick should be "the distance from the tip of the King's nose to the end of his outstretched thumb". The cubit (finger tip to elbow) The Yardstick (Henry I – thumb to nose) Figure 7.2: Ancient length measurements It had long been realised that a universal standard of measurement was needed, and that it should be a natural constant. The need for a single worldwide coordinated measurement system was recognised over 300 years ago. In 1790, the National Assembly of France requested the French Academy of Sciences to “deduce an invariable standard for all the measures and all the weights.” The Commission that was appointed created a system that was, at once, simple and scientific. Measures for mass were to be derived from the unit of length. Furthermore, the larger and smaller version of each unit was to be created by multiplying and dividing the basic units by 10 and its power. The metric unit of mass, called the “gram” was defined as the mass of one cubic centimetre of water. The name Le Systeme International d’Units (International System of Units), with the international abbreviation SI, was adopted for this modernised metric system.
  • 127.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  123 Figure 7.3: Triple beam balances (Instruments to measure mass) Figure 7.4: Measuring cylinders (Instruments to measure volume of liquids) 7.1.2 The Basic Principles of Measurement Understanding the following basic principles will definitely help us to teach this topic effectively. The four basic principles underlying the measurement of length, mass and volume of liquids are as follows: (a) Comparison principle – This principle deals with comparing and ordering of objects by a specific attribute. It involves using suitable vocabulary to describe and compare: (i) Length such as short, shorter, tall, taller, long, longer, high, higher, deep, deeper, wide, wider, width, depth, height, etc. (ii) Mass such as heavy, heavier, light, lighter, etc. (iii) Volume of liquids such as big volume, bigger volume, small volume, smaller volume
  • 128.
    124  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS (b) Transitivity principle – This principle involves comparing and ordering of three or more objects using appropriate language, e.g. If A is heavier than B and C is heavier than A, then C must be heavier than B, etc. (c) Conservation principle – This principle states that the length, mass or the volume of an object does not change even when the position or the orientation of the object is changed. (d) Measuring principle – This principle refers to the fact that measurement involves stating how many of a given unit match the attribute (e.g. length, mass or volume) of an object. For example, when measuring the mass of a rod, stating the number of kilograms that can be used to weigh it. One other point to note is that there are some conceptual differences between counting and measuring. For instance, when counting the number of pupils in the classroom, the result must be a whole number, i.e. the quantity is discrete. However, when measuring the height of pupils, the result can take on values other than whole numbers, for example, 129.3 cm, etc. Such quantities are called continuous quantities. The number line model can be used to help your pupils to visualise the continuous number scales used in measuring length, mass and volume. 7.1.3 The Meanings of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids Let us look at the meaning of measurement in broad terms. It is associating numbers with physical quantities and so the earliest forms of measurement constituted the first steps towards mathematics. Once “associating numbers with physical objects” was carried out, it became possible to compare the objects by comparing the associated numbers. This led to the development of methods of working with numbers. (a) Length Now, let us take a look at the formal definition of length. The length of an object refers to the number of standard units (e.g. centimetres) which can be laid in a straight line along or beside the object. Length of a coloured ribbon = 6 units
  • 129.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  125 In other words, “length” is the distance between any two points (locations) measured along a straight line. Two lengths can be compared directly by putting them side by side, with one end of each length aligned. In fact, lengths can be measured indirectly by comparing each length with a third length and that third length is a measuring instrument such as a ruler or scale. (b) Mass Do you know how to introduce mass to primary school pupils? For primary school pupils, the concept of mass can be described as the general “heaviness” of an object. Mass is one of the least common forms of measurement used for comparing objects in everyday situations. In fact, it has been found that the concept of mass is quite difficult for children to grasp because mass cannot be seen but has to be held and felt. In other words, the mass of two objects cannot be compared by just seeing them together. Moreover, the mass of an object may not be proportional to its size. A big piece of cotton wool may be lighter than a small piece of metal. Therefore, it is important for us to establish in the minds of children that “a smaller sized object may not necessarily be lighter than a bigger sized object” and vice versa. Scientifically, the terms weight and mass have different meanings. Mass is the measure of the amount of matter in an object whereas weight is the gravitational force (g) acting on that mass. For example, a boy of mass 20 kg has a weight of 200 N (taking g = 10 ms 2 ). However, these two terms are used to mean the same thing. Nevertheless, it is normal to refer to the “weighing of an object” as a process to find its mass. (c) Volume of liquids Volume is literally the “amount of space filled” by an object. But on a practical level, we often want to know about its capacity, how much does a container hold? So, we often measure volume as the number of units it takes to “fill the object”. Figure 7.5 shows a container and a rock. The space that the container surrounds (and is occupied by air) and the space that the rock takes up (and is occupied by elements such as oxygen, silicon and aluminium) are both called volume.
  • 130.
    126  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Volume Volume Container Rock Figure 7.5: Two meanings of volume The concept of volume is tricky. Two objects (like the container and the rock) might occupy the same volume but might contain totally different amounts of matter. Children often confuse the amount of matter, which we call mass, with the space occupied, which we now know is volume. Thus children tell us that a “heavy” object has more volume than a “light” object even though the latter may actually occupy more space. Indeed, volume is so oversimplified in primary schools that many Year 6 pupils think of volume as length width height, no matter what the shape of the object. Others assume that volume is length cubed. Misconceptions such as these are a result of a curriculum that emphasises memorisation of formulas without giving attention to the conceptual foundations of volume. 7.1.4 Units of Length, Mass and Volume of Liquids Now, let us look at how to teach children units of length, mass and volume of liquid. If children are simply told to measure length in a unit like an inch, they develop very little understanding of the basic concept of measurement. Children need the opportunity to understand these basic concepts of measurement. These basic concepts of measurements include: (a) Appropriate units Use units of measurement appropriate to the thing being measured. Units that work for measuring the length of your car porch may not work for measuring the length of your notebook. Units used to measure the mass of a book may not work for measuring the mass of a bus. Similarly, units used to measure the volume of liquid medicine consumed by a sick child may not serve well for measuring the volume of water in a swimming pool.
  • 131.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  127 (b) Non-standard units of measurement Non-standard unit for measurement is any arbitrary measure used as a unit. Some common examples are: (i) Length – body parts such as span, foot, pace and arm length, paper clips; (ii) Mass – objects such as beans, thumb tacks and rubber seeds; (iii) Volume of liquids – containers such as cups, mugs, bottles and tumblers. (c) Standard Units of measurement A standard unit for measurement is any fixed measure that has been accepted as a standard internationally. Some examples include: (i) Yards, miles, feet, inches, metres and kilometres; (ii) Ounces, pounds, grams and kilograms; and (iii) Pints, gallons, litres and cubic metres. Units such as the yard, mile, inch, ounce, pound, pint and gallon are known as Imperial units, whereas the metre, kilometre, gram, kilogram, litre and cubic metre are known as Metric units. However, in the Malaysian school curriculum, only metric units are taught. SELF-CHECK 7.1 1. Describe briefly the four basic principles of measurement. 2. Explain the difference between discrete quantities and continuous quantities. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR MEASUREMENT IN YEAR 5 AND YEAR 6 7.2 Pupils will learn this topic of measurement effectively if we plan the lessons systematically. A well organised conceptual development of length, mass and volume of liquid is essential for our pupils to understand these concepts . It would be advisable to introduce this topic in a less stressful manner. Remember to provide opportunities for pupils to understand the meanings of length, mass and volume of liquid and their respective units. Physical materials and other representations should be used to help children develop their understanding of these concepts.
  • 132.
    128  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of measurement in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: (a) Measuring Length (i) Convert units of length metres to kilometres and vice versa; (ii) Add and subtract units of length involving metres and kilometres; (iii) Multiply and divide units of length involving metres and kilometres; and (iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of length. (b) Comparing Mass (i) Convert units of mass from fractions and decimals of kilogram to grams and vice versa; (ii) Add and subtract units of mass involving grams and kilograms; (iii) Multiply and divide units of mass involving grams and kilograms; and (iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of mass. (c) Comparing Volume of Liquids (i) Convert units of volume involving fractions and decimals of litres to millilitres and vice versa; (ii) Add and subtract units of volume involving millilitres and litres; (iii) Multiply and divide units of volume involving millilitres and litres; and (iv) Solve problems in real context involving computation of units of volume of liquids. Next, we move on to the teaching and learning activities on length, mass and volume of a liquids. Let us consider Activity 7.3 first.
  • 133.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  129 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 7.3 7.3.1 Length ACTIVITY 7.3 Learning Outcomes:  To convert metre to kilometre and vice versa; and  To convert units of length from fractions and decimals of kilometres to metres and vice versa. Materials:  Task Cards; and  Answer Sheets. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of six pupils and give each pupil an Answer Sheet. 2. Ask pupils to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 3. Ask them to shuffle Six Task Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Ask each player to begin by drawing a card from the stack. 5. Ask the players to write all the answers to the questions in the card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils in the group exchange the card with the pupil on their left in clockwise direction. 7. Ask the pupils to repeat steps (5 and 6) until all the pupils in the group have answered questions in all the cards. 8. The winner is the pupil that has the most number of correct answers. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of length.
  • 134.
    130  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of an Answer Sheet: Name :________________________ Class :______________________ Card A Card B Card C 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ Card D Card E Card E 1.________________ 1.________________ 1.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 2.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ 3.________________ Example of a Task Card: Task Card A 1. Convert metres to kilometres. 8492 m = _______________ km 2. Convert kilometres to metres. 7,125 km = ______________ m 3. Calculate the fraction of length. 2 of 27 km = ___________ m 9 ACTIVITY 7.4 Work with a friend in class to prepare five more Task Cards. There should be three questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.3.
  • 135.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  131 7.3.2 Basic Operations on Length ACTIVITY 7.5 Learning Outcomes:  To add units of length in metres and kilometres;  To subtract units of length in metres and kilometres;  To multiply units of length in metres and kilometres; and  To divide units of length in metres and kilometres. Materials:  30 different Flash Cards; and  Clean writing papers. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of three pupils and give each group a clean writing paper. 2. Ask the pupils to write their names on the clean paper given. 3. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Asks Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the card to Player B. 5. Asks Player B to do the calculations and read out the answers within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 6. Asks Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 4 points for each Flash Card). 7. Ask the Players to repeat steps (4 and 5) until 10 cards are drawn by Player A. 8. Steps (3 through 6) are repeated until all the players have the opportunity to read and complete the questions on all 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 9. The winner in the group is the pupil that has the most number of points. 10. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic operations on length .
  • 136.
    132  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of a Flash Card: Flash Card 1 1. Add the following: 1.8 km + 870 m = ________ km 2. Subtract the following: 4.82 km – 1 293 m = ________ m 3. Multiply the following: 2.34 km  4 = _______ m 4. Divide the following: 4 992  8 = _________ km ACTIVITY 7.6 Work with three friends of yours in class to prepare another 29 Flash Cards. There should be four questions in each Flash Card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.5.
  • 137.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  133 7.3.3 Mass ACTIVITY 7.7 Learning Outcomes:  To convert units of mass from fractions and decimals of a kilogram to grams and vice versa;  To add and subtract units of mass in grams and kilograms: and  To multiply and divide units of mass in grams and kilograms. Materials:  Task Sheets;  Clean writing papers; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four to six pupils and give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom and places a Task Sheet at each station. 3. The teacher instructs pupils to solve the questions in the Task Sheet at each station. 4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the next station in the clockwise direction. 6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct answers) is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of mass and how to do basic operations on mass. ACTIVITY 1
  • 138.
    134  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of a Task Sheet: STATION 1 1. Convert the following to gram: (a) 2 kg = _______ g 5 (b) 0.64 kg = ______ g 2. Convert the following to kilogram: (a) 250 g = ________ kg (b) 8 015 g = ________ kg 3. Add and subtract the following: (a) 7.27 kg + 1 025 g = _________ kg (b) 0.137 kg – 55 g = ___________ g 4. Multiply and divide the following: (a) 6.32 g  100 = ________ kg (b) 654  100 = _________ g ACTIVITY 7.8 Work with two of your friends to prepare another four Task Sheets for the other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.7.
  • 139.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  135 7.3.4 Problem Solving Involving Mass ACTIVITY 7.9 Learning Outcomes:  To solve problems involving conversion of units of mass in fractions and decimals; and  To solve problems involving computation of mass. Materials:  Activity Cards;  Clean writing papers; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. Shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Signal to the pupils to begin solving the questions in the first Activity Card drawn. 4. Once they are done with the first Card, they may continue with the next Activity Card. 5. Ask the groups to stop and hand their answer paper to the teacher at the end of 10 minutes. 6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real contexts involving computation of mass. ACTIVITY 1
  • 140.
    136  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of an Activity Card: Activity Card 1 1. The combined mass of a watermelon and a comb of bananas is 4.8 kg. If the mass of the watermelon is 2.2 kg, what is the mass of the bananas? The mass of the banana is _____________ kg. 2. The mass of a book is 430 g. Find the total mass of 7 similar books in kg. The mass of the books is _________ kg. 3. En. Mahmud filled 8.4 kg of prawns into 4 containers. What is the mass of prawns (in grams) in each container ? The mass of prawns in each container is _________ g. 4. Box A weighs 5 kg. The mass of Box B is 2 1 times the mass 5 of Box A. Find the mass, in kg, of Box B. The mass of Box B is ___________ kg. ACTIVITY 7.10 Prepare 11 more Activity Cards for the group. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.9
  • 141.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  137 7.3.5 Volume of Liquids ACTIVITY 7.11 Learning Outcomes:  To convert units of volume involving fractions and decimals of litres to millilitres and vice versa;  To add and subtract units of volume in litres and millilitres; and  To multiply and divide units of volume in litres and millilitres. Materials:  Exercise Sheets; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of two pupils and give each group a different colour pencil. 2. Give each group an Exercise Sheet with four questions. 3. Instruct them to answer the questions in the Exercise Sheet. 3. The group that finishes first with all correct answers is the winner. 4. Teacher summarises the lesson on the basic facts of volume of liquids and how to do basic operations on volume of liquids.
  • 142.
    138  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of an Exercise Sheet: Exercise Sheet A 1. Convert the following to millilitres: (a) 1 litres = ______ millilitres. 4 (b) 3 litres = ______ millilitres. 5 2. Convert the following to litres: (a) 1 008 millilitres = ________ litres. (b) 555 millilitres = ________ litres. 3. Add and subtract the following: (a) 5.723 litres (b) 17.536 litres + 2.758 litres - 9.043 litres 4. Multiply and divide the following: (a) 7.424 litres (b) 3 49.623 millilitres  5 ACTIVITY 7.12 Prepare 10 more Exercise Sheets for the group activity. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your Exercise Sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.11.
  • 143.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  139 7.3.6 Problem Solving Involving Volume of Liquids ACTIVITY 7.13 Learning Outcomes:  To solve problems involving conversion of units of volume in fractions and decimals; and  To solve problems involving computation of volume of liquids. Materials:  Volume Worksheets;  Clean writing papers; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into ten groups and give each group a Volume Worksheet, clean writing paper and a colour pencil. 2. The teacher instructs the groups to answer all the questions in the Volume Worksheet. 3. The group answers on the clean writing paper provided. 4. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the teacher instructs the groups to exchange the Volume Worksheets. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. 6. Once all the 10 Volume Worksheets have been answered, teacher collects the answer papers and corrects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real contexts involving computation of units of volume of liquids.
  • 144.
    140  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Example of a Volume Worksheet: VOLUME WORKSHEET 1 1 A container has a capacity of 2.75 litres. How many millilitres of water does Mary need to fill up the container? Mary needs ________ of water to fill up the container. 2. Mrs. Chong needs 25.35 litres of water to clean the floor every day. How much water does she need in a week? She needs ________ of water in a week. 3. Miss Siew bought 4.25 litres of soy sauce. She used the soy sauce to cook food in her restaurant and has 745 millilitres of soy sauce left. Find the volume of soy sauce that she used. She used __________ of soy sauce. 4. Ahmad has a bottle of orange juice. He pours the juice equally into 20 glasses. Each glass contains 50 millilitres of juice. What is the volume of orange juice, in millilitres, contained in the bottle? The bottle contains ________ millilitres of orange juice. ACTIVITY 7.14 Prepare nine more Volume Worksheets for the group. There should be four questions in each worksheet. Make sure your worksheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 7.13.
  • 145.
    TOPIC 7 LENGTH,MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS  141  Including measurements in KBSR mathematics is important because it has many practical applications in real life situations.  Ancient measurement of length was based on the human body.  The four basic principles underlying the measurement of length, mass and volume of liquids are comparison principle, transitivity principle, conservation principle and measuring principle.  Measuring quantities are continuous quantities whereas counting quantities are discrete quantities.  The length of an object refers to the number of standard units (e.g. centimetres) which can be laid in a straight line along or beside the object. In other words, length is the distance between any two points (locations) measured along a straight line.  The concept of mass can be described as the general heaviness of an object. Scientifically, the terms weight and mass have different meanings. Mass is the measure of the amount of matter in an object whereas weight is the gravitational force acting on that mass.  Volume is literally the amount of space filled by an object. But on a practical level, we often want to know about capacity, how much does a container hold? So, we often measure volume as the number of units it takes to fill the object.  These basic concepts of measurements include appropriate units, non-standard units of measurements and standard units of measurement.  Units such as the yard, mile, inch, ounce, pound, pint and gallon are known as Imperial units, whereas the metre, kilometre, gram, kilogram, litre and cubic metre are known as Metric units.
  • 146.
    142  TOPIC7 LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME OF LIQUIDS Addition Capacity Continuous quantities Discrete quantities Division Imperial units Litre Mass Metric units Multiplication Subtraction Weight Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 3. Petaling Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. Bahagian Pendidikan Guru (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan pembelajaran matematik: Ukuran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini (2008). Siri Intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson Education Asia. Peter, C. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers. Sunny Yee & Ng, K. H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics Year 2. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication. Sunny Yee & Lau, P.H. (2007). A problem solving approach: Mathematics Year 3. Subang Jaya: Andaman Publication.
  • 147.
    Topic 8 Shape and Space LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the importance of developing the basics of measurements as preskills to the learning of perimeter and area; 2. Show how to use the vocabulary related to perimeter, area and volume of solids correctly; 3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to perimeter, area and volume of solids; and 4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for perimeter, area and volume of solids.  INTRODUCTION Children typically enjoy learning the topics in geometry because they can relate what they learn to what they explore in the real world. Learning about geometric properties and shapes helps them to make sense of their environment as they become more capable of describing their world. As a result, they find the subject interesting and therefore, are motivated to learn it.
  • 148.
    144  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE ACTIVITY 8.1 “Geometry offers pupils an aspect of mathematical thinking that is different from, but connected to, the world of numbers ... Some pupils’ capabilities with geometric and spatial concepts exceed their numerical skills. Building on these strengths foster enthusiasm for mathematics and provides a context in which to develop number and other mathematical concepts.” (NCTM, 2000, p.97). Discuss the truth of this statement in our Malaysian context. PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 8.1 Two Dutch teachers, Dina and Pierre van Hiele, have developed the van Hiele model for children to learn geometry. The van Hieles were concerned about the difficulties their pupils were having with geometry (Geddes & Fortunato, 1993). They conducted research aimed at understanding children’s level of geometric thinking to determine the kinds of instructions that could best help children learn geometry. A brief description of their work can be found in the OUM module, “HBMT2103 Teaching of Mathematics for Year Two Primary School”. Thus, it is important for teachers to assess the thinking of the children in their classes based on the van Hiele levels and use this information to plan instruction on shape and space that is suitable and relevant to the children’s level of thinking. ACTIVITY 8.2 Examine the chapter on Shape and Space in a textbook and describe it in relation to the van Hiele levels. 8.1.1 Geometric Formulas Formulas for area, perimeter, volume and surface area are introduced in Year 5 and 6. While formulas are necessary and useful tools for measuring, they should not take the place of careful development of the attributes and the measuring process. One skill that needs to be developed in children learning about perimeter and area is that of making the correct choice of formula when calculating perimeter and area. Equally important is that children need to see how the formulas are derived. This is to enable children to build understanding of the meaning of the perimeter and area formulas.
  • 149.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  145 8.1.2 Perimeter and Area Let us now discuss how to teach perimeter and area. (a) Perimeter The perimeter of a shape is the distance all the way round its edges. Perimeter is measured using the same unit as in the measurement of length such as centimetres, feet or metres. The measurements needed to calculate perimeter depends on the shape. For a rectangle you will need to know the length and width of the shape. (It is usual to call the longest side the length and the shortest the width or breadth.) Example: The diagram below represents a pen for Badrul's goats. How much netting does he need to go round the plot? All measurements are in metres. Tell the pupils that in a rectangle the opposite sides are equal, so to work out the perimeter of Badrul’s pen, you just need to know the length and width. Here the length is 5 m and the width is 4 m. Method 1 Length = 5 m and width = 4 m Perimeter = 5 + 4 + 5 + 4 = 18 m Method 2 Because opposite sides are equal you can also work out the perimeter in this way: double the length, double the width, then add the results together. (5 x 2) + (4 x 2) = 10 + 8 = 18 m Method 3 Add the length and width then double it. 5 + 4 = 9 m 9 m x 2 = 18 m
  • 150.
    146  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE All three methods will give you the same answer. From the above example we can show children how the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle is derived. (b) Area The area of a shape is the amount of surface enclosed in a plane. We do not actually measure area by measuring the length. In most cases, we measure some combination of lengths and use them in a formula to calculate the area. As such, the teaching and learning of area consist of two parts. The first part consists of developing the concepts of area and unit of area. The second part consists of the development of the area formulas. The concept of area should be developed first by making gross comparisons of areas of different shapes. Comparisons of area are more complex than comparisons of length. When comparing areas, we must take into account length, width, and shape. When the following shapes are compared, children may have problems deciding which has a bigger area because one shape is longer and the other is wider. Hence, this forces the child to think beyond one dimension. A B One way to check the comparison is to cut shape A into two parts and rearrange them on top of shape B. Then it can be easily seen that B has a bigger area than A. A B The unit of measurement for areas is called square units. If you use metres to make your measurement, the area will be measured in square metres (m²). If centimetres are used, the area will be in square centimetres (cm²). Children need to know that the symbol m2 is read “square meter” and not “meter square”.
  • 151.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  147 Children can become familiar with square centimetres (cm2) by using centimetre graph paper (Horak & Horak, 1982). One task is to find the approximate area of their hand by tracing it on a graph paper and counting the unit squares. Children can also be asked to count the number of square centimetres enclosing specific rectangles and polygons. Let us go through the following example in the class. Example: This square measures 1cm long and 1cm wide. It is 1 square centimetre (cm²). A rectangle drawn on the 1 cm² paper below is 3 cm long and 2 cm wide. Count the number of 1 cm squares. There are 6 squares. So the area of the rectangle is 6 cm². 8.1.3 Volume Volume is a measure of the amount of space inside a three-dimensional region, or the amount of space occupied by a three-dimensional object. It is measured in cubic units such as cubic centimetres (cm³) or cubic metres (m³). The Imperial system uses units such as cubic feet (ft³). One cubic centimetre (cm3) is the measure of a cube having an edge with a length of 1 cm. To introduce the concept of volume, you might hold up two solid rectangular prisms and ask which is “bigger”. The discussion should lead to the question of which occupies more space. Two empty shoe boxes, one of which fits within the other, can be used for direct comparison of volume. You can also show samples of objects made up of units of cubic centimetres (cm3) and have the children count the number of unit cubes it contains to determine its volume.
  • 152.
    148  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE Each of the following diagrams represents a shape made from unit cubes. SELF-CHECK 8.1 1. Why is the comparison of area more complex than comparison of different length? 2. Explain how you would introduce the concept of volume and its unit of measurement. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR SHAPES 8.2 The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of shapes are as follows: (a) Measure the perimeter of the following composite 2-D shapes: (i) Square and square (ii) Rectangle and rectangle (iii) Triangle and triangle (iv) Square and rectangle (v) Square and triangle (vi) Rectangle and triangle (b) Calculate the perimeter of the following composite 2-D shapes: (i) Square and square (ii) Rectangle and rectangle (iii) Triangle and triangle (iv) Square and rectangle (v) Square and triangle
  • 153.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  149 (vi) Rectangle and triangle (c) Solve problems involving perimeters of composite 2-D shapes. (d) Measure the area of the following composite 2-D shapes: (i) Square and square (ii) Rectangle and rectangle (iii) Square and rectangle (e) Calculate the area of the following composite 2-D shapes: (i) Square and square (ii) Rectangle and rectangle (iii) Square and rectangle (f) Solve problems involving areas of composite 2-D shapes. (g) Measure the volume of the following composite 3-D shapes: (i) A cube and another cube (ii) A cuboid and another cuboid (iii) A cube and a cuboid (h) Calculate the volume of the following composite 3-D shapes: (i) A cube and another cube (ii) A cuboid and another cuboid (iii) A cube and a cuboid (i) Solve problems involving volume of composite 3-D shapes. (j) Find the perimeter of a 2-D composite shape of two or more quadrilaterals and triangles. (k) Find the area of a 2-D composite shape of two or more quadrilaterals and triangles. (l) Solve problems in real contexts involving calculation of perimeter and area of 2-D shapes.
  • 154.
    150  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE (m) Find the surface area of a 3-D composite shape of two or more cubes and cuboids. (n) Find the volume of a 3-D composite shape of two or more cubes and cuboids. (o) Solve problems in real contexts involving calculations of surface areas and volumes of 3-D shapes TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 8.3 In this section, we demonstrate to you some teaching and learning activities that can be used in the classroom to teach the topic Space and Shape. 8.3.1 Finding the Perimeter ACTIVITY 8.3 Learning Outcome:  To develop the concept of perimeter. Materials:  Clean writing papers; and  A variety of large regular and irregular shapes taped on the floor of the classroom. Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some clean writing paper. 3. Tape a variety of large regular and irregular shapes on the floor of the classroom.
  • 155.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  151 4. Instruct the pupils in their team walk around the edge of each of the shapes on the floor. 5. Ask pupils to keep a record of the number of steps they take as they walk along each of the edges of the shape. 6. Have pupils post their “walk around” numbers for each of the shapes using each of the sides as an addend, for example 6 + 6 + 6 steps for an equilateral triangle. 7. Ask the pupils to look for patterns in the measurement of each side, for example all of the sides of a square are of the same length and that a rectangle has two long sides and two short sides. 8. Ask pupils to write a sentence using words instead of numbers for the perimeter of each figure. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson and introduces the concept that perimeter is the measure of the distance around a closed figure.
  • 156.
    152  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE ACTIVITY 8.4 Learning Outcome:  To reinforce the concept of perimeter. Materials:  Graph paper (cm square); and  Strings, ruler, pins. Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some graph papers, strings, ruler and pins. 3. Cut a string 14 cm long and ask the children “How many different rectangles can you make with a perimeter of 14 cm?” 4. Using the graph paper, string and pins, demonstrate to the class how you can make a rectangle with a perimeter of 14 cm. Remind the children to keep the sides (in cm) a whole number. 5. Ask the children to explore other rectangles with a perimeter of 14 cm. P = 14 6. Repeat steps (3) through (5) for rectangles with a perimeter of 20 cm. What about rectangles with a perimeter of 13 cm? 7. The teacher summarises the lesson on finding perimeter.
  • 157.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  153 ACTIVITY 8.5 Learning Outcome:  To practise finding perimeters. Materials:  Squares of sides 2 cm; and  Clean writing papers. Procedures: 1. Dive the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some squares and some clean writing paper. 3. Take four squares of sides 2 cm. Ask the children, “How many figures can you make by putting the squares side by side?” Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 are some possible examples. Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 4. Allow the children to explore and draw as many figures as possible. 5. For each of the figures drawn, ask the children to calculate its perimeter. Example: Perimeter of Figure 1 = 20 cm Perimeter of Figure 2 = 22 cm Perimeter of Figure 3 = 24 cm 6. Repeat steps (3) through (5) for five, six and eight squares. 7. The teacher summarises the lesson on finding perimeter.
  • 158.
    154  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE 8.3.2 Finding Area ACTIVITY 8.6 Learning Outcome:  To develop the concept of area of a rectangle. Materials:  Clean writing papers; and  Rectangular cards. Procedures: 1. Display a rectangle (15 cm by 6 cm). 2. Ask a pupil to come forward to measure the length and the width of the rectangle. Label the rectangle. 6 cm 15 cm 3. Ask another pupil to seperate the rectangle into 1 cm squares, as shown below: 15 cm
  • 159.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  155 4. Have another pupil count the number of squares in the rectangle. 5. Discuss with the pupils that each of the square is 1 cm2. Since a total of 90 squares were used to cover the rectangle, the area of the rectangle is 90 cm2. 6. Point out to the pupils that the length is the same as the number of squares in one row, and the width is the same as the number of rows of squares. 7. So, instead of counting the number of squares, the area of the rectangle can be found by multiplying the length and the width (or breath) of the rectangle. The area of a rectangle = Length x Width 8. Ask the pupils to work on more examples of calculating area of rectangles.
  • 160.
    156  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE ACTIVITY 8.7 Learning Outcome:  To reinforce the concept of area. Materials:  A deck of cards, some showing a rectangle with its sides labeled and the others showing the product of the two sides. Example: 12 cm 32 cm Area = 12 x 32 cm2 1.6 m 0.8 m Area = 1.6 x 0.8 m2 Procedures: 1. Prepare cards, some showing a rectangle with its sides labeled and others showing the product of the two sides. 2. Hand a card to each child. 3. Have the children holding the card with the rectangle calculate its area. 4. Have the children find their partners holding the card showing the calculation of its area. 5. If there is an odd number of children, you should take a card and participate so that everyone has a partner. 6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see each other’s card. Have the children check everyone’s calculation of the area. Are the partners correctly paired? 7. Hand out a Task Sheet and have the children work out the area of the rectangles.
  • 161.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  157 8.3.3 Finding Volume ACTIVITY 8.8 Learning Outcome:  To introduce the concept of volume. Materials:  A variety of boxes of different sizes and shapes. Procedures: 1. Choose two boxes from the collection of boxes of different sizes and shapes. 2. Ask the pupils which will hold the most. 3. Repeat this process with several pairs of boxes. If the pupils are unable to decide which of the pair of boxes is bigger, set the pair of boxes aside. 4. Pick out one of the pairs of boxes for which the pupils were unable to identify the bigger box. 5. Conduct a brainstorming session, asking pupils to think of ways to decide which box is bigger. Remind them that the bigger box is the one that would hold more. 6. Write every suggestion on the chalkboard, regardless of how reasonable or how practical it is. Then ask the pupils to decide which methods are most reasonable. 7. Then, try some of the suggested methods to see if it works to determine the bigger box.
  • 162.
    158  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE ACTIVITY 8.9 Learning Outcome:  To introduce the formula for calculating the volume of a cuboid. Materials:  Boxes of fixed volume; and  Unit cm3 cubes. Procedures: 1. Divide the class into groups of four. 2. Give each group some unit cm3 cubes and a box (cuboid) of fixed volume. Example: A small box measuring 15 cm by 5 cm by 2 cm. 3. Have each group fill their cuboid with cubes to see how many unit cm3 cubes are needed. The number of cubes needed to fill the cuboid is the volume of the cuboid. 4. Conduct a brainstorming session, asking pupils to think of ways to calculate the volume of a cuboid instead of counting the cubes needed to fill the cuboid. 5. Write every suggestion on the chalkboard, regardless of how reasonable or how practical it is. Then ask the pupils to decide which method is the most reasonable. 6. Using the following example, the teacher leads the pupil to derive the formula for calculating the volume of a cube and cuboid. Example Each of these two cuboids has the same volume, 8 cm³, and the same dimensions: length 4 cm, width 2 cm, height 1 cm. The volume of the first can be found by counting the unit cubes. The volume of the second is found using the rule: Volume of a cuboid = length x width x height
  • 163.
    TOPIC 8 SHAPEAND SPACE  159 The dimensions of a cube are all the same, so the rule for finding the volume is: Volume of a cube = length x length x length = length³ Hand out a Task Sheet and have the pupils work out the volume of cubes and cuboids. SELF-CHECK 8.2 1. Design a teaching activity to introduce the standard measurement of area. 2. Write a lesson plan to introduce the formula for calculating the perimeter of a rectangle.  It is important for teachers to assess the geometrical thinking of the children in their classroom based on Dina and Pierre van Hiele’s levels of thinking. This information can then be used to plan instruction on shape and space that is suitable and relevant to the children’s level of thinking.  While formulae are necessary and useful tools for calculating perimeter and area, they should not take the place of careful development of these attributes and the activities and processes that lead to the development of the formulas.  The area of a shape is the amount of surface enclosed in a plane. We do not actually measure area as in measuring length. In most cases, we measure some combination of lengths and use them in a formula to calculate the area.  The teaching and learning of area consist of two parts. The first part consists of developing the concepts of area and unit of area. The second part consists of the development of the area formulas.  To introduce the concept of volume, hold up two solid rectangular prisms and ask which is “bigger”. The discussion should lead to the question of which occupies more space.
  • 164.
    160  TOPIC8 SHAPE AND SPACE Area Perimeter Quadrilaterals Triangles Volume Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. US: Allyn & Wadsworth. Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington, DC: Heath and Company. Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and middle schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • 165.
    Topic 9 Averages LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain that average is a measure of central tendency and it describes what is “typical” of a set of data; 2. Use the vocabulary related to averages correctly; 3. List the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to averages; and 4. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for averages.  INTRODUCTION Data are all around us. Indeed, sometimes there is so much data that children can become overwhelmed. Beside examining a set of data by looking at graphs and tables, it is often convenient to describe a set of data by choosing a single number that indicates where the data in the set are centred or concentrated. The number most commonly used to characterise a set of data is the arithmetic mean, frequently called the average. ACTIVITY 9.1 Examine the following set of data for three teachers. All of them claim that his or her class scored better than the other two classes. Cikgu Ahmad: 40, 62, 85, 99, 99 Miss Lee: 20, 84, 85, 98, 98 Mr Sivanesan: 59, 59, 78, 89, 100 Are these teachers correct in their assertions? Discuss it.
  • 166.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 162 PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 9.1 The average value is a number that is typical for a set of data. The average is like the middle point of a set of numbers. Finding the average helps you do calculations and also makes it possible to compare sets of numbers. Figure 9.1: Weekly shopping For example, you might spend between RM20 and RM90 a week on shopping (refer to Figure 9.1). Finding the average amount you have spent per week will help you plan your month's spending. The average weekly expenditure gives you an idea of whether you are spending more or less than you plan to. ACTIVITY 9.2 Calculating the mean temperature. Choose your town and select a full five day weather forecast. Use the data to calculate the mean temperature. Now, we move on to learn on how to conduct teaching of averages. 9.1.1 Teaching Averages A good introduction might be to have pupils engage in a discussion about “being average” (Paull, 1990). What does it mean to be “an average pupil”? Is being average something good or bad?
  • 167.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 163 An understanding of average can be developed through using concrete materials and visual manipulation (Rubenstein, 1989). For example, using interlocking cubes, ask pupils to build two towers. Figure 9.2: Interlocking cubes Build a tower with seven cubes and another with five cubes (see Figure 9.2). They can now discuss what they would have to do to make both towers the same height, using only the cubes they have used to construct the towers. As a teacher, you advise the pupils, to make both towers the same height, they have to find the total number of interlocking cubes used in building both towers. Next, the pupils will have to divide the total number of cubes by two. By doing the calculation, the pupils will understand the concept of average and also the method of calculating averages. After several examples with two towers of interlocking cubes, pupils can then use the same strategy in determining the average heights of three or four towers. As an extension to the above activity, pupils can attempt to apply the process and discuss a situation in which the cubes cannot be equally shared. Allow the pupils to use their own language in their discussion, but the end result should be an understanding that the average is simply one number that describes or characterizes all the numbers in the data set. Once the pupils understand the concept, provide them with more activities that reinforces their understanding of averages. 9.1.2 Measures of Central Tendency Measures of central tendency describe what is “typical” in a set of data. There are three types or measures of central tendency. They are the arithmetical average (mean), mode and median.
  • 168.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 164 (a) The Average This section illustrates how to teach your pupils the average. Do you know what is the arithmetical average? The arithmetical average is the most commonly used measure of central tendency. It is calculated by dividing the sum of a set of numbers by the number of numbers in the set. When people talk about the average of something, like average price, average wage or average height, they are usually talking about the mean value. The mean value of the weekly spending shown in the graph as indicated in Figure 9.1 is RM46. The calculation is as follows: Mean spending = RM20 + RM40 + RM30 + RM90 + RM50 ---------------------------------------------------- 5 = RM230 --------- 5 = RM46 Can you see that the value is located about the middle of the five different amounts shown? The average can be useful for comparing things. For example you can find the average height for the pupils in your class. When you compare the averages of two classes you are comparing the average height of the pupils in the two classes. Sometimes averages may give a false impression of the figures. In that case the average is said to be distorted. Example: The mean annual salary earned in a pharmaceutical store is RM42,200. You might like the idea of working for the store! But let us look at the figures: Employee 1 earns RM8,000 per annum Employee 2 earns RM11,000 per annum Employee 3 earns RM9,000 per annum
  • 169.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 165 Employee 4 earns RM 8,000 per annum The Manager of the store earns RM175,000 per annum Because the Manager earns a lot more than the employees, his/her salary raises the mean salary. Let us do the calculation: The total of the wages : RM8,000 + RM11,000 + RM9,000 + RM8,000 + RM175,000 = RM211,000 Then divide the total amount by 5, the number of people: RM211,000 ÷ 5 = RM42,200 The average salary is RM42,200. But most of the staff earn a lot less than this. Most employees earn less than the mean salary. For this reason we say that the mean is distorted. (b) The Mode A second measure of central tendency is the mode. The concept of the mode, but not the term, is introduced informally in a child’s early school experience. When a child makes statements like: “April has the most number of public holidays.” “Most members of the class like white coffee.” “Blue seems to be their favourite colour.” The mode is the name of another type of average. The mode is the most common item in a set of data. It is the number or thing that appears most often. Sometimes one or two values in a data set can distort the “typical” value described by the average as in the example mentioned above. In this case, the mode is the preferred measure of central tendency. Example: The mode for the annual salary for the staff of the pharmaceutical store is RM8,000. That is because two out of five of the employees earn RM8,000 per annum. (c) The Median Another measure of the central tendency is the median. The median is the middle number in a set of numbers recorded in ascending manner. It is the mid-point when the numbers are written out in order. The concept of the median can be easily modelled. In the example above, arrange the salary in ascending order: First put the numbers in order. This makes it easier to find the median.
  • 170.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 166 RM8,000; RM8,000; RM9,000; RM11,000; RM175,000 You can now see that RM9,000 is the middle number. It is half way along the list. So the median of this set of data is RM9,000. The mean is RM42,200. This is misleading as it is much higher than most of the employees’ salaries. The median value is the middle one in the list. The median salary is RM9,000. This is a good indication of the general level of the staff salaries. SELF-CHECK 9.1 1. Explain the meaning of average. 2. Using an example, explain why average may not be a good measure of central tendency. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR AVERAGES 9.2 The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic on averages are as follows: (a) Describe the meaning of average. (b) State the average of two or three quantities. (c) Determine the formula for average. (d) Calculate the average using a formula. (e) Calculate the average of up to five numbers. (f) Solve problems in real life situations involving average.
  • 171.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 167 TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 9.3 This section highlights the teaching and learning activities for you to conduct a lesson on the topic of average in the classroom. 9.3.1 Meaning of Average ACTIVITIY 9.3 Learning Outcome:  To describe the meaning of average. Materials:  Interlocking blocks Procedures: 1. In a place visible to all pupils, and using 15 interlocking blocks arrange five stacks of blocks as illustrated below. 2. Discuss with the children the number of blocks in each stack. 3. Demonstrate the meaning of average by having a pupil remove enough blocks from the tallest stack to put atop the shortest stack so that both stacks match the middle stack. 4. Have another pupil do the same with the second and fourth stacks.
  • 172.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 168 5. Ask the children, “Are all the five stacks of the same height?” [Yes] “How many blocks are there in each stack?”[3] “Does each stack have the same number of blocks?”[Yes] 6. The teacher explains by saying, Each stack has three blocks; three is the average of the set of blocks. 7. Repeat step (1) through (6) using different number of stacks and different number of blocks in each stack. ACTIVITY 9.4 Learning Outcome:  To investigate the addition-division process for determining average. Materials:  Task Sheet; and  Interlocking blocks. Procedures: 1. Using 15 interlocking blocks arrange five stacks of blocks as illustrated below (as in Activity 1). 2. Have the children demonstrate the meaning of average by having a pupil remove enough blocks from the tallest stack to put atop the shortest stack so that both stacks match the middle stack.
  • 173.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 169 3. Have another student do the same with the second and fourth stacks. 4. The teacher explains the concept of average by saying, “In the example, average means having all the highs and low stacks evened out until all the stacks are of the same height. Each stack has three blocks and three is the average of the set of blocks.” 5. Instruct the children to form groups of four. 6. Instruct the children to discuss how to determine the average for the blocks without shifting blocks from one stack to another. 7. Using the children’s thinking as the basis for discussion, guide the children learn the addition-division process of determining the average. 8. The teacher explains the steps involved in finding average by saying, “The average for the blocks is determined by adding 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = 15; 15 5 = 3.” 9. Then teacher introduces the formula for finding average: 10. Give the Task Sheets and ask students to complete it
  • 174.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 170 TASK SHEET The average is calculated by adding up the item values and dividing it by the number of items. 1. Calculate the average of the following numbers. (a) 132, 246 and 174 (b) 1345, 1080, 1605 and 1830 (c) 156, 145, 556, 3352 and 4488 (d) 14.3, 9.68, and 8.7 (e) 20.36, 13.6, 22.44 and 45.6 (f) 23.4, 7.4, 46.1, 18.3 and 5.6 2. Calculate the average of the following quantities. (a) 45 kg, 48 kg, 52 kg, and 43 kg (b) RM675, RM725, RM750, and RM775 (c) 900 mℓ, 950 mℓ, 1050 mℓ and 1200 mℓ (d) 13.5 m, 6.3 m, 14 m and 84.1 m (e) 19.6 cm3 , 600 cm3 , 198 cm3 and 129.8 cm3 (f) 86.6 ℓ, 43 ℓ, 51.3 ℓ, 61 ℓ and 44.6 ℓ.
  • 175.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 171 9.3.2 Calculating Average Learning Outcome:  To practise calculating averages. Materials:  A deck of cards comprising sets of numbers and answers; and Example:  Clean writing papers. Procedures: 1. Prepare cards, some with sets of numbers and some with the average of the sets of numbers. 2. Hand a card to each child. 3. Ask the children who are holding the cards with the sets of numbers to calculate the average. 4. Ask the children to find their partners who are holding the calculated averages. 5. If there is an odd number of children, you should take a card and participate so that everyone has a partner. 6. Have the partners stand together so that everyone can see each other’s cards. Have the children check everyone’s calculation of the average. Are the partners correctly paired? 7. Distribute the Task Sheets and have the children work out the answer. 4.66, 9, 0.12, and 13.5 8604, 777, 20, 1639 and 535 2315 6.82 ACTIVITIY 9.5
  • 176.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 172 ACTIVITY 9.5 TASK SHEET The average is calculated by adding up the item values and dividing it by the number of items. 1. Calculate the average of the following numbers. (a) 79, 105, 211, 234 and 81 (b) 100, 2000, 250,139 and 1331 (c) 7511, 1380, 4, 22, and 28 2. Solve the following problems. (a) The sum of five numbers is 78 140. What is their average? (b) The average of four numbers is 265.7. What is the sum of the four numbers? (c) The average of 55, 219, 7, 77 and X is 134. Find the value of X. (d) Pak Hanif bought 4 watermelons. The masses of the watermelons were 4.45 kg, 3.2 kg, 5.6 kg and 3.85 kg. What is the average mass of the watermelons? (e) The KL Monorail transported a total of 23 568 passengers from KL Central to Bukit Bintang station over three days. What is the average number of passengers transported in a day over the three day period?
  • 177.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 173 ACTIVITIY 9.6 Learning Outcome:  To practise calculating averages. Materials:  A deck of cards comprising sets of numbers and answers. a Example: 830, 1000 and 960 930 24.3 and 10.7 17.5  Clean writing papers Procedures: 1. Prepare cards, some with sets of numbers and some with the average of the sets of numbers. 2. Place the answer cards (grey cards) in a circle on the floor. 3. Have the children march around the circle of answer cards on the floor, chanting this rhyme: Marching, marching, ‘round we go, Not too fast and not too slow. We won’t run and we won’t hop, We’re almost there, it’s time to stop. 4. When the rhyme is finished, hold up a question card and ask the children to find the average of the set of numbers shown on the card. 5. The child who is standing by the answer card with the correct calculated average, picks up the answer card and shows it to the rest of the children. 6. Have the children check his or her answer. Is she or he correct? 7. Repeat the procedure several times or until all the answer cards have been picked up.
  • 178.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 174 ACTIVITY 9.7 Learning Outcome:  To practise calculating averages. Materials:  Four lists of questions on finding averages. Some of the questions may be the same on each list.  Answers to the averages. Example: List 1 Calculate the average of the following numbers. 1. 212, 108, 124 and 176 2. 16, 315, 4, 1986 and 24 3. 63, 147, 8, 192, and 10 4. 14.3, 16.76, 9.6 and 8.7 5. 12.8, 509 and 200.6 6. 13.02, 3.8, 5.22 and 14 List 2 Calculate the average of the following numbers. 1. 346, 15 and 1307 2. 16, 315, 4, 1986 and 24 3. 25, 125, 5, 25, and 225 4. 15.4, 34.7 and 75.9 5. 18, 120.9 and 221.1 6. 13.02, 3.8, 5.22 and 14
  • 179.
    TOPIC 9 AVERAGES 175 Procedures: 1. Prepare four lists of questions on finding averages. Some of the questions may be the same on each list. 2. Prepare 24 cards, each showing the calculated average for each question on each list. Tape these cards to the walls of the classroom. 3. Divide the children into four teams. 4. Give one of the lists to each of the team. (You might want to provide a copy of the list for every member of the team). 5. Have the children calculate the averages for the numbers on their list. 6. Have the team members search for the answer cards taped on the walls  A set of data can be described by choosing a single number that indicates where the data in the set are centred or concentrated. The number most commonly used to characterise a set of data is the arithmetic mean, frequently called the average.  The understanding of average can be developed through using concrete materials and visual manipulation like using the interlocking cubes.  Three types or measures of central tendency can be calculated. They are the arithmetical average (mean), mode and median. Distorted Average Mean (Average) Median Mode of the classroom. 7. The first team to correctly calculate the average and collect all the answer cards wins.
  • 180.
     TOPIC 9AVERAGES 176 Hatfield, M. H., Edwards, N. T., & Bitter, G. G. (1993). Mathematics methods for the elementary and middle school. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Kennedy, L. M., & Tipps, S. (2000). Guiding children’s learning of mathematics. US: Allyn & Wadsworth. Rucker, W. E., & Dilley, C. A. (1981). Heath mathematics. Washington DC: Heath and Company. Tucker, B. F., & Weaver, T. L. (2006). Teaching mathematics to all children. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall. Vance, J. H., & Cathcart, W. G. (2006). Learning mathematics in elementary and middle Schools. Ohio: Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • 181.
    Topic 10 Data Handling LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Use vocabulary related to data handling correctly as required by the Year 5 and Year 6 KBSR Mathematics Syllabus; 2. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to data handling; 3. Use the vocabulary related to data organisation in graphs correctly; 4. Apply the major mathematical skills and basic pedagogical content knowledge related to data organisation in graphs; and 5. Plan basic teaching and learning activities for data handling and data organisation in graphs.  INTRODUCTION Most of the important decision making of modern society is based on statistics, graphs and probability. In politics, advertising and economics, samples are organised, survey questions developed, answers sought, results tabulated and organised and predictions displayed with averages and graphs to show distributions, relationships and trends of the data collected before decisions are made. What will be the next flavour of cakes manufactured? Where will the land for the next supermarket be bought? Data handling has become an important aspect of life for many people today. Graphs and statistics are indispensable to comprehending the raw data on which decision making is based. A mass of data is incomprehensible. Averages supply a framework with which to describe what happens. Graphs supply a visual way of presenting the range of alternatives available and indicating where the density of
  • 182.
    178  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING interest lies. The forms of graph that are commonly used are bar graphs, histograms, picture graphs, line graphs and pie charts. Statistics within the primary school is predominantly the study of procedures for collecting, recording, organising and interpreting data. Data handling is introduced in primary schools in the belief that it is crucial for children to begin study of the concepts and processes in statistics, graphs and probability as early as possible. The difficulty lies in the lack of knowledge of what aspects of data handling are suitable for primary children. Many primary school teachers have little preparation for teaching data handling and little experience of it being taught to them. By reading and applying what is written in this topic, it is expected that teachers will be able to: (a) Show pupils that statistics and graphs are part of mathematical activities in their daily lives; (b) Show pupils the connections between statistics and graphs to basic numbers and space concepts; and (c) Allow pupils to conduct simple statistical investigations and graphical presentations. ACTIVITY 10.1 Can you think of reasons why data handling exists in our lives? List down the reasons before you could compare them with your partner. PEDAGOGICAL CONTENT KNOWLEDGE 10.1 Important information regarding the content and pedagogical aspects for teaching data handling covers the following aspects: (a) Statistical measures such as range, mode, median and mean; (b) Collecting, recording, organising and interpreting data; (c) Statistical procedures on organising data such as tables, charts and diagrams; and (d) Types of graphs used to visualise data.
  • 183.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  179 Mean: 60.07 inches Median: 62.50 inches Range: 42 inches Variance: 117.681 Standard deviation: 10.85 inches Minimum: 36 inches Maximum: 78 inches First quartile: 51.63 inches Third quartile: 67.38 inches Count: 58 bears Sum: 3438.1 inches 2 1 0 Black Bears 3 4 5 6 7 8 Frequency Length in Inches Figure 10.1: Histogram showing the statistics of Black Bears ACTIVITY 10.2 Figure 10.1 above shows an example of how a histogram can be used to visualize data on black bears. List down four other graphical representations and show how they differ from one another. 10.1.1 Statistical Measures Computational statistics is a large and complex branch of mathematics with significance for the social as well as physical and biological sciences. However, in primary schools, pupils will be exposed only to the simplest of descriptive statistics. The statistical measures studied in Year 5 and Year 6 are range, mean, mode and median. (a) Range In a list of data, range is the difference between the greatest and the least value. Consider the following results (out of 20) in a mathematics test for two groups of students (the BLUE and the RED): The BLUE scores: 6, 8, 10, 10, 5, 6, 11, 8, 11, 6, 7 The RED scores: 7, 9, 12, 14, 7, 9, 9, 5, 16, 9, 13
  • 184.
    180  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING The range for the BLUE group is 11 – 5 = 6, while the range for the RED group is 16 – 5 = 11. (b) Mean Mean is the average of the scores. To calculate it, the scores are added and the result is divided by the number of scores. In the example above, the mean for the BLUE group is 6 + 8 + 10 + 10 + 5 + 6 + 11+ 8 + 11 + 6 + 7 = 88, 88 divided by 11 is 8. While the mean for the RED group is 7 + 9 + 12 + 14 + 7 + 9 + 9 + 5 + 16 + 9 + 13 = 110, 110 divided by 11 is 10. (c) Mode Mode is the most commonly occurring score. In the example above, the mode for the BLUE group is 6, while the mode for the RED group is 9. (d) Median Median is the middle score when the scores are arranged in ascending order. In the above example, there are 11 scores altogether, therefore the median is the sixth score when the scores are arranged in ascending order. BLUE: 5, 6, 6, 6, 7, 8, 8, 10, 10, 11, 11 RED: 5, 7, 7, 9, 9, 9, 9, 12, 13, 14, 16 Hence, the median for the BLUE group is 8 and the median for the RED group is 9. Note: If there is an even number of scores (say 10), then the median is halfway between the half “score” and the next score (example: half way between the 5th and the 6th score in ascending order). For example, for scores 5, 9, 3, 8, 6, 4, 6, 3 The arrangement of the scores in ascending order is 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 8, 9 And the fourth score is 5 and the fifth score is 6. This means that the median is 5 + 6 = 11 divided by 2, and that will be 5.5.
  • 185.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  181 10.1.2 Collecting, Recording, Organising and Interpreting Data Data handling can be a valuable aid in decision making. A commonly used format to investigate problems (Thompson et al; 1976) is stated in the following 5 steps: (a) Recognise and clearly formulate a problem; (b) Collect relevant data; (c) Organise the data appropriately; (d) Analyse and interpret the data; and (e) Relate the statistics obtained from the data to the original problem. The five step format in using data to make decisions can be illustrated with the example adapted from Thompson et al (1976). (a) A group of children wished to send a representative to a softball throwing contest. Three children volunteered. Each volunteer was asked to make five throws which were measured with a trundle wheel to the nearest metre. The results were: Table 10.1: Result of softball throwing contest Volunteers Their 5 throws ( to the nearest metre) Shahar 28, 23, 22, 24, 27 Bala 24, 23, 27, 24, 27 Tony 23, 27, 29, 18, 26 (b) To help comprehend these results, the children tallied them into a frequency table and graphed them onto bar graphs. They then calculated the mean, median and range for each volunteer. The tables and the bar graphs are shown below: Table 10.2: The frequency Distance of throw (m) 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Shahar 1 1 1 1 1 Bala 1 2 2 Tony 1 1 1 1 1
  • 186.
    182  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING Bar Graph: Shahar 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 F r e q u e n c y 3 2 1 0 Length of throw (m) Bar Graphs: Bala 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 F r e q u e n c y 3 2 1 0 Length of throw (m) Bar Graphs: Tony 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 F r e q u e n c y 3 2 1 0 Length of throw (m) Figure 10.2: Statistical measures Next, the three statistical measures, mean, median an range are calculated and tabulated in the table below.
  • 187.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  183 Table 10.3: Three Statistical Measures Mean Median Range Shahar 24.8 24 6 Bala 25.0 24 4 Tony 24.6 26 11 Based on the frequency table, bar graphs and the statistical measures constructed, ask your students the following questions. (c) Who would be the best representative? Why? Who is the most consistent? Why? Who has the longest throw? (d) What should be our criteria for selecting the best representative? Who has the best typical throw? How do we define typical? Is consistency important? Should we have measured more or less than five throws? Should bad throws be excluded? Is anything important lost in rounding to the nearest metre? (e) Would it make it easier if we tallied the throws into sections, say 15-19, 20- 24, 25-29 etc.? ACTIVITY 10.3 Write your answers for these two questions and compare them with your partner next to you. 1. What are statistical measures? 2. Why is it necessary for children to know how to collect, record, organise and interpret data? 10.1.3 Methods of Organising Data The appropriate methods of organising data that seem suitable for the primary years are interpreting and constructing simple tables, charts and diagrams that are commonly used in everyday life to display information. The basis of this component is the organisation of raw data into collections. This means determining the extent of the possible outcomes, forming these into categories and
  • 188.
    184  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING organising the data under these categories. The techniques that may have to be used in this process are combinatorial counting (to determine all the possible outcomes) and tallying (to organise the data under the categories). Let us begin this section by introducing to you the tables. (a) Tables (i) The simple table An example of this simple table is the table of contents on a cereal packet. It consists of words and figures in two columns (refer to Figure 10.3). Oats Meal Cereal: Average contents per serving: Vitamin C 25 mg Iron 27 mg Niacin 11 mg Riboflavin 38 mg Figure 10.3: Table of contents on a cereal packet (ii) The regular table The regular table is the matrix style table where there are more than two columns (more than column of data). The everyday example is the bus timetable. It is useful when comparing, for example, results from one year to another or between different people. Another common example of this table is in advertisements where prices at different shops are compared (refer to Table 10.4). Table 10.4: Materials Collected by the Children in 6 Orkid Bakar Muthu Chong Mary Rokiah Bottle tops 5 8 7 6 2 Cotton reels 9 3 5 2 8 Egg Cartons 5 7 2 9 3 Plastic spoons 3 5 8 3 7 (b) Charts Charts are less regular in terms of rows and columns. They attempt to display information more visually, to relate the display to what actually occurs. As such, we have the road maps and bus routes of transport and the time lines of history.
  • 189.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  185 (i) The strip map This may be the bus route of an area or the time line of a history topic. A line is drawn and on this line are marked references to major features (refer to Figure 10.4). Bus Route: Ipoh Tapah Bidor Sungkai The Rule of King Willhem: Coronation The Great War Birth of Prince Henry Birth of Prince Derek Death of the Duke Figure 10.4: Bus route of an area or time line of a history topic (ii) The branch map This is a combination of strip maps, involving branching as in a tree. The most straight forward examples are the road maps or genealogy diagrams (family tree of parents, grandparents etc.). The skill of following directions from a map is an important life skill that our children must master. An example of a family tree is shown below. Kamal Baharuddin and Fauziah Hamid Kassim Fauziah m Ahmad Karim m Rokiah Kamsiah Siti Yusuf Kamarul Figure 10.5: Kamal Baharuddin’s family tree
  • 190.
    186  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING (a) Diagrams These are visual ways to represent membership in different sets and subsets. A Venn diagram and a Carroll diagram could be considered the most favourable diagrams used to show the relationship between the members of a given group of objects. (i) Venn Diagram: An example of a Venn diagram for flowers in terms of red and scented. Neither red nor scented Red Flowers Scented flowers Red and scented Figure 10.6: Venn Diagram (ii) Carroll Diagram: An example of a Carroll diagram for flowers in terms of red and scented. Red Not Red Scented Red and scented flowers Not red and scented flowers Not Scented Red and not scented flowers Not red and not scented flowers Figure 10.7: Carroll diagram 10.1.4 Types of Graphs The importance of graphs in primary schools arises from two simple ideas (a) A picture is worth a thousand words; and (b) Mathematics is a study of relationships.
  • 191.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  187 Graphs are not in the syllabus to give light relief to the numerical activities. Their purpose is to improve communication and understanding, especially for children of lower ability. However, we can all gain insight to complicated statistical information if it is displayed in a graphical manner. Obviously, knowing how to draw graphs and to draw inferences from them are valuable skills to acquire. Bar graphs, picture graphs, line graphs, circle graphs and scatter graphs, can all be used to visualise data. These various forms of graphs are commonly seen in real life – in magazines, newspapers, textbooks and advertisements. The objective in using a graph is to visually present information in a form which enables it to be assimilated “at a glance” as compared to a list of numbers. Graphs are yet further examples of representing information in such a way that patterns are evident or worthwhile seeking. If particular patterns emerge, time and time again we can conclude that, indeed, some generalisation can be made about the circumstances we are representing. Hypothesis can be formulated and tested and a visual display made of the results. Concepts are more clearly understood as a consequence and fundamental principals are consolidated. (i) Bar graphs Bar graphs facilitate comparisons of quantities. Bar graphs can be vertical as well as horizontal (columns as well as rows). They can also be in the form of blocks, or bar lines. The following are examples of bar graphs (Figure 10.8): Cats Dogs Fish Birds 0 5 10 15 20 25 (a) Horizontal Bar Graph: Types of pets children have
  • 192.
    188  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING Bus Car Bicycle Motorcycle 25 20 15 10 5 (b) Vertical Bar Graph: Types of vehicles children use to go to school Figure 10.8 (a) & (b): Bar graphs (ii) Picture Graphs Picture graphs can also facilitate comparisons of quantities just like bar graphs. They can easily be updated. Picture graphs are also called pictographs and isotypes. An example of a picture graph is shown below. KEY: represents RM 100 Class A Class B Class C Class D Figure 10.9: Picture Graph Money accumulated for classroom projects
  • 193.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  189 (iii) Line Graphs Line graphs can be used for comparisons and for expressing allocations of resources, but they seem particularly useful for communicating trends. Here is an example of a line graph. 40oC 30oC 20oC 10oC Mon Tue Wed Thurs Fri Figure 10.10: Line graph maximum temperatures during the week (iv) Circle Graphs Circle graphs (also known as pie charts) are used to picture the totality of a quantity and to indicate how portions of the totality are allocated. Here is a circle graph indicating how one college student spent his budget. College Costs Room and Board Entertainment Clothing Miscellaneous Figure 10.11: Circle graph: Kamaruddin’s budget (v) Scatter graphs Scatter graphs are similar to line graphs which show the relationship between two different sets of data. The scatter graph is made for data which is not in sequence (in terms of the horizontal axis) and is unsuitable for a line graph. Here is a scatter graph which shows that mass is related to height.
  • 194.
    190  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING 50 kg 100 kg 150 kg 200 kg 200 cm 150 cm 100 cm 50 cm Figure 10.12: Scatter graph weight and height of students SELF-CHECK 10.1 1. Describe briefly the three methods of organising data. 2. Explain the five types of graphs with the help of visual representations. MAJOR MATHEMATICAL SKILLS FOR DATA HANDLING IN YEAR 5 AND YEAR 6 10.2 Our students will learn the topic of data handling effectively if we plan the lessons systematically. A well organised conceptual development of statistical measures, collecting, recording, organising and interpreting of data will be very helpful for our students to understand these concepts better. It is recommended to instruct this topic within a problem solving environment and in a less stressful manner. Remember to provide opportunities for our students to differentiate the different types of graphs and when they are best used.
  • 195.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  191 The major mathematical skills to be mastered by pupils studying the topic of data handling in Year 5 and Year 6 are as follows: (a) Average (i) Describe the meaning of average; (ii) State the average of two, three, four or five quantities; (iii) Calculate the average using a formula; and (iv) Solve problems in real life situations. (b) Data Collection (i) Collect data; (ii) Process data; and (iii) Analyse data. (c) Pictograph (i) Identify pictograph which represents one or more than one unit; (ii) Extract information from a pictograph; and (iii) Construct a pictograph. (d) Bar Charts (i) Identify characteristics of a bar chart; (ii) Extract information from a bar chart; and (ii) Construct a bar chart. TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES 10.3 This section begins by describing the teaching and learning activities for you to conduct a lesson on data handling. Let us do Activity 10.4 first. Enjoy!
  • 196.
    192  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING 10.3.1 Average ACTIVITY 10.4 Learning Outcomes:  To state the average of two, three, four or five quantities  To calculate the average using a formula Materials:  Task Cards  Answer Sheets Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of five students and give each student an Answer Sheet. 2. Ask the students to write their name on the Answer Sheet. 3. Shuffle the Five Task Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Instruct each player to begin by drawing a card from the stack. 5. Instruct the player to write all the answers to the questions in the card drawn on the Answer Sheet. 6. After a period of time (to be determined by the teacher), the pupils in the group exchange cards with the pupil on their left in a clockwise direction. 7. Pupils repeat steps (5 and 6) until everyone has answered the questions in all the cards. 8. The pupil with the most number of correct answers, wins. 9. Teacher summarises the lesson on the meaning of average. Example of an Answer Sheet:
  • 197.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  193 Name :___________________ Class :__________ Card A Card B Card C 1._____ 1._____ 1._____ 2._____ 2._____ 2._____ 3._____ 3._____ 3._____ Card D Card E 1._____ 1._____ 2._____ 2._____ 3._____ 3._____ Example of a Task Card: Task Card A 1. Calculate the average of 264 and 246. Average = _______________ 2. Calculate the average of RM273, RM264 and RM 252. Average = RM ___________ 3. Find the average of 4.2 km, 5.1 km, 4900 m and 5 km. Average = ___________ km ACTIVITY 10.5 Work with your friend in class to prepare four other Task Cards. There should be three questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 10.4.
  • 198.
    194  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING 10.3.2 Organising and Interpreting Data ACTIVITY 10.6 Learning Outcomes:  To recognise frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a bar graph; and  To find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given bar graph. Materials:  30 different Flash Cards; and  Clean writing papers. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of three students and give each group a clean writing paper. 2. Ask the students to write their names on the clean paper given. 3. Shuffle the Flash Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 4. Instruct Player A to begin by drawing a card from the stack. He shows the card to Player B. 5. Instruct Player B to read the answers within the stipulated time (decided by the teacher). 6. Instruct Player C to write the points below Player B’s name. Each correct answer is awarded one point (a maximum of 6 points for each Flash Card). 7. Players repeat steps (4 and 5) until all 10 cards have been drawn by Player A. 8. Repeat steps (3 through 6) until all the players have the opportunity to read all 10 Flash Cards shown to them. 9. The winner is the group of students that has the most number of points. 10. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given bar graph.
  • 199.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  195 Example of a Flash Card: Flash Card 1 Mass of fish caught in kg Mon 150 100 50 Tue Wed Thurs Days 1. What is the most common amount of fish caught? Answer: __________ kg 2. What is the mass of fish caught on Monday? Answer: __________ kg 3. Find the average mass of fish caught in the four days. Answer: __________ kg 4. What is the minimum mass of fish caught? Answer: __________ kg 5. What is the maximum mass of fish caught? Answer: __________ kg 6. Find the range between the maximum and the minimum mass of fish caught. Answer: __________ kg ACTIVITY 10.7 Work with three friends of yours in class to prepare twenty-nine other Flash Cards. There should be six questions in each Flash Card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 10.6.
  • 200.
    196  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING 10.3.3 Pie Chart ACTIVITY 10.8 Learning Outcomes:  To recognise frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a pie chart; and  To find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given pie chart. Materials:  Task Sheets;  Clean writing papers; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four to six students. Give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. The teacher sets up five stations in the classroom and places a Task Sheet at each station. 3. The teacher instructs students to solve the questions in the Task Sheet at each station. 4. Each group will spend 10 minutes at each station. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will have to move on to the next station in the clockwise direction. 6. At the end of 50 minutes, the teacher collects the answer papers. 7. The group with the highest score (highest number of correct answers) is the winner. 8. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to find the frequency, mode, range, average, minimum and maximum value from a given pie chart.
  • 201.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  197 Example of a Task Sheet: STATION 1 The pie chart below shows the colours of 1,000 marbles owned by Gopal. White 19% Blue Black 5% Red 25% Green 19% 1. What is the percentage of blue marbles? Answer:___________ 2. What is the most common colour of the marbles? Answer:___________ 3. Calculate the range. Answer:___________ 4. Find the average percentage of the different colours of marbles owned by Gopal. Answer:___________ ACTIVITY 10.9 Work with two of your friends to prepare four other Task Sheets for the other stations. There should be four questions in each sheet. Make sure your sheets are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 10.8.
  • 202.
    198  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING 10.3.4 Problem Solving ACTIVITY 10.10 Learning Outcomes:  To solve problems involving average; and  To solve problems involving graphs. Materials:  Activity Cards;  Clean writing papers; and  Colour pencils. Procedure: 1. Divide the class into groups of four pupils and give each group a different colour pencil and a clean writing paper. 2. Shuffle a set of 12 Activity Cards and place them face down in a stack at the centre. 3. Teacher signals to the students to begin solving the questions in the first Activity Card drawn. 4. Once they have completed the first Card, they may continue with the next Activity Card. 5. At the end of 10 minutes, the groups will stop and hand their answer papers to the teacher. 6. The group with the highest score is the winner. 7. Teacher summarises the lesson on how to solve problems in real contexts involving averages and graphs. ACTIVITY 10.10 ACTIVITY 1
  • 203.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  199 Example of an Activity Card: Activity Card 1 1. The total score of Ali, Babu and Chin in a mathematics test is 260. The average score of Ali and Chin is 85. Find Babu’s score. 2. The average mass of four pupils is 22.9kg. Ali joins the group and the average mass of the pupils is now 23.6 kg. What is Ali’s mass in kg? Questions 3 and 4 are based on the bar graph below. Amount of money saved by four students Suzy 150 100 50 Samy Sarah Samsul Girl Money (RM) 3. What is the percentage of money saved by Sarah? 4. What is the difference between the amount of money saved by Samy and Samsul? ACTIVITY 10.11 Prepare 11 other Activity Cards for the group. There should be four questions in each card. Make sure your cards are based on the learning outcomes of Activity 10.10.
  • 204.
    200  TOPIC10 DATA HANDLING  Most of the important decision-making carried out in modern society is based on statistics, graphs and probabilities.  Graphs and statistics are indispensable to comprehending the raw data on which decision-making is based.  Statistics within the primary school is predominantly the study of procedures for the collection, recording, organisation and interpretation of data.  Many primary school teachers have little preparation for teaching data handling and little experience of it being taught to them.  In a list of data, range is the difference between the greatest and the least value. Mean is the average of the scores. Mode is the most commonly occurring score. Median is the middle score when the scores have been arranged in an ascending order.  A commonly used format to investigate problems in data handling are the following 5 steps: – Recognise and clearly formulate a problem; – Collect relevant data; – Organise the data appropriately; – Analyse and interpret the data; and – Relate the statistics obtained from the data to the original problem.  The appropriate methods of organising data that seem suitable for the primary years are interpreting and constructing simple tables, charts and diagrams that are commonly used in everyday life to display information.  Bar graphs, picture graphs, line graphs, circle graphs and scatter graphs, can all be used to picture data. These various forms of graphs are commonly seen in the real world – in magazines, newspapers, textbooks and advertisements.
  • 205.
    TOPIC 10 DATAHANDLING  201 Chart Diagram Graph Mean Median Mode Probability Range Raw data Statistics Table Anne Toh. (2007). Resos pembelajaran masteri: Mathematics year 5. Petaling Jaya: Pearson Malaysia. Bahagian Pendidikan Guru. (1998). Konsep dan aktiviti pengajaran dan pembelajaran matematik: Ukuran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Burrows, D., & Cooper, T. (1987). Statistics, graphs and probability in the primary school (trial materials). Queensland, Australia: Carseldine Campus. Nur Alia Abd. Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Siri intensif: Mathematics KBSR year 5. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Nur Alia Abd Rahman & Nandhini. (2008). Siri intensif : Mathematics KBSR year 6. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Fargoes. Ng, S.F. (2002). Mathematics in action workbook 2B (Part 1). Singapore: Pearson Education Asia. Clarke, P. et al. (2002). Maths spotlight activity sheets 1. Oxford: Heinemann Educational Publishers.